Home

international 8700

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. alo GSM 8700 MAIN BD 2l mor
7. TX Vi B H A 222 20 MB jj 20 58 691 Sem 1444 E 9 ag A 5l ab EIS zzj Y x 61 63 59 57 g EI B 8 Jer zz gy 0302 M 4 Nil nan coza 6229 GIFSYN 5 6 9201 7 N 5r 10 iE 23 L 500 Mi 301 12 o B 3g B 5 gt NI 8 LJ ri 5 522 3 N N 2 d 075 017 e TP5 x 2 n e VR801 TP17 T 503 J 5068 Lo 5 lt Y E 9T j S Call Processor Naa ar
8. zl L p DX XUI FFF te r e 4 812 901 fyrsod 2 El ag E 193 C C pao 2 B S aa BR dg dsp 2 2 052 Oo Rm E 14 422 S Elle 2 dBBB 8030 19 u 5 0101 re 4B 37 LU 08 5 SE 3 E E S E E E303 amp Hz k N BU U900 Jg vcozn nu E S U705 3 FE m 804 S bg 85 am R36 e 18 U 00 85 d 35 805 5 909 TIE N 5 amp m e I B R851 gt 18 981 BD 80 o e 6817 9 Gm B 6863 32 d80b 9951 EZE sp deg Ea R602 g gt gg qe i d a gP 5 57 n n nz eb 3 E a F k 603 edou oX 8579 246 cosy 50 35 554 959 092 HT Sup 73 16 17 2 n NM En E d e B Menn E 672
9. R51 B R516 425 6551 zn 55 TX V m 495 o fa 223 P 20 00 SM 2 nnn der o e E m l a 2 ob es Ga B 5 NR SER Y201 8 zs usi gt 308 p E EE 229 e d b 1 224 23 Hi 19 5 un n Bee 5 e d m L S Re11 IG 0302 g B 559 8352 432 449 2 n 093 ub ae 304 sor 029 9 SB 2203 LOSAN z E 5 B oo non gc mm 5 ON 37 2 a m E BE 6 3 8 2090 TP2 SP 242 A TP18 TP4 UUU 5 IN qoe 24 p 6241 51 S 5 SIR 623 058 led 5 s Mm m Dg S Ie oF s g gt C 2 o zu N A p 2 3 ez uu 43 02 o U805 amp C903 0999 RN B 00242 oh 0203 21 p Ko 250
10. TX Vi B H A 222 20 MB jj 20 58 691 Sem 1444 E 9 ag A 5l ab EIS zzj Y x 61 63 59 57 g EI B 8 Jer zz gy 0302 M 4 Nil nan coza 6229 GIFSYN 5 6 9201 7 N 5r 10 iE 23 L 500 Mi 301 12 o B 3g B 5 gt NI 8 LJ ri 5 522 3 N N 2 d 075 017 e TP5 x 2 n e VR801 TP17 T 503 J 5068 Lo 5 lt Y E 9T j S Call Processor Naa ar da alin En p25 j de 38 g 26 gn a 25 251 LOZN d m t 529 95231 Cs 1802 21 2 af 55 5 gt d de Dig Pot g 54 5 D 11 153 MHz Filter EE 858 Codec 5 625 E FL420 801 5 R82 551 TI 60 bel 3 cogn g 2798 5 t eo pa ea 8 Teil n 701 Ox n 073 831 N e ud RX 2 75V 2 75V SW VCC High Tech Centre Flensburg J400 RX SIGNAL Q European Cellular Subscriber Division March 1997 1 GND 6 GND TX SIGNAL Tx modulated 108 MHz Main
11. IMEI 15 digits lt 6 digits 2 digits 6 digits 1 digit TAC FAC SNR SP Type Final Serial Spare Approval Assembly Number Code Code REV S H This configuration consists of two blocks of two digits and denotes the software and hardware versions within the unit The first two digits correspond to the software version and the last two digits correspond to the hardware version If a version update is carried out on the unit the corresponding change information should be made apparent on the labelling Model The model number defines the type of product Each product type is issued a common model number Package The package number is used to determine the type of equipment the mode in which it was sold and the language with which it was shipped 68P09392A89 9 o lt pue Ainu pi 25 c o 5242 GSM 8700 6700 SIM CARDS Introduction The Motorola GSM 8700 6700 personal cellular telephones are designed to work with the full size Subscriber Identity Module SIM The SIM card contains all the personal data required to access GSM services Data held by the SIM card includes International Mobile Subscriber Identity Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity Home system Services subscribed to PIN and unblocking codes Call barring codes The SIM card may also be capable of storing phone number
12. Suffix Description Part Number U802 POTENTIOMETER 5109632D44 U803 CODEC 5109920D06 U804 MUX DEMUX 5109522E10 U805 CLOCK DOUBLER 5109781E47 U900 GCAP IC 5109632D54 U1701 5V REG 5109781 50 VR602 amp 3 DIODE 4813830M25 Y201 CRYSTAL 13MHZ 4809813J02 GSM 6700 Mechanical 79 Table 12 GSM 6700 Replacement Parts List dd Motorola Part No Description SUF3997A GSM 6700 Transceiver 1 TBD Spare Main Board 2 TBD Spare Keyboard 3 0109006J21 Bezel Plum Look GSM 6700 4 0109165B15 Front Housing Assembly 5 0109166B08 Rear Housing Assembly 6 0109189C01 GSM Antenna Assembly 7 0109451B05 Display DCS PCS 6700 i 0109505C10 SIM Carder Reader Contact Assembly i 0310944A05 Screw intstrpan 0310944A70 Screw phosoil 8 0909958J04 External Connector 3209158B01 Gasket RF 9 3509013R01 Mylar clear dust shield 10 3509133B05 Mylar black cover 11 3809074B01 Antenna cap 12 3809298J01 Keypad Plum Look GSM 6700 13 3909014B01 Antenna Recp Contact 14 4009184 01 Switch keypad dome 4009394B01 Switch tact spst 12V i 4009608M03 Switch SMT Card Reader Presence 4109083R02 Switch compression 1 17 97 68 09392 89 55 GSM 8700 6700 Table 12 GSM 6700 Replacement Parts List ins Motorola Part No Description 4109492C01 Gizmo
13. a 49 Release button 9 Removal 16 SMS messages 43 Special keys 9 Status review 2 2 4 4014 4 4 51 10 Talk and 39 63 ba e edad 56 Tones Selecting keypad tones 50 Setting ringer tones 48 Transmission rate 39 Travel charger 14 Troubleshooting 67 U Unblocking your phone 49 Unconditional call diversion 38 62 Unlock code 17 Setting and changing 48 V VibraCall 222 42 47 63 Voicemail Calling eto rotes 44 NUMDET 46 Volume Adjusting the earpiece and keypad volume eene 9 Adjusting the ringer volume 47 BUTTONS 9 What utis 67
14. Communications Analyzer GSM Compatible ORO 1 Unit To Be Tested ce DOO RF In out cD GD Port GSM T Test Adaptor d SKN4683A or a d SKN4665A Plugs into accessory connector of phone SMA Connector Not Connected Manual Test Mode Introduction The Motorola GSM 8700 6700 personal cellular telephones are equipped with Manual Test Mode capability This capability allows service personnel to take control of the telephone and by entering certain keypad sequences make the telephone perform desired functions To enter the Manual Test Mode a Test SIM card Part No 8102430Z01 is required Test SIM Card Insertion removal The Test SIM card must be inserted into the unit correctly to access Manual Test Mode 14 68P09392A89 The whole SIM card should slide completely and securely into the slot at the base of the phone Ensure that the contacts of the card face towards the front of the phone i e towards the flip See SIM Card Insertion Removal on page 10 The sliding card release button will move upwards as the SIM card is inserted When the button reaches the top of its recess and the card is flus
15. da alin En p25 j de 38 g 26 gn a 25 251 LOZN d m t 529 95231 Cs 1802 21 2 af 55 5 gt d de Dig Pot g 54 5 D 11 153 MHz Filter EE 858 Codec 5 625 E FL420 801 5 R82 551 TI 60 bel 3 cogn g 2798 5 t eo pa ea 8 Teil n 701 Ox n 073 831 N e ud RX 2 75V 2 75V SW VCC High Tech Centre Flensburg J400 RX SIGNAL Q European Cellular Subscriber Division March 1997 1 GND 6 GND TX SIGNAL Tx modulated 108 MHz Main signal 794 4 MHz DRAWINGS Rev 1 0 2 EXT B 7 PWR SW wp VCO TX VCO tuning voltage 5 13 MHz clock e 3 DSC EN B 8 AUDIO IN 84094 14R1 3C VI 6700 8700 SIGNAL WAYS EN B gt TUNING VOLTAGES TX VCO feedback 902 4 MHz 13 MHz clock GSM 8700 TRANSCEIVER 4 DOWNLINK 9 MAN_TEST SCALE 4 1 DATE 15 OCT 96 Author Michael Hansen Technical Support Page 2 of 3 S UPLINK 10 FDBK REF CLOCK TX PA feedback 902 4 MHz 9 26 MHz clock Phone Book Menu 1 Personal Numbers A r Find Entry By Name Find Entry By Location Add Entry Check Capacity Prevent Access Last Ten Calls 77 Last Calls Made L Last Calls Received if Erase All Numbers My Phone Number s Fi J Dialling View
16. PINa cp PIN9 PIN1O PIN11 PIN12 PIN13 PIN14 RX OUT24V R475 R45 GND R275 GND vco 902 4MHz CHECK PRESENCE OF SIGAL FOLLOWING THE SCHEMATIC AS ABOVE TO DECIPHER WICH IS THE FAULTY LINE IF EVERITHINGS ARE CORRECT REPLACE U300 TX7 IS R475 NO PRESENT AT NO CHECK 228 PIN 44 U900 PIN 02012 41 YES YES NO IS RX 2 75V CHECK FOR BAD SOLDER REPLACE PRESENT AT O PNS U201 AND AFTER REPLACE U2012 v ves CHECK FOR BAD SOLDER CR203 L203 AFTER REPLAGE REPLAGE U201 NO SERVICE AT 102dBm SET THE COMMUNICATIONANALYZER TO INJECT VIA ANTENNA PLUG 30dBm AT 947 4MHz PUT THE RADIO IN TEST MODE AND LOAD SYNTHETIZER WITH 33062 COMMAND START IS RX1 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL CORRECT ON PIN 5 OF U400 Se IS RX2 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL p RX REPAIR 2 CORRECT ON C407 IS RX3 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL gt RX REPAIR 3 CORRECT ON 408 RX REPAIR 1 v YES IS RX4 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL RX REPAIR 4 CORRECT ON C409 YES IS RX4 794 4 MHz VCO NO SIGNAL gt VCO REPAIR CORRECT ON C409 YES NO SERVICE AT 102dBm IS RX5 153MHz CORRECT ON 426 YES IS RX6 153MHz CORRECT ON C421 YES IS RX7 153MHz CORRECT ON PIN 31 OF U201 YES ARE RXI AND RXQ CORRECT AT PIN 14 AND 15 OF U501 YES
17. TEST TO BE PERFORMED LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT Transmit average phase error RMS at peak power 5 Transmit average phase error Peak at peak power 20 Transmit average frequency error at peak power 90 Hz 90 Hz Transmit power error at level 5 33 dBm 2 dB 2 dB Transmit power error at level 7 29 dBm 2 dB 2 dB Transmit power error at level 10 23 dBm 3 dB 3 dB Transmit power error at level 15 13 dBm 3 dB 3 dB Transmit amplitude negative peak flatness 1 dB Transmit amplitude positive peak flatness 1 dB Transmit amplitude envelope at 28 us 70 dB Transmit amplitude envelope at 18 us 30 dB Transmit amplitude envelope at 10 us 6 dB Transmit amplitude envelope at 556 us 6 dB Transmit amplitude envelope at 564 us 30 dB Transmit amplitude envelope at 574 us 70 dB Receive Bit Error Test for Class II Residual at 102 dBm 2 Receive Frame Erasure Rate for RES II at 102 dBm 0 12 16 Note 1 The transmit average test values should be derived from 10 separate readings 2 The receive signal strength for transmit measurements should be 85 dBm 3 The receive test values should be derived from the reception of 20K bits of data 4 There is approximately 1 8dB loss between the antenna port and the RF SMA connector on the test adaptor The test specifications are written for the power levels AT THE ANTENNA 68P09304A68 DTest4 1 12 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PORTABLE Cellular Subscriber Group CEL
18. 5 RESIDUAL CAPACITY LOSS Fully charged batteries lose their charged capacity even when not in use this is commonly referred to as self discharge Nickel Metal Hydride batteries self discharge at 68P09304A68 O a faster rate than Nickel Cadmium batteries Up to 50 of the batteries capacity can be lost after a one week storage period Therefore it is advisable to recharge battery packs that have not been used for 3 days or more A Batteries may explode if disposed of in fire 6 BATTERY MAINTENANCE The only maintenance required is recharging the battery and keeping the contacts clean a pencil eraser works well Use only a Motorola approved charger The use of other chargers unless approved will void the battery guarantee and may result in permanent damage to the battery and the radio Follow the charging instructions which accompany each charger battery packs are considered to be non serviceable Defective batteries should be replaced 7 STORAGE Rechargeable battery performance and life is affected by storage conditions Battery packs should be stored in cool dry environments to obtain the best operation Nickel Metal Hydride batteries experience significantly shorter cycle lives after prolonged storage at high temperatures 8 OPERATING TEMPERATURES For the best possible performance battery packs should be used where the ambient operating temperatures are between 0 and 40
19. ZH vr 18 WAdoW Loan 290 Ieuueuo 2 esl d Ieuueuo ZH 7276 XY gj ap 5914 V ZHAESL 02 13 ap 3 290 2 4 46 11041266 52 153579 1X 4 U l 50 ASE Xd 51 ES mum 3579 2011 g nodo ZHWSE NZL PD 2 4 5713 i 53 9 dO 813 HS 9 1020 una 69 u Ni 268492 ap se 19 22 29 XOXL n 1901 ka T z g 5 dre 8 I g _ o I T 006 UDI p d 5 s ESB x E 80 g 2 9656 29 ESP 3N71 45 HOLYTIINSO 4 s Z 17201 53 24 sp amp amp 91008 sg i Xt dd ME S saesoyureo Hari Ol m x1 sdwe seq uii 9199 ns HOLIMSA 78801 NLIV dH nen wawi ASL AGES HA 2199 15 so Wa ZHAPZ06 lapsi AS 34
20. s0 n AB XL WOYUdII grzn a SO WO0 us 13530 AS LS JH 15102101 ZH ZZ L KH anode Ndxu L 2608n OL Bunoous 1 17 97 68 09392 89 48 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group GSM 8700 6700 Replacement Parts GSM 8700 Electrical Table 9 Replacement Parts List 79 Suffix Description Part Number C202 CAPACITOR 150pF 2113740F57 C203 CAPACITOR 2113740F43 C904 C905 CAPACITOR 33 uF CAPACITOR 0 1 uF 2113740F27 2113743E20 CR201 DIODE 4809641F04 CR998 DIODE 4809653F02 FL420 FILTER 9109449C01 FL451 FL452 FILTER 9109123R01 J2 41 PIN PLUG 2809882L05 J400 RECEPTACLE 0909958J04 J1101 41 PIN RECEPT 0909883L04 J1601 SIM CONTACT RDR 0109505C10 J802 MIC SMD RECEPT 0909888M01 Q102 TRANSISTOR 4813823A07 Q104 TRANSISTOR 4809579E09 Q300 TRANSISTOR 4803827A02 Q301 Q302 TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR 4809703N01 4813827M40 Q381 TRANSISTOR 4883477R07 Q418 TRANSISTOR 4809527E20 Q420 TRANSISTOR 4809940E01 Q421 TRANSISTOR 4809940E01 Q442 Q443 TRANSISTOR 4809939C08 Q905 Q906 TRANSISTOR 4809607E02 Q998 TRANSISTOR 4809579E04 Q1800 TRANSISTOR 4813824A10 Q1801 TRANSISTOR 4883533103 R734 R738 RESISTOR 0660076N77 R739 R746 S1602 SIM PRESEN
21. 29 m 2 P 1 9 o PE HA JL RS e fia ROME 5 T d 3 ER mm 5 5 Sour 8 mod pew 23 w gt 177 ROMICS dh N N GIZMO CONNECTOR RESET lt VEG DATA_BUSCD15 DD 3 gt d TO RF lt lt 7 THERM 00 TO RF PUMP R475 gt VREF R740 15 10 GIF SYN TO RF j 1599 ad ms C819 n mer 2B M Km 9 t AM EE 5 1589 amp T susp 10 RF 15 m Y idi E aii caos 1509 m R755 pon Eus SS 592 584 555 356 507 958 599 3510 NN 15K 15k 196 HOH ON OFF SENSE 59 Sis fj aw TO RF E DSC_EN OSC EN gs T lec TT T 2807 2809 VAG Be SENSE ook 59 550 ES 100 NNN PIT Bof Ser Tm ne gos Mu BATI SENSE ae al T BY PASSES FOR ae us ND AN A sisense vom Tb pa 12 1906 AUD_EN2 4 la 1278 in m R748 AUD_EN1 4 su eu dee lee 185 198 195 wt ndi AWS E in aent m R803 lt T CLK_AUD P Li B DSC EN B 75re70M x 1 G 1S LARGEST 30 X 60 gt L500 77 b E B MCN MIC_AUD_1N E P 3
22. FL451 Fit ETA 00 8 00 9 WSD abo B B B R2 75V _ _ from Q202 C
23. 1 17 97 68P09392A89 23 GSM 8700 6700 Step4 The Logic RF board can now removed completely from the front housing Step 5 Carefully unclip the plastic slider plate starting from the opposite side to the SIM card eject button 5 E G 2 Step6 Pry out the Keypad Display board using a plastic bladed tool The Keypad and Display easily lift out of front housing 24 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Flip Removal Step 1 To remove the flip hold it 1 17 97 fully open to expose the two slots on the shaft Using a dental pick locate the small holes on the hinge cams Push hinge cam in turn towards the center of the flip while easing the flip outwards Disassembly 68P09392A89 25 Ajquiassesiq GSM 8700 6700 gt Ke E 2 26 68 09392 89 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group TROUBLESHOOTING GSM 8700 6700 Troubleshooting Introduction Assembly replacement level trouble shooting and repair of the GSM 8700 6700 personal telephone is limited to those components listed in the Replacement Parts List See Replacement Parts on page 49 It is recommended that known good replacement parts and assemblies be avail able to be used for troubleshooting by substitution and for replacement of parts assemblies found t
24. ARE THE ACTIVITY PRESENT AT PIN 4 6 AND 8 OF U501 YES NO NO NO NO NO RX REPAIR 5 RX REPAIR 6 RX REPAIR 7 RX REPAIR 8 RX REPAIR 9 CENTRE TRY TO REPHASE VIA GATE 22 IF STILL NO FUNCTION CHANGE U501 IF ANY MENTIONED ACTION RESOLVE THE PROBLEM RETURN PCB TO HI TECH NO SERVICE AT 102dBm RX1 FROM ANTENNA PORT CHECK L439 C440 FOR BAD SOLDER AND AFTER REPLACE U400 FROM SWITCH RF CHECK L443 C442 FOR BAD SOLDER AND AFTER REPLACE U400 RX2 CHECK IF FL451 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL451 RX3 TAKES ON Q418 DC MEASUREMENT LIKE AS FOLLOWING 1 3V B Q 418 C 2 7V 0 5V E IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPLLY BY RX275 CHECK Q203 AND ASSOCIATE CIRCUITRY AFTER REPLACE Q203 IF THE COLLECTOR IS SUPLLY BY RX275 FROM Q203 CHECK L412 R432 AND AFTER REPLACE Q418 RX4 CHECK FL452 FOR PHICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL452 RX5 TAKES Q420 DC MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE LIKE AS FOLLOWING 1V B Q 420 C 2 7V 0 37 E IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLY BY RX275 CHECK L414 AND AFTER REPLACE Q203 IF THE COLLECTOR SUPLLY IS CORRECT REPLACE Q420 RX6 CHECK FL420 IF IS NOT PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL420 RX7 TAKES ON Q421 DC MEASUREMENT
25. NO IS AUDIO LOOP BACK CORRECT PROCEED TO NO OR LOW AUDIO MICROPHONE ON PAGE 2 TERMINATE THE CALL IS THE LOW BATTERY INDICATION PROCEED TO INCORRECT LOW BATTERY INDICATION ON PAGE 18 CORRECT NO DOES THE CHARGER PROCEED TO NO FUNCTION CHARGER ON PAGE 20 CORRECTLY NO FAULT FOUND PCB DRAWS CURRENT WHEN IS OFF CHECK TRANSISTOR REGULATOR Q202 Q203 AND 0201 ARE NOT PHISCALLY DAMAGE CHECK ALSO U900 TO MONITORING WHICH COMPONENT BECOMING WARMER AFTER REPLACE IT VREF FROM U900 Paes U201 0202 U900 2 75V 0203 275V PHONE FAILED SEE SUPPLIER ENTER 7100 71014 AND REPORT THE CODES 04 XX 07 XX 05 XX Y v CHECK Q203 FOR RX TRY TO REFLEX U702 SERE Ed 275 IF VIA EMMIBOX OR RADIO AGAIN IF STILL CORRECT REPLACE MASTER CARD IF NOT CORRECT Q203 IF IS CORRECT STILL NOT CORRECT CHECK FOR 26 MHz REPLACE U501 SEND TOHFTECH FROMPIN 6 OF U805 IF IS OK REPLACE U801 IF IS NOT OK REPLACE U805 CHARGER REPLACE U900 YES TEST CONDICTION RADIO SUPPLY FROM EXT B AND IN TEST MODE CHECK 2 75V NO THERMISTOR p CHECK FOR 0604 ON PIN12 OF DAMAGE J400 YES Y CHECK 8V ON PIN4 OF Q601 NO YES Y ENTER CHECK 0V ON 500255 AND
26. 53 Finding new networks 54 Manual search 53 New security code 50 0 One touch dial setting 34 One touch dialling 19 62 Options menu i i irte 35 Outgoing messages 45 63 P Pauses Inserting into phone numbers 19 Personal numbers 30 Personalised menu 25 Phone book Call 31 Capacity ine orones 27 Deleting erasing entries 31 Dialling phone book numbers 19 Modify name or number 31 Preventing access to 32 Storing numbers see Add Entry 31 Phone book menu 27 Phone calls Automatic 18 Dialling phone book numbers 19 Emergency calls 20 Ending rette 21 19 18 One touch dialling 19 Receiving 21 Phone setup menu 47 Phone status i cie 51 PIN code Entering Setting and changing PIN2 Postscripting 2 tene Preferred networks Prevent access to Phone
27. YES TXREPAIR6 TX3 CHECK IF B IS PRESENT ON COLLECTOR OF Q302 AND PIN 2 3 OF Q301 IF IS CORRECT TRACE THE TX SIGNAL TROUGH THE PATH FROM Q302 TO Q301 TO DECIPHER WICH IS THE FAILURE COMPONENT TX4 TAKES DC VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT AS FOLLOWING B C 81 E0 3V B 0 5V IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLIED BY B CHANGE L380 IF B IS CORRECT REPLACE 0381 WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL 1 2V B Q300 C2 7V 0 6V E IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPLLIED BY 2 7V CHECK C 301 302 325 IF 2 7V ON COLLECTOR IS OK CHECK C 304 314 381 R352 AND AFTER REPLACE Q300 TX6 PIN7 PINS PIMIF eo DM CS GND GND 108MHz GND R275 j Mr 7 6 5 4 3 2 U 300 TIC 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 CP 0 PIN11 2 PIN13 PIN14 RX OUT R475 R475 R275 GND VCO 2 1V 902 4MHz CHECK PRESENCE OF SIGAL FOLLOWING THE SCHEMATIC AS ABOVE DECIPHER WICH IS THE FAULTY LINE IF EVERITHINGS ARE CORRECT REPLACE U300 TXZ IS R475 s sr NO PRESENT AT NO CHECK C228 PIN 44 OF gt 900 PIN 0201 41 YES YES ISRX275V CHECK FOR SOLDER M PIN3OF U201 AND AFTER REPLACE U201 IT v ves CHECK FOR BAD SOLDER CR203 L203 AFTER REPLACE REPLACE U201 NO SERVICE 102dBm SET THE COMMUNICATIONAN
28. 18 Master clear 51 Master reset 51 Menu navigation 23 Menus Accessory setup menu 58 Call meters menu 55 Call related features menu 36 Extended menu 25 Messages menu 43 Network selection menu 52 Options menu 35 Personalised menus 25 Phone book menu 27 Phone setup menu 47 Quick Access menu 61 Short menu 25 Message editor 46 63 Message settings 46 Messages nnne 43 Call holding call waiting messages 41 Calling an embedded number 45 Cell broadcast messages 44 Creating and editing 44 Reading SMS messages 44 Sending SMS messages 45 Messages menu 43 Mute button 9 Mute car radio 2 2220 58 My phone number s 33 N Names Entering 28 Network search 53 Network selection menu 52 Networks Automatic search
29. Desktop Charger the approximate charge level is indicated as follows 95 100 B 90 95 B 50 90 B 10 50 0 10 24805 rapid flashing of a red indicator shows a faulty battery se will not charge un PEA hast ig A rapid flashing of a yellow indicator shows the battery is out of rapid charge range Rapid charge will automatically begin or continue when the battery is in range About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card 13 English Charging Your Battery To charge your phone connect your travel charger directly to your phone If you are travelling you must ensure that the mains voltage of the country to which you are travelling matches your travel charger ratings 1 Fitthe battery to your phone 2 Switch off your phone 3 Connect the travel charger to the base of your phone see diagram This begins charging the battery While the travel charger is connected to your phone the battery symbol will flash When the battery is about 90 charged the message Chargi ng Compl ete will be displayed a If the display is completely blank when the travel charger is connected the battery is not being charged English 14 About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card Typical charge times for achieving 90 charge level using the travel charger are Battery Type Charge Time Slim 600 mAh NiMH 1 5 hours Slim 400 mAh Li lon 4 hours Extra Capacity 1300 mAh NiMH 2 5 hours Extra
30. 9 LOW BATTERY WARNING When the battery level becomes too low for normal operation a warning signal two double beeps will sound Low Battery will appear in the display When the battery is almost discharged the phone will automatically turn off HAcc8 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE ACCESSORIES LITHIUM ION BATTERY PACKS Cellular Subscriber Group N SUPER SLIM XT Data ve ve 400 mA Hour 1200mAH Not Temp Conn Sense Figure 1 Rechargeable Battery Pack Dimensions and Connections RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACKS 1 INTRODUCTION Each battery pack is housed in a sealed polycarbonate case which provides superior impact resistance Removal of the battery pack is accomplished through a quick release latch If required refer to the Disassembly Instructions in this manual for battery pack removal and replacement information The International 8700 personal cellular telephones can operate from 7 2V dc Lithium Ion rechargeable battery packs Its dimensions and contact configuration of the rechargeable battery pack are shown in figure 1 Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom HAcc8 Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 41 42 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 2 CHARGING Lithium Ion battery packs should only be charg
31. Author Michael Hansen Technical Support Page 3 of 3 SE 1104 1019 2 s cOLN 0703 F 8008 68 ab g h25 Uu 75 VE DSi 2
32. HOO 18 dd 0078 INSO 47 68P09392A89 1 17 97 GSM 8700 6700 iagram I Block D iona Funct IC Audio Logi Figure 9 MMA zr 1 sosn anv 84 SSA eie INOS p zosn i ONISS 300Ud Er WNOIS dj B XIXH 6 1 er L 814 le CE Har zosr 08n tr 93009 Leen 4 HIDYYHO l 33909 HO 44dS ea a Um val Evi i NI XL S oor gt Hos 050 E 8 5 L ig 1050 3 3 c o m ASUz m 5060 55 53 2 5 VL 9060 8 85 j 6000 2 O L 2667 L KH ere Loen 9r 6t OF 86 66 L G te SSA pr x SHES 9 0 990 85 I vid sna ssauaav 1934 ISNIS 11 4 9 sng vrva 18 SE scan oL co T ee se HUN OL A SOWWWHILOL uosS3ooud TENNE GOZN sna OL TIO MOS Ids HSV14 eno ws _ OW Ide IDSNOL gje NET
33. REPLACE U900 YES TEST CONDICTION RADIO SUPPLY FROM EXT B AND IN TEST MODE CHECK 2 75V NO THERMISTOR p CHECK FOR 0604 ON PIN12 OF DAMAGE J400 YES Y CHECK 8V ON PIN4 OF Q601 NO YES Y ENTER CHECK 0V ON 500255 AND PIN17 OF CHECK FOR U900 0V ON PIN 4 OF Q601 NO NO Y Y NO TRY TO REFLEX RADIO VIA MASTER cor CARD AND AFTER aus REPLACE U703 BIC i YES CHECK FOR 8V ON PIN5 6 7 8 gt OF Q601 IF IS NOT CORRECT REPLACE Q601 REPLACE U900 Y NO OR LOW RING TONE START IS THE SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT PIN4 OF PHI U803 YES IS THE SIGNAL RT3 44 CORRECT AT gt RT 2 PIN 4 OF 0900 RT1 CHECK IF U801 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U801 RT2 CHECK IF U802 AND U803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER ALSO CHECK 825 817 AND R803 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 RT3 CHECK IF 0900 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AT PIN 4 5 6 7 CHECK ALSO PIN CONNECTOR 5 7 OF J2 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE 0900 NO OR LOW AUDIO VOLUME START IS SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT PIN 4 OF U803 AVI YES YES IS SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT PIN 21 OF U900 AV3 lt gt AV2 P1 AV1 CHECK IF 0801 A
34. s ss EE 9 me M pu A m3 p s Be J ren P es B AV TOK eng 7 R608 1B DCLK B j 58 3 j 2828 j M DE ik usos ve i for m 1 D E ET cese 0998 J K 96 18 gt 2 2K px QUI Took 51948401 X 6908 EET el LM e da M oe JR s p m f 10K 4 w ae k vat 1 wA IL 2 2 T en se 845 1220907 K 2 p ES 5 of valt FE DS um DOUBLER EN 8 rH aot gg m 77 mr E off BU Gg a i AV RA mE AN T tut aid P NI D dii E Sore suc 0802 4 LN ul 1500 DTC114YE PLAGE NEA 0608 SER DATA C825 AR 77 SER A D ni AUD TN Ron 77 0602 a S E E g 5 z TCASG6 DNP amp 11 R827 0804 5502 190 DTCHAYE DNP law AH ORIGINAL DRAWN BY JACK GUERTIN 6 27 94 LLL THE DRAWING ON THIS PRINT AND INFORMATION THEREWITH ARE PROPRIETARY TO MOTOROLA INC EPROM EN AND SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCUSSED JN WHOLE NE OR INPART WITHOUT MOTOROLA S CONSENT Cent im MOTOROLA INC LET 5 r PD 102 fa CELLULAR SUBSCRIBER GROUP NN BOARD FIDUCIALS COPYRIGHT MOTOROLA JNC 1993 THIS NOTICE DOES NOT IMPLY PUBLICATION
35. 84 09470K05 gt 50 RXLEN lt SHEET 1 LOGIC x OF 0 6 RI ACD 4 i 1 PIN CONN 155 COMMENTS DATE gt EE kO5 11v4l identical to the KD board exceot 27 JUN 97 1706 does nol epoeer on the Layout 48 09653F02 geoneir used For CREAT KP_R2 Ra e KPLENS o e o E ADDRESS_BUS A19 A9 519 N KP_EN4 LE AM lt 15K KP_R4 x N Ve 9 e R510 SS S 24 TO RF MEET 2 OR la W LET 2 KP_R5 ET 4 2 5 3 TEN lt al i 1 m 5 ds E PIE gt E ud Im i d EM us RANCS H7 SIM CLK B 4 5 15 H3 2 dE ale EL KH H 4 0704 D o 144 ssl tal 138 13 136 ed rod ted el ed 128 128 127 124 123 129 124 129149 134 vor vos ros rj 194 ud d rg 74 si sd as 19 73 E Fre RESET gt gt RE s E Mi gt 10 GIF SYN 52855 55 255655687 LL DNP ANZGF O20 120E m n B x RF START lt 206 DUAL CS al J hr RW RDMOE I s RW 3 3m mum is je m PN le m a g Tbe EE C Ne EM 6 xxx OM DEC lt Scis aen osr SAVEC Ia uns ore ures
36. AV1 CHECK IF 0801 AND 0803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE 1803 AV2 CHECK IFU802 AND U803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER ALSO CHECK C825 AND R810 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 AV3 CHECK IF U900 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AT PIN 19 20 21 PIN CONNECTOR 22 20 OF J2 AND R802 R810 C804 AND C825 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NO OR LOW AUDIO MICROPHONE START IS AUDIO CORRECT ON NO PIN 10 OF U900 gt MIC 01 YES IS AUDIO NO CORRECTON gt MICO2 PIN 17 OFU803 YES IS AUDIO YES DIGITAL NO MIC 04 lt CORRECT ON gt MIC 03 PIN 84 OF U801 MIC 01 CHECK 4802 C810 C813 C808 R806 R805 FOR BAD SOLDER 02 CHECK VOLTAGE ON PIN 17 18 19 20 OF 0803 IS ABOUT 2 4V IF IS NOT CORRECT REPLACE C832 AND C848 IF IS CORRECT CHECK U900 AND AFTER REPLACE IT MIC 03 CHECK IF U803 AND R838 R842 R841 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AFTER REPLACE U803 MIC 04 CHECK IF U801 AND R845 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AFTER REPLACE 0801 WILL POWERS UP amp STAY ON START IS B PRESENT NO PROCEED AT PIN 48 OF gt TO NPU1 ON U900 PAGE 6 YES TIE THE WATCHDOG HIGH BY SHORTING TOGETHER THE WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS YES
37. CALL ORIGINATE HIGH CH To verify that the radio will properly originate a phone call Test Procedure Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 461679 1 Set up the HP8922H for a phone call test M anually or with U niphase 2 Use the following setup in the cell control screen Channel 1 62 124 Test for each channel RF Gen Ampl TX power level 5 3 Connect the RF cable to a Gizmo and insert into the radio s antena port 4 Power up the radio using the battery connector with 6 V olt with Sim Card 5 Wait for the radio to camp on a Broadcast channel Dispay 001 01 6 Dial 12 3OK and view Proceeding Alerted Connected on Cell Status Trouble Shooting 1 If the radio did not camp trouble shoot as Simple Camp 2 If the radio can originates an emergancy call 112 OK but not a normal call then thereis software problem Probably the wrong value stored in the EEPROM View EEPROM data on Uniphase compare with a good radio gt If the data dose not match up try to retune board If the data still wrong then replace the EEPROM 3 Check the transmitter and receiver for unusual loss of signal 4 Run power step and RX LVL test 5 Check PA Table If itis default setting Reajust U 705 The bench did not write to the EEPROM If itis set to 255 255 the radio re run it AUDIO UPLINK To test the audio path from the transmitter The Test Bay will do the following 1 Initiate
38. EXPERT PERFORMANCE BATTERIES AND CHARGERS A new series of Expert Performance or EeP batteries were introduced with the International 8200 6200 EeP batteries are marked with the new E P logo and contain an EPROM which provides data to EeP telephones or chargers This data specifies the battery s charging characteristics such as preferred fast charge and trickle charge current This means that EeP batteries can be used and charged in the most efficient way for maximum performance As well as EeP batteries EeP products include the cigarette lighter adaptor charger and the new smaller EeP IntelliCharger Any product with the EeP symbol is capable of either providing EeP data or interpreting it No repairs can be carried out on any of the battery packs If a rechargeable battery pack becomes defective it should be replaced 4 BUILT IN E P BATTERY FAST CHARGER All International 8700 s contain a built in EeP battery fast charger which can fast charge any Motorola Nickel Cadmium Nickel Metal Hydride or Lithium battery The charger can also read the data from the E P batteries for optimum charging performance with that particular battery 68P09304A68 O The built in charger obtains its power from either the Cigarette Lighter Adaptor or the Travel Charger Both supplies monitor the battery feedback line on the accessory connector pin 10 to provide optimal supply voltage With an external charger present and the
39. SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE VERIFICATION AND REMEDY 4 Incoming call alert transducer audio distorted or volume is too low a Connections to from Keypad Display circuit board faulty Gain access to Keypad Display board as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Check connection from alert transducer and from the Keypad Display board to the Logic RF assembly If connection not at fault proceed to b b Alert transducer defective Gain access to alert speaker located on the Keypad Display board as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Unsolder the alert speaker and solder on a known good alert speaker Place call to portable telephone from landline or other mobile portable telephone and verify alert signal volume and clarity If good re assemble portable with new alert speaker If alert speaker not at fault re install original alert speaker and proceed to c c Keypad Display board is assembly defective Replace Keypad Display board refer to symptom 1d If Keypad Display board is not at fault re install original Keypad Display board and proceed tod d Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly refer to symptom Ic Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB 5 Portable telephone transmit audio is weak usually indicated by called parties complaining of difficulty in hearing voice from portable p
40. and RX Q Decrease the A mp on HP8922H to 70 dBm easure the amplitude of and RX Q Spec 50 dBm to 70 dBm RXI RXQ should be within 0 8 to 1 2 V p p T est Procedure 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 7 volt Set the radio to Test M ode Set the HP8922H to Test M ode gt Broadcast Channel Only gt gt Channel 1 gt Amp 50 dBm 4 Key in 08 Unmute the RX Path 11001 Channel 1 5 easure the amplitude of and U501 pins 14 and 15 as shown Decrease the Amp on HP8922H to 70 dBm Measure the amplitude of and as shown CO N IDR The amplitude should be within 0 8 to 1 2 V p p with HP8922H amp 70 dBm GOL VALLA RXQ RXI Osc Scop Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 267670 Using F3 in Uniphase will activate the receiver at low channel and set the RF generator level to 70 dBm Running the IQ Balance test will simulate the test bench Trouble Shooting 1 Setthe HP8922H on Test M ode with amplitude 28 dBm on Channel 1 2 Power up the radio with the Battery connector of 7 V olt 3 Key in 08 11001 or F3 in Uniphase 4 Check the RX Path as shown FL452 935 2 Mhz 29 dBm FL420 20 dBm 27 dBm 782 2 Mhz 14 dBm 04206 17dBm 39 dBm 0418 935 2 Mhz Sn 28 dBm from HP8922 21 FL453 153 Mhz 13 5 dBm 1 782 2 Mhz 19 dBm Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 277670 SIM CARD C
41. 53 Table 11 GSM 6700 Replacement Parts List 53 GE GSM 6700 Mechanical 54 5 Table 12 GSM 6700 50 Replacement Parts List 54 2 Figure 11 GSM 6700 Mechanical Explosion Illustration 56 Glossary iu Ri RR 57 Service Manual Feedback Form 63 Appendix A ATE 65 gt o 26 ok Replacement Trouble shooting Disassembly Glossary viii 68P09392A89 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group DESCRIPTION GSM 8700 6700 Description Product Description General The GSM 8700 6700 personal cellular tele phone is a microprocessor controlled full duplex synthesized FM radiotelephone using digital modulation techniques for use in compatible 900 MHz cellular radiotele phone systems When operated properly the equipment will provide the user with land linked telephone service through indi vidual cell site base stations all linked to a central control office The GSM 8700 6700 has a 3 0 Watt maximum power capability Physical Packaging The transceiver circuitry is contained in a water resistant polycarbonate plastic housing measuring including Slim battery pack 130 mm L x 59 mm W x 23 mm D 5 2 x 2 3 x 0 9 It weighs approximately 154g includes Super Slim Lilon battery pack and antenna The main internal electronic circuitry is contained on two multi layer boards The k
42. Table 11 GSM 6700 Replacement Parts List Suffix Description Part Number C202 CAPACITOR 150pF 2113740F57 C203 CAPACITOR 2113740F43 C904 C905 CAPACITOR 33 uF CAPACITOR 0 1 uF 2113740F27 2113743E20 CR201 DIODE 4809641F04 CR998 DIODE 4809653F02 FL420 FILTER 9109449C01 FL451 FL452 FILTER 9109123R01 J2 41 PIN PLUG 2809882L05 J400 CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE 0909958J04 J1101 41 PIN RECEPT 0909883L04 J1601 SIM CONTACT RDR 0109505C10 J802 MIC SMD RECEPT 0909888M01 Q102 TRANSISTOR 4813823A07 Q104 TRANSISTOR 4809579E09 Q300 TRANSISTOR 4803827A02 Q301 Q302 TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR 4809703N01 4813827M40 Q381 TRANSISTOR 4883477R07 Q418 TRANSISTOR 4809527E20 Q420 TRANSISTOR 4809940E01 421 TRANSISTOR 4809940E01 Q442 Q443 TRANSISTOR 4809939C08 Q905 Q906 TRANSISTOR 4809607E02 Q998 TRANSISTOR 4809579E04 Q1800 TRANSISTOR 4813824A10 Q1801 TRANSISTOR 4883533T03 R734 R738 RESISTOR 0660076N77 R739 R746 S1602 SIM PRESENCE DETECT 4009608M03 U101 DOUBLER IC 5109920D12 U201 IC GIF SYN 5109632D64 U300 TIC IC 5109632D34 m U310 PAC IC 5109632D08 A 0400 RF SWITCH 5109572E03 5 U501 IC 5109632D42 15 0702 FLASH BLANK IC 5199245A01 U703 BIC IC 5109743E12 U704 SRAM IC 5109509A06 U801 DSP 1616 IC 5199233C05 54 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Table 11 GSM 6700 Replacement Parts List Replacement Parts
43. 5 Figure 2 Hypothetical Cell System 6 Troubleshooting And Repair 27 Figure 3 TDMA Transmission 7 Testing After Repair 27 Table 6 Receiver Troubleshooting and Repair Chart 28 Identity and Security 9 Table 7 Transmitter Troubleshooting and Repair Chart ERES 29 Transceiver Labelling 9 Table 8 Logic Processing Troubleshooting Figure 4 MSN Configuration 9 and Repair Chart 30 Figure 5 IMEI Configuration 9 Troubleshooting Supplements 36 Figure 8 RF Block Diagram 47 IMCARDS ua sce eee beds had x 10 Figure 9 Audio Logic Figure 6 Inserting SIM Card 10 Functional Block Diagram 48 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 vii 1 mi E fe 5 uoneJodo Jo 1 JOJSUEIL Bunsay uin a s pue Ayjeuosidd A quiessesiq 55 ge 25 syed GSM 8700 6700 Replacement Parts 49 2 GSM 8700 Electrical 49 9 Table 9 Replacement Parts List 49 a GSM 8700 Mechanical 50 Table 10 GSM 8700 ee Replacement Parts List 50 S Figure 10 GSM 8700 Mechanical Explosion G Illustration 52 GSM 6700 Electrical
44. Trouble Shooting R efer to the previous trouble shooting BER CHECK HIGH MID LOW CH BitError Rate Hi Channel BCH 1 TX CH 124 Mid Channel BCH 1 TX CH 62 Low Channel 124 1 To test the percentage of the Bit Error in the receiver on High Channel at 5 6 Volt Test Procedure Setup HP8922 Cell Status 1 ampl 102 dBm TX 124 level 5 BER for 50 Bits 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 Volt 2 Wait until it camp 3 Make a phone call by key in 123 4 After connected check the BER on HP8922 should be less than 2 96 Check the BER reading after 50 000 bits is transfered 5 Decrease the power supply voltage to 5 6 V olt Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 557670 6 re run the Bit Error Rate again 7 The BER on HP8922 should be the same as less than 2 Spec 296 Trouble Shooting This test is the same for checking the RX Level Quality if the radio failed this item increase the amplitude of the boardcast channel from 102 dB m to 100 or higher if the BER goes back to less than 2 within 2 dBm increase check your cable for loss Trouble as RX Level Quality CRC CHECK HIGH MID LOW CH C ycle Redundancy C heck Hi Channel BCH 1 TX CH 124 MID Channel BCH 1 TX CH 62 Low Channel 124 TX CH 1 To test the ratio of the Cycle Redundancy Check in the receiver on High Channel at 5 6 Volt Test Procedure Set
45. jo 1 GSM 8700 6700 55 gt E O 68P09392A89 MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group IDENTITY AND SECURITY GSM 8700 6700 Identity and Security Transceiver Labelling Introduction Each Motorola GSM transceiver will be labelled with various number configura tions The following information shows and explains the common labelling titles Title Explanations MSN The Mechanical Serial Number MSN is an individual number uniquely identifying the unit The MSN will remain the same throughout the units life even if the main board is replaced Because the MSN is unique to the unit it is often used for logging and tracking purposes by Motorola National Service Centres on EPPRS The MSN is divided into the sections shown below Figure 4 MSN Configuration MSN 10 digits 3 digits ldigit 2 digits 4 digits MC OC DC SNR Model Origin Date Serial Code Code Code Number CEPT GSM This is the International Mobile Station Equipment Identity IMEI number The IMEI is held in the logic circuitry 1996 Motorola Inc If the main board is replaced then the units IMEI will change therefore the units label ling should be updated with the new IMEI An IMEI uniquely identifies a mobile station equipment to the system and is divided into the sections shown below Figure 5 IMEI Configuration
46. signal 794 4 MHz DRAWINGS Rev 1 0 2 EXT B 7 PWR SW wp VCO TX VCO tuning voltage 5 13 MHz clock e 3 DSC EN B 8 AUDIO IN 84094 14R1 3C VI 6700 8700 SIGNAL WAYS EN B gt TUNING VOLTAGES TX VCO feedback 902 4 MHz 13 MHz clock GSM 8700 TRANSCEIVER 4 DOWNLINK 9 MAN_TEST SCALE 4 1 DATE 15 OCT 96 Author Michael Hansen Technical Support Page 2 of 3 S UPLINK 10 FDBK REF CLOCK TX PA feedback 902 4 MHz 9 26 MHz clock MOTOROLA LIBERTYVILLE GSM 8700 ANALYZER TEST PROCEDURE amp TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE Oct 1 1997 Written By Tony Cheung 23679 The Equipment used this product 1 HP 8922H 2 Computer with Uniphase for GSM 8700 Setup For GSM 8700 Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 37670 Computer on GSM 8700 ToRun TheRadio Report and Defect E ntry Start the computer and go to the Program M anager 1 Click on the PC NFC group icon 2 Click the TELNETW program icon 3 Connect Connect 4 Goto NETWORK 5 Nodename eurosrm1 6 Login analyzer 7 The screen will show Subscriber Factory Control System ke ak de ae 1 gt Quality Report 5 For Radio travel report 6 for last time fail report 2 gt Defect Report For defect entry 3 gt Data Entry 4 gt Utility 5 gt Customer Application Q gt Quit Enter Opti
47. works the original is faulty and should be examined for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components J2 U701 0801 0803 0804 and U900 Table 7 Transmitter Troubleshooting and Repair Chart TX Symptom Probable Cause Verification and Remedy 1 Transmit audio is weak usually indi cated by called parties complaining of difficulty in hearing voice from portable phone a Microphone connections to Keypad Display board defective Gain access to Check connections including checking for the Microphone as described in Disassembly on page 21 polarity and if OK proceed to b b Microphone defective Gain access to microphone located on Disconnect and substitute a known good Place a call and verify improvement in If Microphone is not at fault re install orig keypad membrane Microphone portable transmit signal as heard by called party If good re assemble portable with new Microphone inal Microphone and proceed to c Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly If Logic RF Board Assembly is at fault examine it for improper solder and connec tions Likely fail components Q300 Q301 Q302 Q381 U701 U801 U803 and U900 1 17 97 68P09392A89 29 2 55 ge 25 s a GSM 8700 6700 Table 8 Logic Processing Troubleshooting and Repair Cha
48. 3 1 RX gt gt gt caused by shortage between L304 and the shielding first shield on the RF side close to the antenna A1 done by replacing the shield by service or mounting by production The radio turns off after seconds gt gt gt Y 201 15 defective If you replace the crystal to another type e g J04 L to J07O you have to change also the gt gt gt Y201 4809813J04 C203 2113740F41 capacitor C203 gt gt gt Y201 4809813707 C203 2113740F49 The radio doesn t turn on gt gt gt GCAP defective caused by not done fix gt gt gt VR 604 15 defective Often together with the GCAP The radio turns off after seconds or gt gt gt in the first revision C831 C901 C906 minutes and C916 orange cap are sometimes placed in the wrong direction No automatically audio switching in gt gt gt In print revision r03 up to and include DHFA to HF mode 105 is a wire fix in the DSC EN B line with sometimes bad soldering T900 mechanical defective 3 2 Display PCB 6700 Failures are unknown 3 3 Display PCB 8700 Failures are unknown High Tech Centre Flensburg European Cellular Subscriber Division Author Michael Hansen Technical Support MicroTac Accessories Matrix Europe Middle East amp Africa ustomer Services Level 1 amp 2 Authorised MicroTAC Part Numbers to order 5200 7500 6200 8200 8400 870
49. 55 9g 25 og 55 50 FS GSM 8700 6700 Table 6 Receiver Troubleshooting and Repair Chart RX Symptom Probable Cause Verification and Remedy Portable tele phone exhibits poor reception and or erratic operation such as calls frequently dropping weak and or distorted audio etc Antenna assembly is defective Check to make sure that the antenna pins are properly connected to the Logic RF assembly If OK substitute known good antenna assembly If the fault is still present proceed to b Defective or mis phased RF Audio Logic Board Check for appropriate frequencies and power level gains losses in the RX path Reference RF Block Diagram Replace malfunctioning components if listed on parts list Likely fail components are FL420 FL451 FL452 Q418 Q420 Q421 and U400 If parts replacement doesn t correct the fault replace transceiver Defective keypad board i e SEND key won t work Substitute keypad and logic board with a known good keypad and logic board If known good board works place the keypad from the defective unit onto it and attempt to function If unit functions properly replace the mylar barrier on the defective unit and then attempt to function defective unit with orig inal keypad If fault persists replace the logic board 2 Receive audio is weak and or distorted
50. BSIC Base Transceiver Station Identity Code ETSI European Telecommunications Standards BSS Base Station System Institute BSSAP BSS Application Part DTAP and FACCH Fast Associated Control CHannel BSSMAP FACCH F Full rate Fast Associated Control CHannel BSSC Base Station System Control FACCH H Half rate Fast Associated Control CHannel Cabinet FB Frequency correction Burst BSSMAP Base Station Systems Management FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel Application Part FEC Forward Error Correction BSSOMAP BSS Operation and Maintenance FN Frame Number Application Part FTAM File Transfer Access Management BSU Base Site Controller Unit GMSC Gateway Mobile Services Switching BTS Base Transceiver Station Centre CA Call Allocation GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying CBCH Call Broadcast CHannel GSM Groupe Special Mobile cc Call Control GSM MS GSM Mobile Station Country Code GSM PLMN GSM Public Land Mobile Network CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers HANDO Handover CCH Control CHannel HDLC High Level Data Link Control CCCH Common Control CHannel HLR Home Location Register CFS Call Forwarding on mobile Subscriber busy HOLD Call Hold Supplementary Service CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional HPLMN Home PLMN CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation HPU Hand Portable Unit CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction HSN Hopping Sequence Number CM Connection Management I Information frames COLP Connected Line identification Pres
51. Block Length 260 bits Classes Class 1 bits 182 bits Class 2 bits 78 bits Bit Rate with FEC Encoding 22 8 kbps bi CAUTION Do not jump start vehicle or use an automotive battery charger while the vehicle adapter may cause serious damage to the radio Disconnect the radio by removing the cable kit fuses Motorola Ltd 1996 68P09304A68 Oacent All Rights Reserved Printed in U K 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE 68P09304A68 O CHANGE RECORD Cellular Subscriber Group CHANGE RECORD CHANGE DATE SIGNATURE DATEOF NOTES COMPLETION Section Affected O Original 1 6 96 1 6 96 When are issued against this manual they are to be inserted in numerical order then this record sheet should be annotated to confirm the action If there are any subsequent problems resulting then the Documentation Feedback form should be completed and returned to address given See section in this manual Motorola reserves the right to make changes in technical and product specifications without prior notice Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom AGenl Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K iii 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TEL
52. Bmw coe 0109039A48 LC9452 0109031497 LC9679 74 06 14 current SWF3232B SLF7360C E57 29 14 479 JAGUAR coe 0109039A48 LC9452 0109031497 169679 74 06 14 current GSM6700 RADIO BOARD S ORDER HW SW PRE FIN DESCRITION Topside prog T S stencil Bottomside prog B S Stencil SWF3049A SLF6920E K06 ITALY 0109033A45 LC9452 0109033A44 LC9679 78 63 36 SWF2376D SLF6920E K06 NON ITALY 06 0109033A45 LC9452 0109033 44 LC9679 78 63 36 iSM6700 E FLIP RADIO BOARD S ORDER HW SW PRE FIN DESCRITION Topside prog T S stencil Bottomside prog B S Stencil SWF3051A SLF6920E K06 ITALY 0109033A45 LC9452 0109033A44 LC9679 78 63 36 SWF2526B SLF6920E K06 NON ITALY 06 0109033A45 LC9452 0109033A44 LC9679 78 63 36 GSM6200i RADIO BOARD S ORDER HW SW PRE FIN DESCRITION Topside prog T S stencil Bottomside prog B S Stencil SWF3050A SLF6920E 06 ITALY 0109033A45 LC9452 0109033A44 LC9679 78 63 36 SWF2539C SLF6920E K06 NON ITALY 06 0109033A45 LC9452 0109033A44 LC9679 78 63 36 Motorola GSM8700 G cap models G cap models 05 10 98 Modem G Cap lite models K06 MODEM LITE PROGRAMS SHOP ORDERS GSM8700 RADIO BOARD SHOP ORDER HW SWF3052B SLF6830D 460 K06 ITALY 0109037A11 0109037A10 74 05 36 SWF2266C SLF6830D 393 K06 ITALY C06 0109037A11 0109037A10 74 05 36 SWF3052C SLF6830E E52 30 12 K06 ITALY 0109038A5
53. Byte 2 then store these Bytes into EEPROM Slope 50 12 11 Byte 1 256 Slope Byte2 2 x 100 Slope x 12 Spec 1 0 255 Byte2 5 255 Test Procedure Record 11 and 12 from the previous test Example 11 150 mA 12 380 mA Slope 50 380 150 0 217 Byte 1 256 0 217 55 Byte2 2 100 0 217 x 380 35 Trouble Shooting If the radio passed the Batt Low High Current M ode it should not be ailed for this test because the equations using the result of the previous test If it do fail that means the radio can not store the B ytes in to the EEPROM Check for US SS U 705 and U 701 DAC L H VOLT The test bay will do the following Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 387679 1 Set the external connector input to 9 V by power supply 1 2 Connect the battery input with 7 5 V by power supply 3 3 Toggle the radio ON 4 Read the Battery voltage 5 Wait for 1 second for battery DAC to stabilized 6 Request battery DAC value for 8 times 7 Set battery input supply to 6 3 Volt 8 Wait for 1 second for the battery DAC to stabilized 9 Request battery DAC value for 8 times Spec B High Voltage 6800 7600 Low Voltage 5600 6400 Test Procedure There is no similar test by the hand set conmand Trouble Shooting 1 9V on External connector 2 7 5 V on battery input 3 Toggle the radio Off then ON 4 M e
54. Connections to from Keypad Display circuit board defective Gain access to Keypad Display board as described in Disassembly on page 21 Check connection from earpiece to Keypad Display circuit board Make sure to check polarity and solderability If connection is not at fault proceed to b If Keypad Display board is faulty examine it for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components J1101 Earpiece speaker defec tive Gain access to earpiece speaker as described in Disassembly on page 21 Substitute a known good earpiece speaker Place a call and verify improvement in earpiece audio If good re assemble portable with new earpiece speaker If earpiece speaker not at fault re install original earpiece speaker and proceed to c 28 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting Table 6 Receiver Troubleshooting and Repair Chart RX Symptom Probable Cause Verification and Remedy 2 Receive audio is weak and or distorted c Antenna assembly is defective Check to make sure antenna pin is properly If antenna assembly is not at fault re install connected to the Logic RF Board Assembly If OK substitute a known good antenna assembly original antenna assembly and proceed to d 9 Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly If substitute Logic RF Board Assembly
55. DOES 3 25V NO VSWITCH PROCEED CORRECTAT gt TO NPU2 ON PIN 25 OF PAGE 6 U900 YES DOES LX NO 300KHz PROCEED PRESENT AT gt TO NPU3 ON PIN 37 OF PAGE 6 U900 YES DOES L275 NO CORRECT AT PROCEED gt TO NPU5 ON PIN 22 OF 12 0900 YES NO DOES L500 PROCEED CORRECT AT gt TO NPU4 ON PIN 3 OF U900 PAGE 6 WILL POWERS UP amp STAY ON DOES R275 NO PROCEED CORRECT AT TO NPU6 PIN 28 OF PAGE U900 YES NO DOES R475 PROCEED CORRECT AT gt TO NPU7 PIN 41 OF PASE U900 YES PRESENT AT gt TO NPU8 ON PIN 37 OF PAGE 6 U703 YES IS 13MHz NO ROGERS PRESENT AT gt TO NPU9 ON PIN 51 OF EE U701 YES DOES THE N RESET LINE PROCEED GO HIGH ON TO NPU10 PIN 30 OF ON PAGE 7 U900 YES REMOVE SHORT ON WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS DOES THE WATCHDOG PROCEED LINE GO HIGH gt TO NPU11 ON PIN 31 OF ON PAGE 7 U900 YES WILL POWERS UP amp STAY ON TIE THE WATCHDOG HIGH BY SHORTING TOGETHER THE WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS YES IS THE CE NO PRESENT ON PIN 26 OF 0702 YES IS THE CE NO PRESENT ON PIN 39 AND 40 OF U704 YES IS THE NO PRESENT ON PIN 27 OF U705 YES v TRY TO RESOLDER FLASH PROM U702 AND AFTER REPLACE IT PROCEED TO NPU12 ON P
56. English Customising the Quick Access Menu You can change the features in the Quick Access menu to suit your personal preferences To customise the menu 1 PressE scroll to the menu item you wish to change 2 Pressand hold O to access the list of features available The currently selected feature will be displayed 3 Scroll through the list until you find the feature you wish to store in the Quick Access menu press O 4 Compl eted will be displayed to confirm that the feature has been stored The items in the Quick Access list will appear in the following order Outgoing M essages Message Editor Last Calls Received Last Call Charge Last Call Timer Talk and Fax Show M y ID Next Call Restrict M y ID Find by Name Find by Location Add Entry to Phone Add Entry to SIM Call Voicemail Battery Meter Phone Lock Now Ring Volume VibraCall On or Off Divert All On or Off Switch M emory Read M essages English 64 Using the Quick Access Menu The following accessories have been designed to work with your cellular phone Additional accessories may be available and are packaged separately Please refer to your local service provider or retail outlet for more information Desktop Charger SPN4216 The Desktop E P Charger allows you to charge a phone with a battery attached and a spare battery at the same time The charging status for each battery is indicated by LEDs at the front of the charger a The De
57. FAA regulations require you to have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the plane is on the ground To prevent interference with cellular systems local RF regulations prohibit using your phone whilst airborne Children Do not allow children to play with your phone It is not a toy Children could hurt themselves or others by poking themselves or others in the eye with the antenna for example Children could damage the phone or make calls that increase your telephone bills Safety Blasting Areas To avoid interfering with blasting operations turn your unit OFF when in a blasting area or in areas posted turn off two way radio Construction crews often use remote control RF devices to set off explosives Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn your phone OFF when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere It is rare but your phone or its accessories could generate sparks Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked They include fuelling areas such as petrol stations below decks on boats fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain dust or metal powders Do not transport or store flammable gas liquid or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle which contains your phone or acc
58. If you do not receive the Advice of Charge service then depending on the model either all calls or only outgoing calls are timed Show Last Call Displays the duration of your last call Total For All Calls Displays the duration of all your calls since the time meter was reset to zero using the Reset All Timers option Reset All Timers Sets the resettable time meters to zero The Lifetime M eter is not resettable English 56 Using the Options Menu Your phone provides two programmable audible call timers The Single Alert Timer will sound just once during call after a preset time has elapsed The Repetitive Timer will sound regular beeps during a call at preset intervals In both cases the timers will sound their beeps ten seconds before the end of the programmed time Set In Call Display This feature allows you to specify whether the time or charge meters are displayed during a call If you do not have the Advice of Charge service then only the time meter is available A If a total charge limit has been set then the in call display always shows your remaining credit Show Time Per Call This option is used to display the time meter during calls If you receive the Advice of Charge service only the chargeable calls will be displayed Show Charge Per Call Show Total Call Charges a These menu items are only available if you receive the Advice of Charge service These options are used to
59. MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL451 RX3 TAKES ON Q418 DC MEASUREMENT LIKE AS FOLLOWING 13VB 7 Q418 C2 7V 0 5 _ IF THECOLLECTOR IS NOT SUPLLY BY RX275 CHECK Q203 AND ASSOCIATE CIRCUITRY AFTER REPLACE Q203 IF THE COLLECTOR IS SUPLLY BY RX275 FROM Q203 CHECK L412 R432 AND AFTER REPLACE Q418 RX4 CHECK FL452 FOR PHICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL452 RX5 TAKES ON Q420 DC MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE LIKE AS FOLLOWING Q 420 C2 7V 0 37E IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLY BY RX275 CHECK L414 AND AFTER REPLACE Q203 1V B IF THE COLLECTOR SUPLLY IS CORRECT REPLACE Q420 RX6 CHECK FL420 IF IS NOT PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL420 RX7 TAKES ON Q421 DC MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE LIKE AS FOLLOWING Q 421 C 1 9V 0 6VE __ 0V B IF THE COLLECTOR SUPPLY IS CORRECT REPLACE Q421 IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLY BY PIN 33 OF U201 CHECK R423 AND AFTER REPLACE U201 START IS RX LOCAL PRESENT ON RX LOCAL OSC 1 PIN 39 OF U201 YES RX LOCAL OSC 2 RX9 IF THERE IS NOT ACTIVITY ON SPI BUS TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U501 RX LOCAL OSC 1 CHECK FOR CR431 L433 AND U201 PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U201 RX LOCAL OSC 2 CHECK IQ_ REF FROM PIN 16 OF U501 TO PIN47 OF U201 1 38V IS CORRECT CO
60. Ref No Motorola Part No Description 14 3209523A05 Gasket Conductive 15 3809456C01 Button Mute 16 3809460C01 Button Volume 17 4183879P27 Spring 18 4709267J01 Cam Right Tilling 19 4709267J02 Cam Left Tilling 20 5409849N04 Decal Magnet 21 5983583N17 Magnet 22 3209319S01 Grommet MIC Conductive 23 3809917N07 Actuator Keypad GSM 8700 24 5009536H11 MIC Leaded w Chip Cap 25 5009776E14 Alert Ringer Assembly Mag 2 Tone 26 N A Gasket Alert 27 N A Cushion Alert 28 6109441C02 Lens 29 SHN6151A Housing amp Hardware PNTD Rear 30 0109850N05 Assy Housing Painted Rear 31 1509687N01 Rear Housing 32 1509618K03 Housing Tube 33 3209523A05 Gasket Conductive 34 4209852N02 Ground Clips 35 SLF6400A 8700 Transceiver Board 36 0109025A43 8700XCVR Top Side 37 0909958J04 Recp 10 Pins W Batt 38 SYN5044A 8700 Backend Material 39 3509133B05 Mylar Cover 40 SYN5045 8700Keypad Board 41 5009076E02 Speaker Dynamic Earpiece 20 42 7209005C05 LCD Display Module 96x32 Pixel 43 7509326501 Cushion PCB Dynamic Speaker 44 5409276E01 8700 Molded Escutcheon 1 17 97 68 09392 89 51 79 GSM 8700 6700 Figure 10 GSM 8700 Mechanical Explosion Illustration zE 85 5 a 52 68P09392A89 1 17 97 GSM 8700 6700 GSM 6700 Electrical
61. Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 1 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE TYPICAL MODEL COMPLEMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL 8700 2 0 WATT 5634 Description Quantity Supplied SUF3839A Transceiver 1 SNN4612 Slim NiMH Battery 1 SNN4458 XT Li lon Battery SPN4222A or Euro or 1 SPN4221A UK Transformer SJN6549A User Manual 1 SJN6555A 68P09304A 68 1 6 96 FOREWORD 1 SCOPE OF MANUAL This manual is intended for use by experienced technicians familiar with similar types of equipment It contains all service information required for the equipment described and is current as of the printing date Major changes which occur after the printing date are incorporated by Cellular Manual Revisions CMR These CMR s are added to the manuals as the engineering change is incorporated into the equipment 2 MODEL AND KIT IDENTIFICATION Motorola equipments are specifically identified by an overall model number on the nameplate In most cases assemblies and kits which make up the equipment also have kit model numbers stamped on them When a production or engineering change is incorporated the applicable schematic diagrams are updated MOTOROLA SERVICE POLICY 8700 In mostcountries Motorola will operate an Express Exchange Program for the 8700 personal cellular telephone Authorized Express Exchange Centres will exchange a customer s defective unit for a
62. Theory of Operation Signal information provides an indication of the subscriber s distance from the base station As the radiotelephone moves from cell to cell its control is handed from one base station to another in the new cell This change is handled by the radiotele phone and base stations and is completely transparent to the user Service Area The area within which calls can be placed and received is defined by the system opera tors Because this is a radio system there is no exact boundary that can be drawn on a map If the telephone is outside a coverage area the no service indicator will illumi nate and calls will be unable to be placed or received If this happens during a conversa tion the call will be lost There may also be small areas within a particular service area where communications may be lost The radiotelephone s identity information is held by its local GSM system in its Home Location Register HLR and Visitor Loca tion Register VLR The VLR contains iden tity information on all local active radiotelephones Should you roam to another area system or country the radio telephones identity information is sent to the VLR in the new system The new system will then check the radiotelephones details with your home system for authenticity If everything is in order it will be possible to initiate and receive calls whilst in the new area 1 17 97 68P09392A89 7 O 75 2 5
63. U703 8 5 IS 13MHz NO ROCHE PRESENT AT PIN 51 Bd 0701 DOES THE RESET LINE PROCEED GO HIGH ON gt TONPU10 PIN 30 OF ON PAGE 7 U900 YES REMOVE SHORT ON WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS DOES THE 5 WATCHDOG PROCEED LINE GO HIGH gt TONPU11 ON PIN 31 OF ON PAGE 7 U900 YES 2 TIETHEWATCHDOGHIGHBY SHORTING TOGETHER THE WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS YES NO IS THE CE PRESENT ON PIN26 OF P ding e U702 7 YES NO IS THE CE RA PRESENT ON gt TONPU13 PIN 39 AND 40 0704 YES NO ISTHE CE see PRESENT ON TOE gt TO NPU14 7 YES Y TRY TO RESOLDER FLASH PROM U702 AND AFTER REPLACE IT START IS PRESENT AT PIN 48 OF U900 YES NO TIE THE WATCHDOG HIGH BY SHORTING TOGETHER THE WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS DOES 3 25V VSWITCH CORRECTAT PIN 25 OF U900 LE DOES LX 300KHz PRESENT AT PIN 37 OF U900 YES DOES L275 CORRECT PIN 22 OF U900 DOES L500 CORRECT PIN 3 OF U900 NO NO NO NO gt PROCEED TONPU1 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TO NPU2 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TONPU3 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TONPU5 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TONPU4 ON PAGE 6 POWER
64. allowed to come within 20 centimeters of the antenna during operation of the equipment DO NOT jump start vehicle or use an auto motive battery charger while the vehicle adapter option and the portable radiotele phone are connected to the vehicle electrical system as this may cause serious damage to the radio Disconnect the radio by removing the cable kit fuses DO NOT operate this equipment near elec trical blasting caps or in an explosive atmo sphere Mobile telephones are under certain conditions capable of interfering with blasting operations When in the vicinity of construction work look for and observe signs cautioning against mobile radio trans mission If transmission is prohibited the cellular telephone must be turned off to prevent any transmission 7 standby mode the mobile telephone will automatically transmit to acknowledge a call 1f tt ts not turned off All equipment must be properly grounded according to installation instructions for safe operation Portable Mobile Telephone Use and Driving Safety is every driver s business The portable telephone should only be used in situations in which the driver considers it safe to do so Use of a cellular portable while driving may be ega in some areas Refer to the appropriate section of the product service manual for additional perti nent safety information vi 68P09392A89 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA CONTENTS Cellular Subscriber
65. gt x x x x x x x x x x gt x 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group THEORY OF OPERATION GSM 8700 6700 Theory of Operation GSM System Overview NOTE The following description is intended only as a preliminary general introduction to the Global System for Mobile communi cations GSM cellular network This description is greatly simplified and does not illustrate the full operating capabili ties techniques or technology incorpo rated in the system General Cellular Concept The cellular systems are used to provide radiotelephone service in the frequency range 890 960 MHz A cellular system provides higher call handling capacity and system availability than would be possible with conventional radiotelephone systems those which require total system area coverage on every operating channel by dividing the system coverage area into several adjoining sub areas or cells Each cell contains a base station cell site which provides transmitting and receiving facilities for an allocated set of duplex frequency pairs channels Since each cell is a relatively small area both the cell site and the radiotelephone that it supports can operate at lower power levels than would be used in conventional systems 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 Using this technique radiation on a given channel is virtually contained in the cell operating on that channel and to
66. the front one allowing battery charging with the battery still attached to the phone HAcc8 Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom The E P function means that the Intellicharger will optimally charge E P compatible batteries in the shortest time possible Any other non E P Motorola personal battery can still be charged in the Intellicharger The charger has indicator LED s to show the approximate charge capacity whilst a battery is being charged 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 47 48 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE The Travel Charger as well as powering the phone s internal charger is used to power the Intellicharger direct from the mains supply 2 MODEL COMPLEMENT Due to the variation in countries mains power supply voltage two transformers are available Dual Pocket Charger Base SPN4266A Travel Charger Transformer Euro SPN4222A Travel Charger Transformer UK SPN4221A 3 OPERATION The charger has two sets of indicators at the front to provide charging status information The lower indicators give the front slot status and the upper indicators show charge status for the rear slot If two batteries are placed in the charger at the same time the one in the front slot is always charged first Under this condition the red LED on the upper indicators flashes slowly to sho
67. 1 17 97 Foreword Scope of Manual This manual is intended for use by experi enced technicians familiar with similar types of equipment It is intended primarily to support electrical and mechanical repairs Repairs not covered in the scope of this manual should be forwarded to Motorola s regional Cellular Subscriber Support Centers Authorized distributors may opt to receive additional training to become authorized to perform limited component repairs Contact your regional Customer Support Manager for details Model and Kit Identification Motorola products are specifically identified by an overall model number on the FCC label In most cases assemblies and kits which make up the equipment also have kit model numbers stamped on them Replacement Parts Ordering Service Motorola s regional Cellular Subscriber Support Centers offer some of the finest repair capabilities available to Motorola Subscriber equipment users The Cellular Subscriber Support Centers are able to perform computerized adjustments and repair most defective transceivers and boards Contact your regional Customer Support Manager for more information about Motorola s repair capabilities and policy for in warranty and out of warranty repairs in your region Attn Global Spare Parts Department Motorola Cellular Subscriber Group 2001 N Division St Harvard IL 60033 3674 U S A FAX 1 815 884 8354 desired c
68. 140 E B L302 a 3 dBm S MEIN L302 IN 7 3 9 dam Q302 Q381 Q300 10 dBm 3dBm 6 5 dBm 2 dBm 2 If the current is off specification Check the voltage as below B B 2 75 V Q301 L302 Py x V x V CY Y 7 3 Q302 Q381 Q300 1 3 V _ TX current is almost always caused by a power control problem usually because the gain of the PA is turned up to high causing excessive current drain Look at the power control biasing on the gates of the PA 0301 If the control voltage is to high then the radio may transmit at the proper level but could be drawing too much current Compare this control voltage to a good board if itistoo high then there is a slightloss in TX path somewhere or a problem with the power detect control circuitry around U 310 See PA Control Operation in Power Step o Procedure Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 237679 TX FREQUENCY LOW CH Fc F1 F2 In this test T he test bay will Set AFC DAC to 2340 Fc Set channel to 1 Set power level to 0 The PA Table for power level 0 is pproximately 30 dBm Perform Pseudo test with midamble 0 Read the frequency as Fc Stop the TX transmition Set AFC DAC to 0 F1 Do the same test as above Read the frequency as F1 Set the AFC DAC to 4092 F2 Do the same test as above Read the frequency as F2 The Fequency for Fc should be 890 2 100 K hz F1 Offset frequency 22 6Khz to 100 Khz F2
69. 22 Auxiliary Alert Using the Options Menu 35 English Call Related c Features Call Related Features Menu Call Related Features L Show Battery Meter Restrict My Phone Number f Show D Next Call Restrict ID On Next Call Call Diverting piga L Talk and Fax on i Call Waiting a L Off Call Barrin 9 gt Bar Outgoing Calls Int l Calls Int l Calls Except Home All Calls off Bar Incoming Calls When Roaming All Calls Off m Change Bar Password Menu Navigation am lt Items shown in are available only when Extended Menus are switched on English 36 Using the Options Menu Show Battery Meter This option displays the approximate amount of battery capacity remaining for example Call Related we c Features Restrict My Phone Number Restrict M y Phone Number is a network feature You will need to subscribe to one of thetwo Caller Line Identification restriction features with your Cellular Service Provider Show ID On Next Call Your phone number is sent with the next attempted call after this your phone number will not be sent until you re select this option Restrict ID On Next Call Your phone number will not be sent with the next attempted call after this your phone number will be sent with calls until you re select this option 0 Call Diverting Call Diverting 777 Dive
70. 40744070 400 2 csi s 0509 6 CR701 5 B sk zp xd 679 1 93h amp sk CS4 n E 152 01 211 th 907 E non nn num 0442 81 080 5 fe 0443 UU 44 839 99 P2 U300 BuU M U702 o g ae E 0704 T E al 174 R208 EN JU fra 2 6508 E x ma B 5 3 D o En DD ds peed 1901 gt 813 TITT 95 703 ka FIDI 4 3 T E f a gli ge 8409414R09 t11 v 1 GCAP FIX Ref DB034 No 5713 ECN5835 GSM 8700 TRANSCEIVER Add VR 606 4813830M25 Both 6700 amp 8700 Remove C960 and C905 3 Pages 02 97 SCALE 4 1 DATE 16 AUG 96 pin 1 to TP11 5 N pin2and3to GND Michael Hansen Technical Support HTC Flensburg High Tech Centre Flensburg March 5th 1997 European Cellular Subscriber Division DRAWINGS Rev 1 0 FIX Author Michael Hansen Technical Support Page 1 of 3 VU M V NM
71. AA MOTOROLA GSM 6700 8700 TRAINING LEVEL High Tech Centre Flensburg European Cellular Subscriber Division Author Michael Hansen Technical Support 6700 8700 TRAINING LEVEL March 10 1997 Rev 1 0 1 GENERAL 1 1 HW SW 1 21 1 3 Frequency s 2 POINTS TO NOTE 2 1 Backhousing 2 2 Fronthousing 2 3 Main PCB 3 TOP XX FAILURE 3 1 Main PCB 3 2 Display PCB 6700 3 3 Display PCB 8700 High Tech Centre Flensburg European Cellular Subscriber Division Author Michael Hansen Technical Support 6700 8700 TRAINING LEVEL III March 10 1997 Rev 1 0 1 GENERAL 1 1 HW SW Prod SW HW Version Part No 6700 3 6 1 3 78 63 23 SUF3997C 8700 3 6 1 3 74 05 22 SUF3839G 1 2 IC s Prefix Name Version Note Part No U703 BIC 4 01 incl AD DA converter 5109743E13 U801 SPC 11 80 AT amp T 5199285C01 U501 Modem 35 xx 40 5109632D42 D49 U701 Proc 68338 5113802M40 U201 GIF SYN IF GUSS in one hsng 5109632064 0702 SW with without 5199245C30 A01 boot sector U900 GCAP 0109632D73 1 3 Frequency s Location Frequency CH62 Note TX 902 4 MHz RX 947 4 MHz Ref Osc 13 0 MHz Main VCO 794 4 MHz TX Offset L Osc 216 0 MHz Internal GIF SYN 108 MHz RX L Osc 306 0 MHz Internal GIF SYN 153 MHz High Tech Centre Flensburg European Cellular Subscriber Division Author Michael Hansen Technical Support 6700 8700 TRAINI
72. Change Unlock Code option Enter Security Code enter a new unlock code and press O Making and Receiving Phone Calls 17 English Making a Phone Call To make a phone call your phone must be switched on unlocked and have the antenna fully extended It will not be possible to make a phone call unless you are in an area where there is a GSM service When a service has been found a series of rising bars x will show the signal strength There are a number of different ways to make a phone call Using the digit keys Using automatic redial Redialling the last number called One touch dialling a Phone Book entry Dialling a Phone Book entry Calling an embedded number in a message Your phone contains phone book that can be used to store names and telephone numbers See Using The Phone Book Menu for further details English 18 Making and Receiving Phone Calls The simplest method of making a phone call is to enter the number using the digit keys then press O a If you make a mistake press and release the C key to remove the last digit Holding the C key down will remove the entire number Your phone will then attempt to make the phone call The display will show Calli ng to show the call attempt is being made If the call is not answered pressing O or closing the flip at this point will end the attempt When the phone call is answered the display will change to Conne
73. Cord 66 80334B36 Wiist Band 42 80385A59 GDis7 O Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom e Plastic Bladed Tool SLN7223A e A small flat bladed screw driver e Rear Housing Removal Tool 8109972NO1 3 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 3 1 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE The following information describes the procedure for removing and accessing various parts of the International 8700 NOTE Refer to the mechanical exploded view on page 32 as necessary while performing the disassembly assembly procedures 4 ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE Once the unit is disassembled and the repair is carried out it then becomes obvious that to assemble the unit the procedure is the reverse of that previously completed for disassembly Note that no tools are required for reassembly as the front and back housings snap together 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 23 24 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE rs I Carefully prise off the antenna cap using a hard plastic tool Ns ae Remove the antenna assembly by simply pulling it out of the housing whilst moving it back and forth If it proves difficult to remove remove it after separating the front and back housings 68P09304A68 O GDis7 1 6 96 GDis7 1 6 96 DISASSEMBLY If the antenna assembly h
74. Dialled To Phone Memory Switches One Touch Dialling to your Personal Numbers list stored in phone memory locations 1 to 9 To SIM Memory Switches One Touch Dialling to your Personal Numbers list stored on your SIM card locations 101 to 109 To Fixed Dial list a Thisoption is only available if you have Fixed Dialling Switches One Touch Dialling to your Fixed Dial list locations 1 to 9 Using the Options Menu Call Related Features 72 Show Battery Meter A Restrict My Phone Number Call Diverting Talk and Fax Call Waiting t Call Barring Messages Call Voicemail Phone 5 bn going Messages setup 72 Adjust Ring Volume Message Editor Ring Or Vibrate gt Cell Broadcast Set Ringer Tone ib Message Settings Phone Lock Require SIIM Card PIN Change SIM PIN2 Code New Security Code Extended Menus Network Selecti i election Available Networks Menu Navigation L Network Search Call Preferred Networks sii 2 o j Meters 77 Show Call Charges 1 Find New Network Show Call Timers diesen Set Audible Call Timers Set In Call Display Items shown in faffcs are available only Call Charge Settings when Extended Menus are switched on s di p t Availability depends on the type of SIM card Accessory Setup Mute Car Radio The Accessory Setup cption is avallable Automatic Answer only when a kit is fitted Automatic Handsfree j Safety Timer
75. FREQ PROCEED TO FREQ ERR OR PHASE ERROR OUT OF SPEC ON PAGE 8 OR PHASE ERROR WITHIN SPEC IS THEPOWER BURST WITHIN SPEC PROCEED TO POWER BURST OUT OF SPEC ON PAGE 17 NO a Ba PROCEED TO NO OR LOW OK AUDIO VOLUME ON PAGE 1 NO IS AUDIO LOOP BACK CORRECT PROCEED TO NO OR LOW AUDIO MICROPHONE ON PAGE 2 TERMINATE THE CALL IS THE LOW BATTERY INDICATION PROCEED TO INCORRECT LOW BATTERY INDICATION ON PAGE 18 CORRECT NO DOES THE CHARGER PROCEED TO NO FUNCTION CHARGER ON PAGE 20 CORRECTLY NO FAULT FOUND PCB DRAWS CURRENT WHEN IS OFF CHECK TRANSISTOR REGULATOR Q202 Q203 AND 0201 ARE NOT PHISCALLY DAMAGE CHECK ALSO U900 TO MONITORING WHICH COMPONENT BECOMING WARMER AFTER REPLACE IT VREF FROM U900 Paes U201 0202 U900 2 75V 0203 275V PHONE FAILED SEE SUPPLIER ENTER 7100 71014 AND REPORT THE CODES 04 XX 07 XX 05 XX Y v CHECK Q203 FOR RX TRY TO REFLEX U702 SERE Ed 275 IF VIA EMMIBOX OR RADIO AGAIN IF STILL CORRECT REPLACE MASTER CARD IF NOT CORRECT Q203 IF IS CORRECT STILL NOT CORRECT CHECK FOR 26 MHz REPLACE U501 SEND TOHFTECH FROMPIN 6 OF U805 IF IS OK REPLACE U801 IF IS NOT OK REPLACE U805 CHARGER
76. GIFSYN IC is used instead of GUSS and IF ICs RF circuits operate at 3V except for charge pump and IC supplies which are at 4 75V and TX Exciter PA driver and the PA are at B The T R and antenna accessory port switching are done by GaAsFET switches versus PIN diodes Normally the RF switch is muted GSM8700 does not have RF Mute that is why the switch is used RX Mixer is muted during GIFSYN setup 2nd LO frequencies is at 306 Mhz Receiver IF frequency is 153 Mhz TX IF frequency is 108 Mhz TX and RX Enable signals No TX clean up filter and TX VCO Buffer Amplifier TX offset VCO frequency is at 216 Mhz PAC IC supply is enabled during transmit only LOGIC U201 GIF SYN IC The GIF SYN IC controls 4 different oscillators the 13Mhz main reference the RX 306Mhz used for RX IF 216Mhz used for TX IF The regulated voltages used by the oscillators are also accomplished by the GIF SYN Although the charge pump voltages are supplied by R4 75 The GIF SYN is also responsible for converting the RX IF 153Mhz to base band of 67 708Khz The base band will be output in terms of and Q which are in quadrature Vise versa is true for the transmit GIF SYN receives TX and Q from the modem and modulates them onto an IF of 108Mhz A 26dbm step attenuator is also contained internally to the GIF SYN this enable to IC to increase its operating range The AGC circuit is also internal to this IC PSP GSM GC87
77. GRND CLI 15 5009157R01 Transducer Alert 16 5009373001 Speaker 17 5009536 11 MIC Leaded w Chip Cap i 5402139T03 Flare Ultralite Label 18 6109071 01 Lens 19 7529415E02 MIC grommet zE 85 5 a 56 Not illustrated 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Replacement Parts Figure 11 GSM 6700 Mechanical Explosion Illustration Replacement Parts 57 68P09392A89 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA GLOSSARY Cellular Subscriber Group GSM 8700 6700 Glossary Those marked are Motorola specific abbreviations LH A Interface Interface between MSC and BCCH Allocation BSS BAIC Barring of All Incoming Calls A3 Authentication algorithm BAOC Barring of all Outgoing Calls x BCC Base Transceiver Station BTS A5 Stream cipher algorithm Calot Code A8 Ciphering key generating BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel algorithm BCD Binary Coded Decimal AP BCU BTS Control Unit A bis Interface between BSC and BTS Bm Full rate traffic channel ACCH Associated Control CHannel BN Bit Number ACSE Association Control Service BS Base Station Element BSC Base Station Controller AGCH Access Grant CHannel BSIC Base Transceiver Station Identity Code iode 55 Base Station System ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency BSSAP BSS Application Part Channel Number and BSSMAP Automatic Request for BSSC Base Station System Control retransmission Cab
78. Group GSM 8700 6700 Preface aoa co ek ili Testing ses yaa ars awata 13 Specifications 1 Verification 13 Table 1 General m Figure 7 Testing Configuration 14 Table 2 iii Manual Test Mode 14 Table 3 iv Table 5 GSM Test Commands 15 Table 4 Speech Coding iv Personality Transfer 17 Forewordh sansen ettet si ee eus V Iritroductioh re EYES 17 Replacement Parts Ordering V Normal Transfer 17 General Safety Information vi Master Transfer 18 aem Master SIM Card Creation 19 Description 1 Product Description 1 Disassembly 21 Figure 1 GSM 8700 Personal Cellular Telephone 3 Introduction sai LLL uma 21 Feature List 4 Recommended Tools 21 Disassembly Procedure 21 Theory of Operation 5 Assembly Procedure 21 GSM System Overview 5 Troubleshooting 27 General Cellular Concept 5 Introduction isses 27 GSM Description
79. Middle East amp Africa stomer Services Level 3 Authorised RX SIGNAL WAY Europe Middle East amp Africa Customer Services 20 03 98 gt SIGNAL WAY LEVEL 3 COLOUR DIAGRAMS Rev 1 0 nD P gt REFERENCE CLOCK GSM 6700 8700 AL BLOCK DIAGRAM Puer Colin Jack Michael Hansen Billy Jenkins Page 1 of 2 15dB B TWO STAGE 6dB B 902 4 MHz CH 001 1 50Vde 062 174 Vde 124 187 Vde 2 75V T 4 75V PA 15dB D SW_RF from 1400 16 RX EN TX EN 3 5dBm RX 2 75 Supplies 13 MHz oscillator dividers amp 0501 DAC references MAIN _ 794 4 CH 062 MS Lad XL DRIVE ENABLE from Q504 3 VSWITCH IQ FILTER Supplies limitor amps 2nd LO IF cireuts amp references Vref from U900 11 SUPER FILTER VOLTAGE 21 MAIN VCO Q251 794 4 MHz CH 062 Q252 CR 250 LOOP FILTER C 9 dB 947 4 MHz 62 2 75 18dB 3 5dB RXSIGNAL WAY p SIGNAL WAY P MAIN SIGNAL WAY TUNING VOLTAGES REFERENCE CLOCK Ei Middle East amp Afri
80. No signalling present at pins 39 and 40 of U704 If there are no 1 or RAM2CS 1 amp 2 chip select pulses being sent from U701 to the SRAM chip U704 it means that there is a problem in communication between U701 and the RAM Check that U701 and U704 are not physically damaged have no dry joints and are positioned correctly If none of the mentioned problems are apparent replace U704 If after replacing all the above components the fault is still apparent return PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 10 NPU Repair Procedure No OE signalling present at pin 1 U705 If there are no ROM2OE pulses being sent to the EEPROM U705 it means that there is a problem in communication between U701 and the EEPROM Check that U701 and U705 are not physically damaged have no dry joints and are positioned correctly If none of the mentioned problems are apparent replace U705 If after replacing the mentioned chips the fault is still apparent return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting 11 NPU Repair Procedure 1 17 97 Radio is resetting If the radio executes external device communication and then powers itself down very shortly after attempting power up it is resetting A reset can be caused by a fault on either U801 U701 or U501 Check that U801 U701 and U501 are not physically damaged have no dry joints and are positioned correctly If none of the mentioned pro
81. OF IS THE POWER BURST WITHIN SPEC PROCEED TO POWER BURST OUT OF SPEC ON PAGE 17 IS THE TX AUDIO PATH NO PROCEED TO NO OR LOW OK YES IS AUDIO LOOP BACK CORRECT TERMINATE THE CALL IS THE LOW BATTERY INDICATION CORRECT DOES THE CHARGER FUNCTION CORRECTLY NO FAULT FOUND v AUDIO VOLUME ON PAGE 1 NO PROCEED TO NO OR LOW AUDIO MICROPHONE ON PAGE 2 PROCEED TO INCORRECT LOW BATTERY INDICATION ON PAGE 18 NO PROCEED TO NO CHARGER ON PAGE 20 NO OR LOW RING START IS THE SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT RT1 PIN 4 U803 YES ves ISTHE SIGNAL NO RT3 4 CORRECT AT gt RT2 PIN 4 OF U900 RT1 CHECK IF U801 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U801 RT2 CHECK IF U802 AND U803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER ALSO CHECK C825 C817 AND R803 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 RT3 CHECK IF U900 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AT PIN 4 5 6 7 CHECK ALSO PIN CONNECTOR 5 7 OF J2 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NO OR LOW AUDIO VOLUME START IS SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT gt AVI PIN 4 0803 YES YES IS SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT PIN 21 OF U900 AV3 lt gt AV2
82. Offset frequency 22 6 to 100Khz T est Procedure 1 Set HP8922H Cell Control gt Test ode gt CW M eas gt Ch1 gt gt CWFregerror 2 Power up the radio with Battery connector of 7 Volt 3 Key in 11001 Low channel 1215 TX Power level 15 262340 AFC DAC mid range 40 Continue sending all 1 s R ead the frequency error plus 67 K hz as Fc Because we use 40 send out all 1 s 67 K hz above the frequency P O E YEN co 4 Key in 37 Clear 260000 AFC DAC low range 40 R ead the frequency error plus 67 K hz as F1 it should be lt 27 07 K hz more negative 5 Key in 37 264092 40 R ead the frequency error plus 67 K hz as F2 it should be gt 27 07 K hz Compare these reading with the Uniphase by AFC Phasing Y ou can do this by Uniphse AFC Phasing Trouble Shooting Same as Pull Range TX FREQ PULL RANGE Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 247670 To check the AFC circuit whether the frequency can be pulled to a certain range The Test Bay will do the following Power up the radio with the B attery Input of 7 volt Setthe TX Power to level 0 31dB m SetAFC DAC to 2340 Select channel 1 Perform Pseudo T est with midamble 0 Current on this test should be within spec 290 400 mA Read the frequency as Fc Set the power supply to 7 V olt SeEAFC DAC to 0 Do the same test as above 10 Read the frequency as F1 11
83. PIN 6 OF U101 AND POLARITY C101 C102 C103 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U101 DOES PCB POWER UP CORRECTLY DOES PCB DRAWS CURRENT WHENIS OFF DOES PCB POWER DOWN WHEN TWISTED DOES WAKE UP DISPLAY CORRECT DOES DISPLAY SHOW PHONE FAILURE SEE SUPPLIER DOES PCB GO INTO SERVICE AT 102dBm 8700 PROCEDURE LVL3 ed 1 1 NO PROCEED TO WILL NOT POWERS amp STAY ON PAGE 3 PROCEED TO DRAWS CURRENT WHEN IS OFF ON PAGE 19 YES PROCEED TO POWER OFF WHEN TWISTED ON PAGE 8 PROCEED TO NO OR LOW DISPLAY ON PAGE 18 YES PROCEED TO PHONE FAILURE SEE SUPPLIER ON PAGE 19 NO PROCEED TO NO SERVICE AT 102dBm ON PAGE 12 CALL TO THE ANALYZER NO PROCEED TO WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL ON PAGE 9 TERMINATE THE CALL CALL MOBILE FROM ANALYZER IS RING AUDIO TONE AUDIBILE PROCEED TO NO OR LOW RING TONE ON PAGE 1 ANSWER CALL IS THE TX FREQ PROCEED TO FREQ ERR OR PHASE ERROR OUT OF SPEC ON PAGE 8 OR PHASE ERROR WITHIN SPEC IS THEPOWER BURST WITHIN SPEC PROCEED TO POWER BURST OUT OF SPEC ON PAGE 17 NO a Ba PROCEED TO NO OR LOW OK AUDIO VOLUME ON PAGE 1
84. PIN code must be entered again as confirmation If the PIN number is entered incorrectly three times in a row your SIM card will automatically lock up and the Bl ocked message will be displayed Unblocking Your Phone If you receive the Bl ocked message you will need to enter an unblock code and key sequence before you can use the phone A 8 digit PIN unblocking code will have been provided with your SIM card by your Cellular Service Provider Enter the following key sequence to unblock your phone O 5 Unblock Code O New PIN Code O New PIN Code O The new PIN code must contain four to eight digits If this operation is performed incorrectly 10 times in a row your SIM card will become permanently blocked Change SIM PIN2 Code This option is used to change your PIN2 security code When you select this option you must enter the old PIN2 security code before you can proceed You will be asked to enter a new four to eight digit code to replace the old PIN2 security code The new PIN2 security code must be entered again as confirmation If the PIN2 security code is entered incorrectly three times in a row theBl ocked message will be displayed When the B ocked message is displayed you are not allowed access to menu items that require you to enter the PIN2 code for example Setup Fixed Dialling and Call Charge Settings If you receive the Bl ocked message when you try to enter your PIN2 code you wil
85. PIN has not been entered the card becomes blocked unblock the card an unblocking super PIN code must be entered Ten attempts to enter the correct unblocking code are permitted if after ten attempts the correct code has not been entered the SIM card is corrupted and becomes useless Another option available for the SIM card is call barring If subscribed to the call barring of incoming and or outgoing calls may be accomplished by entering a special key sequence The key sequence includes a barring code which determines the type of restriction incorporated and a password to validate the request The initial password is provided when you subscribe to the service The password can be changed by entering a set key sequence A valid standard sized SIM card can be used in any working GSM transceiver regardless of the manufacturer which is compatible with the standard size SIM card 10 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Identity and Security To protect the actual unit from unauthorized use a lock function on the hardware is avail able When enabled this function requires that a three or four digit unlock code be ejtered via the units keypad before normal operation of the transceiver can take place The lock code can be changed by entering a set key sequence Further information on set key sequences can be derived from the unit s User Guide fa mf lt pue Ainu pi 1 17 97 68 09392 8
86. PIN17 OF CHECK FOR U900 0V ON PIN 4 OF Q601 NO NO Y Y NO TRY TO REFLEX RADIO VIA MASTER cor CARD AND AFTER aus REPLACE U703 BIC i YES CHECK FOR 8V ON PIN5 6 7 8 gt OF Q601 IF IS NOT CORRECT REPLACE Q601 REPLACE U900 Y to 0501 42 A 217 Hz WAVEFORM NEEDED HERE FO RX 13 DCLK B DM CS from 0201 59 2 75v RESET TX KEY DUAL CS to U702 16 SPI MI DP EN De 1022 8 1012 2 SPI MO S 4 to 0501 ie RAM2CS m RAMICS to 0704 3 MDM RD MDM WR ROMICS to U702 26 SPI RFCS START EN SENSE DAC OUT gt TXD to J400 14 t 1 WARM SWITCH OVER RXD to 1400 14 U701 19 CIRCUIT EXT via R910 R911 B 2 75 2 s z 52 5 8 8 4 2 amp p e E a CR605 lt x PAC ENABLE 2 75V E c EL TX ENABLE CHARGER MIC 1 2 gt rev m 8 RX TX E SIGNAL I PROCESSING 5 gt DOUBLER EN a B zi lt T R 2 75V DC DC CLK AUD 2 L 2 75V VERIFY THESE WAVEFORMS vswitcH3 85V al FS AUD L500 R475 13_DCLK_B AN 2 Multiplexer eee 2 Europe
87. Page 3 of 4 9 August 1996 MOTOROLA CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY Greater China Cellular Subscriber Division Product Service Preview GSM GC87 U900 GCAP IC The GCAP contains 5 different voltage regulators L5 00 R4 75 L2 75 R2 75 and VREF Battery charger circuitry is contained internally Analog audio is routed into and out of the IC SW_A and BATT B levels are generated and sent to the BIC The switched kick up supply is controlled by this IC and is driven by a 290Khz internal clock It is also responsible for ignition sense and power up RESET is also initially driven low by this chip 0703 BIC4 01 bus interface chip The BIC is responsible for all communication with external devices via the uplink and downlink lines It contains the Digital to Analog and Analog to Digital converters Digital speech data from the DHFA is routed to the speech coder via UPLINK AUD by the BIC and digital speech data from the speech coder is routed to the DHFA via DOWNLINK AUD The 13Mhz clock is received from the GIF SYN and converted to 13 DCLK B which is routed to the logic ICs U704 This IC is the phones Random Access Memory 1M low voltage RAM U702 EPROM This IC contains the phone s software 8 Meg low voltage Flash IC This replaces the two IC on the 8500 PSP GSM GC87 Page 4 of 4 9 August 1996 MOTOROLA CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY
88. SP Type Final Serial Spare Approval Assembly Number Code Code Figure 2 IMEI Configuration 2 3 REV S H This configuration consists of two blocks of two digits and denotes the software and hardware versions within the unit The first two digits correspond to the software version and the last two digits correspond to the hardware version If a version update is carried out on the unit the corresponding change information should be made apparent on the labelling 2 4 MODEL The model number defines the type of product Each product type is issued a common model number 2 5 PACKAGE The package number is used to determine the type of equipment the mode in which it was sold and the language with which it was shipped 68 09304 68 1 6 96 9 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 68P09304A68 O 10 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE LABELLING AND SIM CARDS SIM CARDS SIM CARDS 1 INTRODUCTION The Motorola International 8700 personal cellular telephones are designed to work with the full size Subscriber Identity Module SIM The SIM card contains all the personal data required to access GSM services Data held by the SIM card includes International Mobile Subscriber Identity Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity Home system Services subscribed to PIN and unblocking c
89. Service No Restrictions PIN Entry PIN Enable Disable PIN Change PIN Unblocking NETWORK RELATED Service Selection Auto PLMN Selection PLMN Select from Scan List Scan List Display auto and manual INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE PRESENT xx gt gt lt X gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt FEATURE LIST Change Preferred List Rearrange Order of Preferred List Full Size SIM card Display Own Phone Number MESSAGING AND DATA SMS Mobile Originated Create send store edit view delete Mobile Terminated Point to Point Cell Broadcast Data Calls VEHICULAR FEATURES On Hook Call Processing Volume Adj Speaker Safety Timer Full Duplex Hands Free Operation Ignition Sense Auto Turn On Entertainment Mute Auto Answer OTHER FEATURES Status Indicators Easy Battery Removal Internal Charger Dead Battery Operation with Chargers Rapid Charger Cigarette Lighter Charger Option An X indicates that the feature is present in the International 8700 68P09304A68 O PRESENT gt lt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt P gt lt BDesc2 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE LABELLING AND SIM CARDS TRANSCEIVER LABELLING TRANSCEIVER LABEL
90. The Phone Book Menu Last Ten Calls 7 Last Calls Made Last Calls Received Erase All Numbers My Phone Number s Fixed Diallin g t View Fixed Dial List 1 Setup Fixed Dialling i On Off Edit Entry Add Entry To Fixed Dial List One Touch Dial Setting Phone Memory SIM Memory Menu Navigation Personal Numbers i H Find Entry 2 st Call Number Modify Name Or Number L Erase Name And Number Find Entry By Location Call Number Modify Name Or Number Erase Name And Number Add TT Add To Phone Memory To SIM Card Memory heck w Check Capacity Check Phone Capacity Check SIM Capacity Pi tA aspas ee No Memory Restrictions To SIM Card Memory To Phone Memory 1 amp SIM Memory C g e 1 Availability depends on the type of SIM card Using The Phone Book Menu 29 English Personal Last Ten Hu 222222 Numbers Calls My Phone ERE Fixed Number s One Touch Dial Setting Dialling Personal Numbers The Personal Numbers sub menu is used for creating and managing your list of personal numbers Find Entry By Name This option is used to select a telephone number from a list of alphabetically sorted Phone Book names Once selected this option will display the message Ent Name You can enter a maximum of thr
91. VLR The VLR contains identity information on all local active radiotelephones Should you roam to another area system or country the radiotelephones identity information is sent to the VLR in the new system The new system will then check the radiotelephones details with your home system for authenticity If everything is in order it will be possible to initiate and receive calls whilst in the new area RETRACTABLE ANTENNA pr EARPIECE DE VOLUME BUTTONS KEYPAD PE Figure 3 International 8700 Personal Cellular Telephone BDesc2 1 6 96 68P09304A68 0 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 2 CELLULAR PERSONAL TELEPHONE DESCRIPTION 2 1 GENERAL The International 8700 personal cellular telephone shown onprevious page in Figure 3 is a microprocessor controlled full duplex synthesized FM radiotelephone using digital modulation techniques for use in compatible 900 MHz cellular radiotelephone systems When operated properly the equipment will provide the user with land linked telephone service through individual cell site base stations all linked to a central control office The International 8700 has a 2 0 Watt maximum output power capability 2 2 PHYSICAL PACKAGING The transceiver circuitry is contained in a water resistant polycarbonate plastic housing measuring including Slim battery pack 131 mm 1 x 59 mm W x 24 mm D 5 2 x 2 3 x 0 9 It weighs approximately 214 include
92. Warning When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain a warning signal two double beeps will sound the border of the battery symbol will begin to flash and Low Battery will be displayed When the battery is completely discharged your phone will turn off Looking After Your Phone Never leave your phone or battery in extreme temperatures over 60 C for example behind glass in very hot direct sunlight To dean your phone use a moistened or antistatic cloth Do not use a dry or electrostatically charged cloth Your Battery Charging a New Battery To ensure maximum battery performance it is recommended that a new battery or battery that has not been used for several months be charged for at least 14 hours before use a new battery will require several full charge discharge cycles in order to achieve its optimum performance A new battery or a battery that has not been used for several months may cause a premature fully charged indication on the charger Ignore this indication and let the battery charge for several more hours remove and re insert the battery into the charger and charge for an additional 14 hours Important Battery Information To ensure that you enjoy maximum battery life and use your battery to it s fullest capacity Always use Motorola approved battery chargers For the best results Li lon batteries should be charged using the E P Desktop Charger The b
93. a four digit number which is set at manufacture to 1234 This can be changed at any time by using the change unlock code option Automatic Lock This option can be used to automatically lock your phone each time it is switched on The option has two settings or Off Lock Now This option can be used to immediately lock your phone Once selected your phone will be unusable until the unlock code is entered English 48 Using the Options Menu Change Unlock Code This option is used to change the unlock code After selecting this option you will be asked to enter the current security code before you can proceed You can now enter a four digit code to replace the old code a Bypressing the M key you can access this option even when the phone is locked Require SIM Card PIN This option is used to set and change the PIN code The PIN code can be set to protect your SIM card from unauthorised use If set to On access to your SIM card will be restricted each time it is inserted or the phone is turned on The option has two settings On or Off If the SIM card does not support PIN code disabling these items will not appear Change SIM PIN Code This option is used to change the SIM card PIN code The Require SIM Card PIN option must be set to and you must enter the old PIN code before you can proceed You will be asked to enter a new four to eight digit code to replace the old PIN code The new
94. allows you to scroll through the numbers in the Fixed Dial list When you find the number you want press O to make the call Using The Phone Book Menu 33 English Personal Last Ten we ees 4 uu 5 Numbers Calls My Phone Number s Fixed Dialling One Touch Dial Setting Setup Fixed Dialling This option allows you to switch Fixed Dialling on or off and to enter or change entries in the Fixed Dial list You will be prompted to enter your PIN2 security code when you select this option On Switches fixed dialling on Off Switches fixed dialling off Edit Entry M odifies or clears an entry in the Fixed Dial list When you select this option the first non empty location in the list will be displayed Scroll to the entry you want to change and press You will be prompted to edit the phone number and the name To erase the entry press C Add Entry Adds phone number and name to the Fixed Dial list When you select this option you will be prompted to enter the phone number name and a location number If you do not specify a location number it will be stored in the next available location When setting up your Fixed Dial list you may want to reserve the first nine locations for phone numbers you wish to One Touch Dial See also One Touch Dial Setting English 34 Using The Phone Book Menu One Touch Dial Setting This option allows you to specify which Phone Book list can be One Touch
95. and SIM 9 English The Display The display on your phone can display alphanumeric characters as well as useful information symbols The various elements of the display are as follows ABC123 Characters are used to display messages and telephone numbers Battery Charge Indicator The more segments n displayed the greater the battery charge rx Signal Strength The more segments displayed in the bar graph the better the signal strength k In Use Displayed when a call is in progress Roam Displayed when you are registered system other than your home system Short Message Service Displayed when the phone has received a message The symbol will flash when your message storage area is full Icons are displayed when you are in the Quick Access menu About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card A scroll bar will appear on the right of the display S when you are in a list menu The button on the scroll bar indicates where you are in the list Z Indicates that a menu item is currently selected In addition when you are expected to pressthe O prompt will appear in the display for example Ent r y Compl ete key a Low Temperature Use The liquid crystal display used in your phone will behave differently at extremely low temperatures You may notice that the display responds slowly to key presses this is to be expected and does not affect the phone operation in any way Low Battery
96. card can be used Three attempts to enter the correct PIN may be made If after the three entries the correct PIN has not been entered the card becomes blocked To unblock the card an unblocking super PIN code must be entered Ten attempts to enter the correct unblocking code are permitted if after ten attempts the correct code has not been entered the SIM card is corrupted and becomes useless Another option available for the SIM card is call barring If subscribed to the call barring of incoming and or outgoing calls may be accomplished by entering a special key sequence The key sequence includes a barring code which determines the type of restriction incorporated and a password to validate the request The initial password is provided when you subscribe to the service The password can be changed by entering a set key sequence A valid standard sized SIM card can be used in any working GSM transceiver regardless of the manufacturer which is compatible with the standard size SIM card To protect the actual unit from unauthorized use a lock function on the hardware is available When enabled this function requires that a three or four digit unlock code be entered via the unit s keypad before normal operation of the transceiver can take place The lock code can be changed by entering a set key sequence Note Further information on set key sequences can be derived from the unit s user guide Customer Services Publishing M
97. coverage area of each other For example presume that cell A operates on channels arbitrarily numbered 1 through 8 cell B operates on channels 9 through 16 cell C operates on channels 17 through 24 and cell D operates on channels 1 through 8 repeating the usage of those channels used by cell A In this system subscribers in cell A and subscribers in cell D could simultaneously operate on channels 1 through 8 The implementation of frequency re use increases the call handling capability of the system without increasing the number of available channels When re using identical frequencies in a small area co channel interference can be a problem The G S M system can tolerate higher levels of co channel interference than analogue systems by incorporating digital modulation forward error correction and equalization This means that cells using identical frequencies can be physically closer than similar cells in analogue systems Therefore the advantage of frequency re use can be further enhanced in a G S M system allowing greater traffic handling in high use areas INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE By incorporating Time Division Multiple Access TDMA several calls can share the same carrier The carrier is divided into a continuous stream of TDMA frames each frame is split into eight time slots When a connection is required the system allocates the subscriber a dedicated time slot within each TDMA frame User data speech dat
98. damage the phone and may contravene local RF emission regulations or invalidate type approval Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the areas where you drive Always obey them Also when using your phone while driving please give full attention to driving usehands free operation if available and pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require Electronic Devices Most electronic equipment for example in hospitals and motor vehicles is shielded from RF energy How ever RF energy may affect some malfunctioning or improperly shielded electronic equipment Vehicle Electronic Equipment Check with your vehicle manufacturer s representative to determine if any on board electronic equipment is adequately shielded from RF energy Medical Electronic Equipment Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices such as pacemakers hearing aids etc to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy Turn your phone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in the area instruct you to do so Hospitals or health care facilities may be using RF monitoring equipment Aircraft Turn your phone OFF before boarding any aircraft Useiton the ground only with crew permission Donotusein the air To prevent possible interference with aircraft systems Federal Aviation Administration
99. display the call charges meter during and after chargeable calls The meter shows phone units or currency depending on the setting of the Set Charge Type option No In Call Display This option switches off in call display of the charge time meter Call Charge Settings This feature allows you to customise your A dvice of Charge settings You will be prompted to enter your PIN2 security code before you can access the options a This menu item is only available if you receive the Advice of Charge service Reset Call Charges This option resets your charge meters to zero Set Total Charge Limit This option sets the maximum limit for call charges once this limit has been reached the network will refuse any further chargeable calls If you switch the charge limit 0n you will be prompted to enter a new limit Enter the amount as either units or currency depending on the setting of theSet Charge Type option Units must be entered as whole numbers a When the charge limit is On you will not be able to make fax or data calls Once a limit is set the in call display will show the remaining credit When you reach your last two minutes the warning messageApproaching Charge Li mi t will be displayed and a warning alert will sound The sound will be repeated when one minute remains When the limit is reached the message Char ge Lim t Reached will be displayed and you will not be able to make any more chargeable calls Once the limit i
100. f the display read Check Card then present detect is working and the problem is in the card reader circuit Check SIM V CC at C2170 for 5 V Check w card inserted If V CC is bad then trace back to U 1701 and then toJ 1101 If the V CC is good then trace the following lines from J1101 to the SIM block SIM RST SIM CLK B SIM I O Quick Check 1 Clock Clock 0703 P9 I O 2 Reset l U703 P6 Clock ES Reset Vpp 3 Vcc Vpop J N U703 P7 Vcc EE L 4 11 U703 P10 11 0000 0000 Push the button to test Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 297670 BACK LITE CHECK To Check the current drain of the B ack L ite circuitry Test Procedure 1 Power up the radio with the battery input of 7 V olt from power suplly 33 2 The current reading of the power supply 3 should be about 100 110 mA Record this current as REF 1 3 Wait for 5 seconds until the back lites are off 4 Read the current on the power supply 3 should be about 40 to 60 mA Record this current as REF 2 The current of the Back REF 1 REF2 5 30 to 85 mA Trouble Shooting Check all the Back Lite are ON Compare the brightness with a good board f the problem is board related Check U 701 pin 32 should be 2 75 V when you power up the radio with the battery input and goes to 0 V after 12 seconds CD U 701 If the Back Lite Enable line U 701 32 does n
101. install original Keypad Display board and proceed to d If Keypad Display board is at fault examine it for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components J1101 d Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly If Logic RF Board Assembly is at fault examine it for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components J2 U801 U803 and U900 32 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting Table 8 Logic Processing Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Logic Processing Symptom Probable Cause Verification and Remedy 4 Phone will not recognize accept SIM card a SIM card defective 1 the contacts are clean insert a known If the SIM card is not at fault proceed to b Initially check that the contacts on the card are not dirty clean if necessary and check if fault has been eliminated good SIM card into the portable telephone Power up the unit and confirm whether or not the card has been accepted If the fault no longer exists the defective SIM card should be replaced SIM card retaining assembly defective or mis aligned Gain access to the retaining assembly as Examine for defects and replace if neces described in Disassembly on page 21 sary Keypad Display Board defective Replace Keypad Display Board with a Examine the original Keypad Display Board known good boa
102. is present at 0703 pin 37 but not present at any of the other afore mentioned chips ohm the path from that chip back to 0703 pin 37 If the trace is functional check the chip in question for supply voltage If no supply voltage to the chip trace its path and or replace the chip If after replacing all of the above components the fault is not eliminated return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting 5 Repair Procedure The 2 75V dc supply is missing at one or more of pins 45 46 58 and 59 of U701 Pins 45 46 58 and 59 are each fed via pull up resistors R739 R746 R738 and R734 respectively Check that all the pull up resistors are present not physically damaged and that there are no dry joints on either the resistors or U701 If after replacing the above components the fault is not eliminated return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 6 NPU Repair Procedure The reset line at pin 30 of U900 does not go high to 2 75 dc Check that U900 is not physically damaged has no dry joints and is positioned correctly If none of the mentioned problems are apparent replace U900 If replacing U900 the fault is still apparent return PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 7 NPU Repair Procedure 1 17 97 The watchdog line at pin 31 of U900 does not go high to 2 75V The watchdog line is pulled high by U701 when it receives and executes the initial blo
103. or created from a Normal Transfer card The instruction steps should be followed in order 18 68P09392A89 Step 1 Select the required Master SIM card Insert the Master Transfer card into the slot located on the back of the repaired unit Turn the unit on the display should show Clone Step 2 Step3 Enter 03 via the units keypad This command wil cause the configuration data to be downloaded from the Master Transfer card Step4 While data transfer is taking place between the card and the unit Please Wait will be displayed After a short period of time if the data transfer has been completed correctly Clone will re appear in the recipient units display When the data block has been transferred successfully remove the Master Transfer card and check the repaired radio functions correctly See Testing on page 13 Step 5 At no point should either 021 or 022 be entered while a Master Transfer card is in the radio If either of the stated commands are entered the master information on the card will be erased To prevent the above happening the card can be locked by entering 06 via the units keypad with the card inserted Unlock the card by entering 071 f during either transfer process a problem arises an error message will be displayed If the Transfer card is removed before the data transfer is completed Bad Data on Card will appear in the display If either situation arises the proc
104. refurbished unit if the defective unit is covered by warranty and has not been damaged or opened by the customer The Express Exchange Centre must write the mechanical serial number of the customer s original unit on the warranty label of the exchange unit s housing This ensures that when a customer returns a unit the Express Exchange Centre can verify whether a customer is entitled to warranty Motorola National Support Centres will log and track units by the typed mechanical serial number on the approval label which will always remain on the phone Motorola National Support Centres may also act as Express Exchange Centres and hold a quantity of exchange units This pool of exchange units may be used for quick turnaround emergency support to Express Exchange Centres which have become short of replacement units The defective units will be returned initially to the National Support Centres HUB s or their nominated and approved Cellular Service Centres Service Centres will be responsible for performing level 2 repairs If it is found that the problem is localised to the PCB then in the case of an approved Cellular Service Centre the unit will be sent to a National Support Centre or HUB Product Service training should be arranged through the local Motorola National Support Centre REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING ORDERING INFORMATION Only centres authorized by Motorola to carry out repairs will be able to purchase spare parts O
105. some extent those cells directly adjacent to that cell Since the coverage area of a cell on a given channel is limited to a small area relative to the total system coverage area a channel may be reused in another cell outside the coverage area of the first By this means several subscribers may operate within the same geographic area without interference with each other on a single channel GSM Description Unlike previous cellular systems GSM uses digital radio techniques The GSM system has the following advantages over previous analogue systems International Roaming Due to international harmonization and standardization it will be possible to make and receive calls in any country which supports a GSM system Digital Arr Interface The GSM phone will provide an entirely digital link between the telephone and the base station which is in turn digitally linked into the switching subsystems and on into the PSTN ISDN Compatibility ISDN is digital communications standard that many countries are committed to implementing 75 2 5 jo 1 gt x lt c 2 G x e GSM 8700 6700 It is designed to carry digital voice and data over existing copper telephone cables The GSM phone will be able to offer similar features to the ISDN telephone Security and Confidentiality Telephone calls on analogue system
106. to do so GENERAL DO NOT allow children to play with any radio equipment containing a transmitter DO NOT operate this equipment near electrical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere Mobile telephones are under certain conditions capable of interfering with blasting operations When you in the vicinity of such work look out for and observe signs cautioning against mobile radio transmission If transmission is prohibited you must turn off your mobile telephone to prevent any transmission In standby mode the mobile telephone will automatically transmit to acknowledge a call if it is not turned off Refer to the appropriate section of the product user manual for additional pertinent safety information All equipment should be serviced only by a qualified technician AGen1 68 09304 68 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE Cellular Subscriber Group EXPRESS EXCHANGE PROGRAM EXPRESS EXCHANGE 1 INTRODUCTION The basis of Motorola s Express Exchange program is that when a customer s unit becomes defective its programming information is transferred into a fully functional exchange phone The exchange phone is then given to the customer allowing the customer to continue using the same type of cellular telephone without having to worry about the length of the repair process 2 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED The following items are required for the exchange process to b
107. up HP8922 Cell Status 1 102 dBm TX CH 124 level 5 BER 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 V 2 Wait until it camp 3 Make a phone call by key in 123 OK 4 After connected check the CRC ratio on HP8922 should be less than 0 1 Check the reading after 50 000 of bits is transfered 5 Decrease the power supply voltage to 5 6 V olt Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 567670 6 Re run the Bit Error Rate again 7 The CRC on HP8922 should be the same as less than 0 1 Trouble Shooting This test is the same for checking the RX Level Quality if the radio failed this item increase the amplitude of the boardcast channel from 102 dB to 100 or higher if the CRC ratio goes back to less than 0 1 96 within 2 dBm increase check your cable for loss Trouble as RX Level Quality CD M odem POWER STEP 5 HIGH CH To test the radio at maximum TX power by low voltage supply This is a pre test for the following test The Test Bay will do the following Set up the H P8922 Cell Status 1 ampl 102dBm TCH 124 level 5 1 Power up the radio with the Battery input of 6 V 2 Verify the radio is camped 3 Initiate a call 4 Decrease the power supply to 5 6 V 5 Step up the 8922 102 dBm to 85 dB m 6 Measure the TX power should be within specification Spec 30 8 35 dBm Trouble Shooting If The TX Power is off Specification Key in 110
108. use your SIM card in someone else s GSM phone and you will be charged for the call Like a bank or credit card you should keep your SIM card secure Do not bend or scratch your card and avoid exposure to static electricity or water Switch off your phone before inserting or removing the SIM card Failure to do so may damage the memory on your SIM card English 16 About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card SIM Card Insertion Switch off your phone by pressing theS insert the SIM card into the slot in the base of the phone as shown If the SIM card is inserted the wrong way round or damaged the Check Card message may be displayed Remove the SIM card check that it is the right way round and then re insert it into the phone If either of the Bad Card See Supplier orBlocked See Supplier messages are displayed then you will need to contact your Cellular Service Provider SIM Card Removal Switch off your phone and push the release button towards the base of the phone Pull the SIM card out Making and Receiving Phone Calls Switching the Phone On and Off To switch the phone on or off press and hold theS key If VibraCall is selected the phone will vibrate when it is switched on If you switch the phone on and there is no SIM card inserted you will be asked to insert one Once inserted the phone will check that the SIM card is valid A number of messages will then be di
109. watch dog line to L275 as shown m ET ego 0960 OS 8c8O v Shortthese m pads N T i R904 e 4 s CD H uo 4 Check the 13 M hz clock signal at U 805 2 and U 703 37 R 714 T900 CD U701 at Check 13 Mhz here i 2 8 V p p If itis CD 0705 5 Check Chip Select CS at pin26 U 702 it should be CD U702 6 Examine all the data amp adress waveforms 7 Check RAM CS on U704 pin 39 and 40 U708 p 1 2 U708 p1 2 WW CD U701 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 107670 If the board is turning ON and is drawing the correct amount of current butis not properly communicating with the EM MI box check the following 8 Check DSC EN J400 pin3 4 25 V with EMMI 3 25 V without EM MI Signal provide from the BIC to External Connector It indicates to the peripheral when to turn on so that the DSC bus can be synchronized and the peripheral can be identified This signal is buffered up to 5 V olt before being out put on the external connector This signal is also used by the phone to determine if a DHFA is present and if 50 the state of ignition in the accessory 9 Down Link 400 pin 4 4 8 V 0 84 V Up Link J400 pin 5 TUUU UVU DL 3 1 V 0 72V Speech and data information from external peripherals when in DHFA mode can be transfered across
110. will most likely affect the 13MHz reference clock are C201 C203 CR201 0201 and Y201 Check that the mentioned components are not physi cally damaged have no dry joints and are positioned correctly If none of the mentioned problems are apparent take measurements on the defective PCB to decipher which component s you feel should be replaced or replace the following components in the order shown 1st Replace Y201 2nd Replace C203 3rd Replace CR201 4th Replace C201 Check the PCB after each component change to verify fault elimination If replacing the above components does not eliminate the fault return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 4 NPU Repair Procedure 40 No 13MHz reference clock signal at pin 17 of U703 Review the audio logic block diagram which shows the path of the 13MHz clock Confirm 13MHz clock signal presence at U703 pin 37 Confirm 13MHz clock signal presence at U501 pin 42 Confirm 13MHz clock signal presence at U805 pin 2 Confirm 26MHz clock signal presence at U805 pin 6 and 0801 pin 37 Confirm 13MHz clock signal presence at U701 pin 51 If the 13MHz clock enters U703 but does not appear at the output pin 37 inspect the chip for physical damage dry joints and correct position If none of the mentioned problems are apparent ensure that the supply voltage to the chip is present see appropriate chip diagram If present replace the chip If the clock signal
111. wp 3 dBm 3 dBm L302 Y wv 7 3 Q302 Q381 Q300 10 dBm 3dBm 6 5 dBm 2 dBm If there is signal at the Base of the Exciter Q381 5 Check RX VCO input at U 300 p1 IF Input at U 300 p4 TX VCO inputatU300 p14 asshown 108 Mhz 794 4 Mhz 902 4 Mhz 10 dBm Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 197670 If the frequence are funcky check SS U 701 pin 2 3 If thereis no RX trouble shoot the RX VCO circuit refer to the M ac Trouble Shooting Guide f there is no 108 M hz from U 201 p4 then check if the following things are working TX I amp Q from U501 U201 pins 61 62 63 and 64 216 Mhz LO IQ filter C221 L440 If the RX V CO and 108 M hz are both bad there may be a problem with the GIF SY N regulators Q202 Q203 or with the 13 M hz crystal oscillator circuit Y 201 controled by U 501 p29 If the RX V CO and IF are both good then the problem is most likely in theTX VCO ThisVCO is controled by U 300 p8 and is always locked 108 M hz above the RX VCO frequency This act like a phase lock loop circuit CR 300 controls the frequency of oscillation In normal peration at TX M ax Low channel the signal on CR 300 should look like this Freq 2217 Hz 3V 2 2 V At this level goes up the frequencyoftheoscillator goesu 6 If th
112. 0 d400 Flare c400 7200 GSM GSM GSM GSM GSM Series GSM Series GSM 900 900 GSM 1800 GSM 900 Normal Lilon 400mAh Slim Battery SNN4554 E P Charger Only Batteries 100mAh Slim XCap Battery SNN4697 E P Charger Only 1200mAh XCap Battery 64615 SNN4458 E P Charger Only NiMhi600mAh XSlim Battery 750 Slim XCap Battery 1300mAh XCap Battery 1600mAh High Capacity Battery NiCdi400mAh Slim Battery 64618 SNN4132 600mAh Slim Battery 64630 SNN4102 1100mAh XCap Battery 64617 SNN4058 64620 SNN4612 64621 SNN4310 64619 SNN4259 SNN4824 Batteries NiCd 400mAh XSlim Battery w clip SNN4564 with Clip 600 XSlim Battery w clip SNN4887 Chargers Charger Base 64606 SPN4462 E P Euro adaptor 64604 SPN4222 UK adaptor 64605 SPN4221 Overnight Charger 56334 Base amp Transformer intelliCharger XT w Euro 64608 SPN4463 SPN4112 Non compatible ilntellicCharger XT w UK 64609 SPN4463 SPN4111 Non compatible In Car iBattery Saver 6407 SKN4292 ESTE EEE Accessories Saver RF connection 64610 SLN9933 Ultra Saver with RF connection SLN9934 1 for 8000 Flare iPhone Cradle 64629 SYN4932 TRN5502 Headset Adapter i Professional Charger Car Kit Car Kits iBasic Car Kit 7000 UR i SYN4932 1 TRN5502 Basic Car
113. 04 CONTROL CE LINE FROM PIN 100 OF U701 TO PIN 26 OF U702 IF IS CORRECT REPLACE U702 NPU13 U701 BEING SENT CE FROM PIN 102 TO PIN 40 OF U704 IF IS CORRECT REPLACE U704 NPU14 U701 BEING SENT CE FROM PIN 114 TO PIN 27 OF U705 TRY TO CONNECT RADIO TO THE EMMIBOX FOR UPGRADE THE RADIO POWERS OFF WHEN TWISTED CHECK Y201 CR201 U201 U702 U704 FOR POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER WILL NOT POWERS DOWN CHECK IF THERE ISN T ANY SHORT ON WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS CHECK ALSO CONNECTION FROM PIN 25 OF J2 TO R990 OR BAD SOLDER ON U900 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 FREQUENCY ERROR OUT OF SPEC CHECK Y201 AND CR 201 FOR PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER PHASE ERROR OUT OF SPEC START ARE TXI amp TXQ NO CHECK U501 FOR CORRECT AT gt PHISICALLY DAMAGE PIN 61 63 OF OR BAD SOLDER 0201 5 CHECK FOR RIGTH FREQUENCY 216MHz ON C228 AND 108MHz AT PIN 4 OF U201 TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U201 WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL CONNECT 50 OHM LOAD TO THE ANTENNA PLUG PUT THE RADIO IN TEST MODE AND SET TX POWER IN CONTINIOUS MODE OR IMPULSIVE MODE LIKE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTION IMPULSIVE 11062 1200 310 CONTINUOS 11062 1215 40 START IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX REPAIR 1 TX1 PIN 8 OF U400 IS 902 4MHz TX N YES SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX2 L302
114. 1 Distribs L 1 spares list is not available yet GC87 L2 9 service manual 68P09392A89 will be available to be ordered in mid September L 2 Distribs Not Available until Q4 1996 Motorola Sub Logistics will support component part sales to Motorola HTC only Obtain part numbers from MACCIMS New Service Tools Equipment Use the same service tools as GSM 8500 8109972N01 Ultralite opening fixture SKN4683A 8 pin modular cable w coax SKN4636A datalogger cable SYN4080A Extender Board 0109354C01 Ultralite Gizmo WinGATE 22 Test bay Available through Greater China Test Equipment Group Contact George Klingerhoffer at Libertyville PSP_GSM GC87 Page 2 of 4 9 August 1996 MOTOROLA CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY Greater China Cellular Subscriber Division Product Service Preview GSM GC87 L 3 Service Documentation Contact Libertyville BB215 or HK Field Service Support to obtain schematic component overlays and circuits training lessons REPARABILITY There are seven 7 cans that cover a large section of the RF side It is important that the cans are put on correctly There is no good and fast way to repair the cans at the present time We are currently evaluating different systems to find an efficient rework system that will ensure reliable repair of the cans and the parts under the cans Circuit Highlights RF Differences from 8200 to 8700 The block diagrams are similar except for the following differences
115. 1 Hz Trouble Shooting Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 627670 Check the stability of the Y 201 Crystal oscillator circuit see if it s drifting off frequency See TX Freq Pull Range Procedure 1 0201 2 If the frequency error is 200 Hz or above CD 0500 NEGATIVE FLATNESS HIGH MID LOW CH POSITIVE FLATNESS HIGH MID LOW CH When the radio transmitting the TX power should not be fluxuated over 1 dBm if it does it will fail this test During a phone call you can see the following wave form On HP8922 Cell Status Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 8922 Cell Status gt Pwr Ram 2 dBm 1 dBm 1 1 1 dBm 1 1 dBm The Test will do the following Set up the 8922 Cell Status BCH 1 ampl 102 dBm TCH 124 level 5 High CH 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 V 2 Verify the radio is camped 3 Initiate a call 4 Decrease the power supply to 5 6 V 5 Step up the HP 8922 from 102 dB m to 85 dB m 6 Verify the Negative Flatness should be within specification HP8922 Cell Status Phase Error Spec Negative Flatness gt 1 dBm Positive Flatness lt 1 dBm Trouble Shooting Same as Peak Phase TIME MASK HIGH 637670 Typical wave form of a TX burst at maximum power Failed for
116. 10 The test bay continue the previous test 1 Start simple camp HP 8922 CH62 60 dBm Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 417670 2 V erify unit has camped and requestA FC DAC 3 Request RX and Q power 4 Calculate orminalized power by equations 5 Calculate RF power 6 Calculate DAC value Repeat Step 3 6 for 3 times Savethe final calculation of the output amp DAC value Test Procedure 1 On Uniphase Phasing AGC DHFA 9 Band 2 Y ou will see the unit display 118 19 0 This is not a correct reading the computer initial the radio on the begining 3 Y ou ll then see these on the HP 8922 RF GEN Fre RF GEN Amplitude Frequency Changing Calculate RF power required for 1V p pRXI amp RXQ Channel 1 14 30 46 62 78 94 110 amp 124 Trouble Shooting If the radio fail the above test Trouble shoot as AGC Simple camp Check for the path as shown 935 2 Mhz 29 dBm A db e dBm 782 2 Mhz 14 dBm IE 39d8m Q Q418 153 Mh M am 890 2 Mhz 28 dBm input from HP8922H vA 153 Mhz 13 5 dBm 782 U Mhz 19 dBm AGC STEP ATTEN dB Test Procedure Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 427670 1 HP8922 Cell Status CH62 70 dBm 2 Key in 33062 to do the simple camp 3 0n Uniphase EM M I Camping Request camp status Radio camp If the radio is not camp do it again preset the H P8922 4 Switch Uniphse Other Monito
117. 2 78 64 01 SWF3051C SLF6920G 30 2 468 KO6ITALY 0109038 58 0109037A12 78 64 02 current SWF2526D SLF6920G 20 30 2 476 K06 NONITALY 06 0109038A58 0109037A12 78 64 02 current Page 2 Smoc based models GSM8700 Smoc SMT Programs Radio Board shop ordey HW Sw s ware version pre fi _ Topside prog Bottomside Description enshipped Status SWF2640A SLF7010A Jalo 95 01 09 8409486L09 P9 1 0109035A05 0109035A04 pep ev SWF2640B SLF7010B so 1 e 95 01 09 8409292U02 T2 0109036A39 0109036A38 post ship 09 s ware SWF2640A SLF7010A 95 01 10 8409486L09 P9 1 0109035A05 0109035A04 post ship new 10 s ware SWF2640B SLF7010B 95 01 10 630 8409292002 72 0109036A39 0109036A38 post ship new 10 s ware SWF2640A SLF7010A so 111 95 01 10 453 8409486109 P9 1 0109035 05 0109035 04 moc with Der G cap Rework only SWF2640B_ SLF70108 950110 s409292U02 T2 0109036A39 01090296498 SWF2640C sirzotoc sia 1 10 95 01 10 8409292U02 T2 0109039A26 0109039425 Smoc with D54G cap ves current Smoc with Toshiba Saw SLF7620A T1 1 95 01 10 8409292U02 T2 0109039A26 0109039A49 Yes Smoc with 084 G cap new SWF3539B SLF7620B T2 95 01 10 TBA 8409292U02 T3 0109040A10 0109040A09 pcb Yes SWF2640A units have entertainment mute disabled Page 3 GSM 8700 6700 COMPUTER SOFTWARE COPYRIGHTS The Motorola products de
118. 3 52 5 OG C o ar HN 25 8 z 50 05 E ie 75 3 B B Be Ln fog En 2 TP55 ME 2 32 B kin S amp o r g E 5 4601 uii En C223 m O r 8 fs 19 Sg 5 503 t lt OG OG a 373 303 376 3 a TP5 dg Sm 97 TP17 es 153 IST 26 6529 g3 Ob m z Tr 42 8 C063 N 8 i ey IS m n ae BEE og n E a Ag me o dor 4 251 eed IS 6753 dg 0 4579 i5 psy PEE 25 UT 62 0 0 5 ty Hep 2 0400 22 0 sz CN Ez LOZA qe 821 e SI 2 m z3 2 z en w il fe U802 z ag B a 8 R 622 q 8 5 B sb 82 g ks s toy dej _ iH z EE gt FL420 B e 2 mm 829 8g 8 E 3 501 ve Gg cogn 5 412 Eir EN ZSE 87 z 76 519 EZ C073 828 FN AN GCAP FIX Ref DB034 No 5713 ECN 5835 1 8409414809 11 v3 Add VR 607 4813825405 Both 6700 amp 8700 GSM 8700 TRANSCEIVER 3Pages 02 97 pin I to pin 4 0601 SCALE 4 1 DATE 16 AUG 96 Michael Hansen Technical Support HTC Flensburg pin 7 7 3 to 82 High Tech Centre Flensburg March 5th 1997 European Cel
119. 3 lines see the GSM 8700 interface document pages 9 amp 10 Q305 this portion has gain 10 dB m Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 217670 TX CURRENT LOW CH Power up the radio from the Battery Input of 8 V olt The Test B ay will 1 Set AFC DAC to 4092 2 Set channel to 1 3 Set the power level to 0 4 Perform the Pseudo test with midamble 0 The frequency should be within 10 K hz The current should be within 100 mA to 220 mA TheTX Power should be 28 dBm to 33 dBm The PA table set the power level 0 approximate to 30 dBm Spec 100 220 mA Test Procedure Due to the HP6623 A Power Supply not responding to pulsing current we have to read the current from the DM M Do the set up as below Tom Power supply 1 T his set up only for the benches with the old interface fixture EMMI Fixture If you use the battery supply then you don t need this setup 1 Power up the radio with the Batt connector W PS23 of 8V 2 Key in 110012 12002 310 3 Read the TX Power on the HP8922H It should be within 28 33 dBm typical 30 dBm 4 Read the current on the DM M it should be within 100 to 400 mA typical 140 mA Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 227670 Trouble Shooting 1 If the TX Power is low on power level 0 check the path for power loss as below 5 21 mme z 6 5 dBm C305 9 dBm m
120. 5 310 Check the TX Power on HP 8922H Active Cell Ch xxx TX 15 The TX Power should be within Spec for all channels Thecurrent reading on the power supply about 140 mA Spec Tune Power Band x 23 31 dBm DAC Power Band x 100 138 Trouble Shooting If the above Test Procedure looks it propably the TX V CO problem Check as shown Freq 217 Hz 3 V Lower than 2 9 Vot on Channel 124 JR CR 300 0 Higher than 0 7 Volt on Channel 1 If the pulse voltage is off too low or too high It will fail for these items Check US WP CD C306 and CD CR 300 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 347670 AFC MID CHANNEL F1 F5 Khz TheTest Bay do the following Select the channel 62 Set Tx power to level 10 SetAFC DAC to 0 F1 Initiate pulse carrier with Pseudo Calculate F1 frequency Offset 43104 46 2 Stop the transmiter Repeat the above test with AFC DAC to 4095 F5 Calculate F5 frequency Offset 43104 46 2 CO O Ui CJ Spec Fl 22 5 to 155 Khz Fb 27 to 150Khz Test Procedure Power the radio with Battery Input of 7 V 1 Key in 110622 2600002 12102 40 2 Set HP8922H Test M ode CW M eas 3 Read the frequency as Fa 1 67 Khz 43104 46 x 2 Example F1 902 263 888 Hz 67 000 Hz 43104 46 x 2 41867 Hz 41 Khz It is negative because compare with Fc 902 4 Mhz itis lower than 902 4 M
121. 6 V olt 6 TheRX level should be stay unchange Spec 4 12 Trouble Shooting 1 If the radio do not camp trouble shoot as Simple Camp Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 537679 2 Set the HP8922H on T est M with amplitude 28 dBm on Channel 1 Power up the radio with the Butt Plug of 7 V olt 3 Key in 08 11001 4 Check the RX Path as shown 8902 Mhz 21 28 input from HP8922H FL453 19dBm 5 Check RXI RX Q at 500 pins 14 and 15 as shown on Tuning RX Level Need the following to have a good RXI amp RXQ 316 Mhz LO Tank controlled by U 201 43 Q Ref V oltage from U 500 16 about 1 35 volt 153 Mhz IF from ISO 0421 SP DATA SPI CLK from 0501 M odem RX QUALITY HI MID LOW CH Hi Channel BCH 1 TX CH 124 Mid Channel BCH 1 TX CH 62 Low Channel 124 TX CH 1 To test the Receive Signal s quality on High Channel at 5 6 V olt This test compare with the analog is a RSSI test Test Procedure Set up HP8922 Cell Status BCH 1 ampl 102 dBm TX CH 124 level 5 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6V olt 2 Wait until it camp 3 Make a phone call by key in 123 4 After connected check the RX Qty on HP8922 should be 0 or less than 3 5 Decrease the power supply voltage to 5 6 V olt 6 TheRX level should be stay unchange Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 547670 Spec 0 3 0 good quality 3 is the limit
122. 6272 1215s 40 and check the path as shown Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 577670 5 dBm 3 dBm Q301 1 dBm 3 dBm L302 J 7 3 a Bm ro J Q302 81 Q300 2 dBm 6 5 dBm f no TX Power at all Check U 300 for 108 M hz 794 4 M hz 902 4Mhzas Shown 108 Mhz 794 4 Mhz x29 OB 25 dBm 902 4 Mhz 10 dBm f the above looks good but fail for Power Step 5 M ax Power 1 Key in 110622 12052 310 2 Y ou should see this on HP8922H gt Anl Center Frequency 902 4 Mhz Span 1 Mhz Ref Level 42 dBm Check the TX Power on HP8922H gt Active Cell gt Ch 62 gt TX Power 01 It should be within 27 4 dBm The Cable loss about 2 5 dBm 3 If you seethis Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 587679 Check negative supply for ripple PEAK PHASE ERROR HIGH CH This test the error of the peak phase D uring the transmiting the Phase of the TX is not stable at all time if the peak of the phase over the spec s limit it will fail this item To learn about this 1 Make a phone call 2 Setup HP8922 Cell Status Phase Freq to see the Peak Phase reading or 3 Cell Status Phase Freq View Phase Err Y ou will see this on HP8922 410 pP This is the Peak Degree 0 10 This is the peak W hen the radio transmiting the TX power should not be fluxuated over 2 dBm For example If the TX power is 25 dBm so the fluxuating should not higher th
123. 7 0109037A10 74 06 12 SWF2266D SLF6830E E53 30 12 678 K06 ITALY 06 0109038A57 0109037A10 74 06 12 wq pq ue os o qu W PRE FIX DESCRITION Topside prog Bottomside prog 460 SWF3052C SLF6830E E54 30 345 KO6ITALY 0109038A57 0109037A10 74 06 14 current SWF2266D SLF6830E 55 30 362 K06 NONITALY 06 0109038 57 0109037A10 74 06 14 current GSM6700 RADIO BOARD SHOP ORDER HW SW PRE FIX DESCRITION Antenna Topside prog Bottomside prog version status SWF3049B SLF6920F 36 K06 ITALY 0109037A13 0109037412 78 63 36 SWF2376E SLF6920F 36 463 K06 NON ITALY C06 0109037A13 0109037A12 78 63 36 SWF3049C SLF6920G J47 33 1 679 KO6 ITALY 0109038A58 0109037A12 78 64 01 SWF2376F SLF6920G J48 33 1 680 K06 ITALY 06 0109038A58 0109037A12 78 64 01 SWF3049C SLF6920G J49 33 2 480 KO6ITALY 0109038A58 0109037A12 78 64 02 current SWF2376F SLF6920G 450 33 2 452 K06 NONITALY 06 0109038A58 0109037A12 78 64 02 current 5M6700 E FLIP RADIO BOARD SHOP ORDER PRE FIX DESCRITION Topside prog Bottomside prog SWF3051B SLF6920F K06 ITALY 0109037A13 0109037412 78 63 36 SWF2526C SLF6920F K06 NON ITALY C06 0109037A13 0109037A12 78 63 36 SWF3051C SLF6920G K06 ITALY 0109038A58 0109037A12 78 64 01 SWF2526D SLF6920G8 18 30 1 682 K06 NONITALY Coe 0109038 58 0109037A1
124. 8 9 10 11 12 14 PIN9 PIN10 PIN11 PIN12 PIN14 AOC TX KEY DET SW SAT EN IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEMS ARE PRESENT RETURN PCB TO HI TECH INCORRECT LOW BATTERY INDICATION NO ORLOW DISPLAY START YES CHECK FOR BAD IS od 01 SOLDER ON Q102 6V3 AFTER REPLACE IT NO CHECK L500 ON PIN 6 OF U101 AND POLARITY C101 C102 C103 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U101 DOES PCB POWER UP CORRECTLY DOES PCB DRAWS CURRENT WHENIS OFF DOES PCB POWER DOWN WHEN TWISTED DOES WAKE UP DISPLAY CORRECT DOES DISPLAY SHOW PHONE FAILURE SEE SUPPLIER DOES PCB GO INTO SERVICE AT 102dBm 8700 PROCEDURE LVL3 ed 1 1 NO PROCEED TO WILL NOT POWERS amp STAY ON PAGE 3 PROCEED TO DRAWS CURRENT WHEN IS OFF ON PAGE 19 YES PROCEED TO POWER OFF WHEN TWISTED ON PAGE 8 PROCEED TO NO OR LOW DISPLAY ON PAGE 18 YES PROCEED TO PHONE FAILURE SEE SUPPLIER ON PAGE 19 NO PROCEED TO NO SERVICE AT 102dBm ON PAGE 12 CALL TO THE ANALYZER NO PROCEED TO WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL ON PAGE 9 TERMINATE THE CALL CALL MOBILE FROM ANALYZER IS RING AUDIO TONE AUDIBILE PROCEED TO NO OR LOW RING TONE ON PAGE 1 ANSWER CALL IS THE TX
125. 801 o DOES R275 NO PROCEED CORRECT AT PIN26Or gt TONPUS U900 9 YES NO DOES R475 PROCEED CORRECT AT PIN 41 OF d 0900 ON PAGES YES IS 13MHz NO PROCEED PRESENT AT PINS OF gt TONPUB U703 8 5 IS 13MHz NO ROCHE PRESENT AT PIN 51 Bd 0701 DOES THE RESET LINE PROCEED GO HIGH ON gt TONPU10 PIN 30 OF ON PAGE 7 U900 YES REMOVE SHORT ON WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS DOES THE 5 WATCHDOG PROCEED LINE GO HIGH gt TONPU11 ON PIN 31 OF ON PAGE 7 U900 YES 2 TIETHEWATCHDOGHIGHBY SHORTING TOGETHER THE WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS YES NO IS THE CE PRESENT ON PIN26 OF P ding e U702 7 YES NO IS THE CE RA PRESENT ON gt TONPU13 PIN 39 AND 40 0704 YES NO ISTHE CE see PRESENT ON TOE gt TO NPU14 7 YES Y TRY TO RESOLDER FLASH PROM U702 AND AFTER REPLACE IT START IS PRESENT AT PIN 48 OF U900 YES NO TIE THE WATCHDOG HIGH BY SHORTING TOGETHER THE WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS DOES 3 25V VSWITCH CORRECTAT PIN 25 OF U900 LE DOES LX 300KHz PRESENT AT PIN 37 OF U900 YES DOES L275 CORRECT PIN 22 OF U900 DOES L500 CORREC
126. 9 11 GSM 8700 6700 z s 25 co 12 68P09392A89 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group TESTING GSM 8700 6700 Testing Verification Introduction To test the GSM 8700 6700 cellular tele phone for functional verification the following equipment will be required GSM analyzer compatible communications e Antenna test adaptor Part No 5880348B33 and appropriate cable connectors Test SIM card Part No 8102430701 Charged battery pack 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 Equipment Configuration Initially insert the test SIM card into the slot at the rear of the personal cellular telephone If required further information on SIM card insertion is available on page 10 The tele phone s antenna should now be removed see Disassembly on page 21 for further details When the antenna has been removed attach the antenna adaptor to the unit Slide a charged battery on to the back of the personal telephone so that the tele phone can be powered up Finally connect a cable from the antenna connector to the RF in out port of the communications analyzer and power both the analyzer and personal telephone on The equipment set up shown in Figure 7 Testing Configuration should now be in place Bunsay GSM 8700 6700 Figure 7 Testing Configuration
127. 90 dBm TCH 124 TX Level 5 2 Camp the radio 647670 Time Mask Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 657679 3 Initiate a phone call 4 V erify the ouput power on HP8922 should be within 30 8 35 dBm 5 Increase the RF level to 85 dBm 6 V erify the average current is within specification Spec 100 300 mA Test Procedure Due to the HP6623 A Power Supply not respone the pulsing current so we have to read the current from the DMM Do the set up as below Power supply 1 EMMI Fixture 1 Power up the radio with the Butt Plug of 7 V olt 2 Key in 11001 12152 310 3 Read the TX Power on the HP8922H It should be within 10 3 to 18 dB m typical 13 dBm 4 Read the current on the DMM it should be within 100 to 400 mA typical 140 mA Trouble Shooting 1 If the TX Power is low on power level 15 check the path for power loss as below Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 667670 3 dBm Mil 150 C3l9 C317 Se 10 dB cat cw e RE C384 C381 C385 tm BQ Q7 RH B B om 2 33 2 OHS Z 3 om S gm Uc 0 p 305 am 6 5 d Bm 2 d B m rn B B 300 N zn C3 3d E Rio H Zn rm d xm n d LM Co ca H C306 9 dBm cast ot m 140 come RE Q301 1 V 3 dBm 3 r L302 YYW 7 3 9ldBm b PL 3 Q381 9300 2 1008 SM 6 5 d
128. AGE 7 PROCEED gt NPU13 ON PAGE 7 PROCEED TO NPU14 ON PAGE 7 v NPU1 CHECK CONNECTOR J400 FOR DRY JOINT IS B PRESENT AT PIN 1 OF Q999 RETURN PCB TO HI TECH CHECK POLARITY OF C907 AND CR998 AFTER REPLACE CR 998 NPU2 CHECK SOLDER ON U900 ALSO CHECK T900 FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NPUS CHECK CR910 C916 FOR POLARITY AFTER REPLACE T900 4 CHECK POLARITY OF C901 AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU5 CHECK C902 AND C903 FOR SHOR CIRCUIT AFTER REMOVE U900 IF THE S C STILL AGAIN SENT TO HI TECH IF IS NOT ON S C REPLACE U900 NPU6 CHECK C908 FOR SHORT CIRCUIT AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU7 CHECK POLARITY OF C906 AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU8 IS 13 MHz CKIN PRESENT ON PIN 17 OF U703 NO YES CHECK YES VOLTAGE ON Q203 AND Q202 IS 2 75V v CHECK CR201 Y201 AND U201 CHECK R714 C701 AND AFTER REPLACE U703 CHECK 212 C214 AND AFTER REPLACE Q202 Q203 NPU9 CHECK TRACK FROM 714 TO PIN 51 9701 NPU10 CHECK SOLDER ON U900 TRY TO RESOLDER U702 OR CONNECT RADIO TO THE EMMIBOX FOR UPGRADE NPU11 CHECK WATCHDOG LINE FROM PIN 31 OF U900 TO R741 PIN 56 0703 AND FROM PIN 31 OF U900 TO PIN 60 OF U701 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NPU12 U701 BEING SENT CE TO U7
129. ALYZER TO INJECT VIA ANTENNA PLUG 30dBm AT 947 4MHz PUT THE RADIO IN TEST MODE AND LOAD SYNTHETIZER WITH 33062 COMMAND START IS RX1 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL gt RXREPAIR 1 CORRECT ON PIN 5 OF U400 Se IS RX2 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL p RXREPAIR2 CORRECT ON C407 Qe IS RX3 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL p RX REPAIR CORRECT ON C408 YES IS RX4 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL p RX REPAIR 4 CORRECT ON C409 YES IS RX4 794 4 MHz VCO NO SIGNAL p VCO REPAIR CORRECT ON C409 YES NO SERVICE AT 102dBm Q NO IS RX5 153 2 CORRECT ON gt RX REPAIR 5 R426 IS RX6 153MHz NO CORRECT ON gt RX REPAIR 6 C421 IS RX7 153MHz NO CORRECT ON PIN 31 OF U201 YES ARE RXI AND NO RXQ CORRECT AT PIN 14 AND 15 OF U501 ARE THE SPI ACTIVITY NO PRESENT AT PIN 4 6 AND 8 OF U501 YES gt RX REPAIR 7 gt RX REPAIR 8 gt RX REPAIR 9 TRY TO REPHASE VIA GATE 22 IF STILL NO FUNCTION CHANGE U501 IF ANY MENTIONED ACTION RESOLVE THE PROBLEM RETURN PCB TO HI TECH CENTRE ee NO SERVICE AT 102dBm RX1 FROMANTENNA PORT CHECK L439 C440 FOR BAD SOLDER AND AFTER REPLACE U400 FROM SWITCH RF CHECK L443 C442 FOR BAD SOLDER AND AFTER REPLACE U400 RX2 CHECK IF FL451 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY
130. BS Distributed Base Station A5 Stream cipher algorithm DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel A8 Ciphering key generating algorithm DET Detach AB Access Burst DFE Decision Feedback Equaliser A bis Interface between BSC and BTS DISC DISConnect ACCH Associated Control CHannel DL Data Link layer ACSE Association Control Service Element Dm Control Channel ISDN terminology applied to mobile AGCH Access Grant CHannel service AOC Advice of charge Dm Signalling channel ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Dp Dialled Pulse Number DRCU Diversity Radio Channel Unit ARQ Automatic Request for retransmission DRX Discontinuous Reception ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit DTAP Direct Transfer Application Part AUC Authentication Centre DTE Data Terminal Equipment AUT H Authentication DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone BA BCCH Allocation signalling type BAIC Barring of All Incoming Calls DTX Discontinuous Transmission BAOC Barring of all Outgoing Calls E erlang BCC Base Transceiver Station BTS Colour Code Eb No Energy per Bit Noise floor BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel EC Echo Canceller BCD Binary Coded Decimal Ec No Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the BCU BTS Control Unit noise spectral density Bm Full rate traffic channel EIR Equipment Identity Register BN Bit Number EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power BS Base Station EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility BSC Base Station Controller EMX Electronic Mobile Exchange
131. Bm 2 If the current is off specification Check the voltage as below B B 2 75 V Q301 L302 PX V i V r 7 3 Q302 Q381 Q300 1 3 V _ TX current is almost always caused by a power control problem usually because the gain of the PA is turned up to high causing excessive current drain L ook at the power control biasing on the gates of the PA Q301 If the control voltage is to high then the radio may transmit at the proper level but could be drawing too much current Compare this control voltage to a good board if itistoo high then there is a slight loss in TX path somewhere or a problem with the power detect control circuitry around U 310 BASE END CALL After the previous tests the Test Bay will end the call from HP8922 by using the END CALL function Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 677670 Spec 1 Trouble Shooting Usually this item will not fail the radio If it does it may be the software problem CONFIRM TIME CAMP To verify that the radio camp to the Cell within 10 seconds Test Procedure 1 Setup HP8922 124 102 dBm Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 687670 TCH 1 TX level 5 2 Power up the radio with the Batterty Input of 6 V olt 3 Verify the radio is camped Using EM M command RQCS Spec 0 10 seconds Trouble Shooting Trouble Shooting refer to Simple Camp BASE CALL LOW CHANNEL To verify that the radio will connect a phone call from Base to M obile Test P
132. Book 0 Quick access menu 61 Customising 2 64 R Reading SM S messages 44 Received messages 45 Receiving a phone call 21 Redialling the last number called 19 Removing your battery 15 Require SIM card PIN 48 Restrict my phone number 37 63 Return call n 45 Ring or vibrate 47 Ringtones sene qu e 48 S Safety timer 2 59 Security code CHANGING Rr erii 50 Select keypad tones 50 Sending SM S messages 45 Service centre _ 46 Set audible call timers 56 Set in call display 56 Set ringer tone 48 Setup fixed dialling 34 SHORE MENU MEA 25 Short message service symbol 10 Short M essage Services SM S 43 Show battery meter 36 63 Show call charges 55 63 Show call timers 56 63 Signal strength symbol 10 SIM card Iri Se 16 PIN code 17 48 PIN2 code
133. C 2 RX9 IF THERE IS NOT ACTIVITY ON SPI BUS TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U501 RX LOCAL OSC 1 CHECK FOR CR431 L433 AND U201 PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U201 RX LOCAL OSC 2 CHECK IQ_ REF FROM PIN 16 OF U501 TO PIN47 OF U201 1 38V IS CORRECT CONTROL FROM MODEM IF THE CONTROL IS CORRECT CHANGE U201 IF THE CONTROL IS NOT CORRECT TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U501 P15 VCO REPAIR START IS 794 4MHz CORRECT AT PIN 4 OF FL453 v VCO REPAHR 1 NO IS 2 5V VCO SUPPLY NO CORRECT gt VCO REPAIR 2 FROMPIN 21 OF U201 YES RETUR PCB TO HI TECH VCO REPAIR 1 CHECK IF FL453 IS NOT PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL453 VCO REPAIR 2 CHECK SUPPLIES FROM Q203 AND Q202 IF THEY ARE INCORRECT TAKES REFERENCE FROM A FULLY FUNCTIONALLY PCB TO DECIPHER WHICH COMPONENTS CAUSES NO OR POOR SUPER FILTER SUPPLY FOR VCO POSSIBLE DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS Q202 Q203 C212 C214 AND U201 Pie POWER BURST OUT OF SPEC FOLLOWING THE SCHEMATIC OF IC U310 CHECK THE PA CONTROL IF IS CORRECT REPLACE Q301 Q302 IF IS NOT CORRECT CHECK THE OTHER PIN TO TRACE THE FAULTY LINE PIN7 PIN4 RF SAT DET GND 7 4 2 1 0310 PACIC
134. CE DETECT 4009608M03 U101 DOUBLER IC 5109920D12 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 49 GSM 8700 6700 Table 9 Replacement Parts List Suffix Description Part Number U201 IC GIF SYN 5109632D64 U300 TIC IC 5109632D34 U310 PAC IC 5109632D08 U400 RF SWITCH 5109572E03 U501 IC 5109632D42 U702 FLASH PROM BLANK IC 5199245A01 U703 BIC IC 5109743E12 U704 SRAM IC 5109509A06 U801 DSP 1616 IC 5199233C05 U802 POTENTIOMETER 5109632D44 U803 CODEC 5109920D06 U804 MUX DEMUX 5109522E10 U805 CLOCK DOUBLER 5109781E47 U900 GCAP IC 5109632D54 U1701 5V REG 5109781E50 VR602 amp 3 DIODE 4813830M25 Y201 CRYSTAL 13MHZ 4809813J02 GSM 8700 Mechanical Table 10 GSM 8700 Replacement Parts List S a a A Motorola Part No Description 1 SUF3839A GSM 8700 Transceiver 2 SAF5170A Antenna w No 3 cap 3 0109189C01 Antenna Assembly 4 3809686N03 Antenna Cap 5 SHN6106A Housing and Hardware front 6 0109124B06 Card Holder 7 0109222802 Vibrator Motor w Gasket Assembly 8 0109429C02 Front Housing Assembly 9 1509431C02 Housing Flip 10 1509432C02 Housing Front 11 2209667M03 Bushing Flip 12 3209317501 Felt Dynamic Speaker 13 3209440C01 Gasket Dust 50 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Table 10 GSM 8700 Replacement Parts List Replacement Parts
135. CONNECTOR 5 7 OF J2 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE 0900 NO OR LOW AUDIO VOLUME START IS SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT PIN 4 OF U803 AVI YES YES IS SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT PIN 21 OF U900 AV3 lt gt AV2 P1 AV1 CHECK IF 0801 AND 0803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 AV2 CHECK IFU802 AND U803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER ALSO CHECK C825 AND R810 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 AN3 CHECK IF U900 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AT PIN 19 20 21 PIN CONNECTOR 22 20 OF J2 AND R802 R810 C804 AND C825 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NO OR LOW AUDIO MICROPHONE START IS AUDIO PIN10 OF gt MICO1 U900 YES IS AUDIO NO CORRECTON 9 Micoz OFU803 ISAUDIO YES DIGITAL NO 04 lt CORRECT ON gt MIC 03 PIN 84 OF U801 MIC 01 CHECK J802 C810 C813 C808 R806 R805 FOR BAD SOLDER MICO2 CHECK VOLTAGE ON PIN 17 18 19 20 OF U803 IS ABOUT 2 4V IF IS NOT CORRECT REPLACE C832 AND C848 IF IS CORRECT CHECK U900 AND AFTER REPLACE IT 03 CHECK IF 0803 AND R838 R842 R841 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AFTER REPLACE U803 MIC 04 CHECK IF U801 AND R845 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AFTER 0
136. CTION RESOLVE THE PROBLEM RETURN PCB TO HI TECH CENTRE ee NO SERVICE AT 102dBm RX1 FROMANTENNA PORT CHECK L439 C440 FOR BAD SOLDER AND AFTER REPLACE U400 FROM SWITCH RF CHECK L443 C442 FOR BAD SOLDER AND AFTER REPLACE U400 RX2 CHECK IF FL451 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL451 RX3 TAKES ON Q418 DC MEASUREMENT LIKE AS FOLLOWING 13VB 7 Q418 C2 7V 0 5 _ IF THECOLLECTOR IS NOT SUPLLY BY RX275 CHECK Q203 AND ASSOCIATE CIRCUITRY AFTER REPLACE Q203 IF THE COLLECTOR IS SUPLLY BY RX275 FROM Q203 CHECK L412 R432 AND AFTER REPLACE Q418 RX4 CHECK FL452 FOR PHICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL452 RX5 TAKES ON Q420 DC MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE LIKE AS FOLLOWING Q 420 C2 7V 0 37E IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLY BY RX275 CHECK L414 AND AFTER REPLACE Q203 1V B IF THE COLLECTOR SUPLLY IS CORRECT REPLACE Q420 RX6 CHECK FL420 IF IS NOT PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL420 RX7 TAKES ON Q421 DC MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE LIKE AS FOLLOWING Q 421 C 1 9V 0 6VE __ 0V B IF THE COLLECTOR SUPPLY IS CORRECT REPLACE Q421 IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLY BY PIN 33 OF U201 CHECK R423 AND AFTER REPLACE U201 START IS RX LOCAL PRESENT ON RX LOCAL OSC 1 PIN 39 OF U201 YES RX LOCAL OS
137. Capacity 1200 mAh Li lon 4 hours The battery will continue to slow charge until fully charged Do not leave the battery connected to the travel charger for more than 24 hours a For maximum NiMH battery charging you should double the charge time A Charge times will increase if you make or receive phone calls while charging Fitting Your Battery Place the battery onto the rear of the phone just below the marked arrow indicators Next slide the battery upwards on the phone s moulded runners until it locks into place Removing Your Battery Switch off your phone before removing the battery Failure to do so may damage your phone memory Press the release catch inwards and simultaneously slide the battery downwards until it reaches the end of it s travel Next pull the battery away from the rear of the phone About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card 15 English Your SIM Card Your credit card sized SIM Subscriber Identity M odule card was supplied by your Cellular Service Provider when you bought your phone You will not be able to make or receive calls if you do not have a SIM card inserted in your phone a Some networks allow you to make emergency calls without a SIM card inserted The SIM card is a Smart that contains your phone number service details and memory for storing Phone Book numbers and messages You can therefore
138. E TO 0601 M P A vourz BF 101 I61M TX 21 TIROF ls Tear m secour E me Soe m 1 o gt 15 1 8 x 4m me s mes av App EM gg i62 SIN INT 100 cmi CID MODEM Em sp pe Sse 002 PscL 428 14 reser 35 pum acl ee 18 RIDOZ ho 0801 H3 LE TN 8603 rona vox am x go sen 051616530 E y Ec d 5 183 da 1 02 P0 EB Basse 3 x wa ae d Bu S b ms sp P s gt ad NN ie Akrom ERI n PCS PATH d His no 4 3 d GIFSIN gt BIC gt HUDEN sa 14 24 7 E vest 5 22 Ls sc bos ora rose RE a 5 D12 P8i 2 2 8288 a T Ex 3 mets i KS ari grs POK RIS ork jg AR 2 Zhen vo eed ve PUER ES gig 30g psf m L M uns EG E rooms ear E ie 23 E 51 1500 he 5 EE T 38 pe ge PEER REE EB gt 0604 e ler Jar ps e 31 Bx Br o Be 185 f r Bw Bs 40 BD 142 e fam e 5 Jr Ja e f E P DE eint ET amp B 3 3K 7 I 25 wie Yx EL gt Zid Ed 18K L F s E m PLACE NEAR BUTTPLUG 8 E g 2 1509 Me AR E BATTERY CONTACTS Sn b 10K m BATT_GND R826 i Ei d E 21 i aur 596 18901 SGOT 1278
139. EPHONE PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 68P09304A 68 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE CONTENTS LIST Cellular Subscriber Group SECTION 1 GENERAL PAGE NUMBER FOREWORD MOTOROLA SERVICE POLICY GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION EXPRESS EXCHANGE PROGRAM INTRODUCTION EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXCHANGE PROCEDURE SECTION 2 DESCRIPTION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION G S M SYSTEM OVERVIEW TELEPHONE DESCRIPTION FEATURE LIST SECTION 3 LABELLING amp SIM CARDS TRANSCEIVER LABELLING INTRODUCTION TITLE EXPLANATIONS SIM CARDS INTRODUCTION SIM CARD INSERTION REMOVAL SECURITY INFORMATION SECTION 4 MANUAL TEST MODE amp VERIFICATION MANUAL TEST MODE INTRODUCTION TEST SIM INSERTION REMOVAL ACCESSING THE MANUAL TEST Customer Services Publishing AGenl xi xi xii Www 11 11 11 13 13 13 13 15 15 15 15 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom 1 6 96 vi INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE SECTION 4 MANUAL TEST MODE amp VERIFICATION cont VERIFICATION INTRODUCTION EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION TESTING PROCEDURE SECTION 5 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING INTRODUCTION TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR TESTING AFTER REPAIR TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR CHART SECTION 6 PERSONALITY TRANSFER PERSONAL
140. ER displayed After a short period of time if the data transfer has been completed correctly This method allows the personality selected features and Clone will re appear in the recipient unit s stored phone numbers of a defective radio to be transferred display into a repaired radio Data is transferred from the donor unit into the recipient unit using a Transfer card Part No 10 The second data block must now be transferred 5104025D01 The instruction steps should be followed in Repeat steps to 9 but enter 022 to program order the second data block into the Transfer card Step 1 Insert the Transfer card into the slot located on Step 11 The third data block must now be transferred the back of the donor unit Turn the donor unit Repeat steps to 9 but enter 025 to program on the display should show Clone the third data block into the Transfer card Step 2 The donor unit is now in the cloning mode and Step 12 When the third block of data has been ready to transfer the first block of data transferred successfully remove the Transfer card and check the repaired radio functions Step 3 Enter 021 via the unit s keypad This command correctly See page 15 for further information will cause the first block of information to be uploaded into the Transfer card Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom FPers6 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights
141. Fixed Dial List Setup Fixed Dialling One Touch Gunma Dial Setting i i x M Meer To Fixed Dial List Menu Navigation C Items shown in are available only when Extended Menus are switched on Availability depends on the type of SIM card The Accessory Setup option is available only when a car kit is fitted X The features and the positions of the features in the Quick Access menu can be changed Quick Access Menu OP Find Name BB Add to sim Call Voicemail Battery Meter BB Lock Now X Adjust Ring Read Messages Vibrate On Off J Divert on off Options Menu Call Related Features Show Battery Meter L Restrict My Phone Number Call Diverting Talk and Fax Call Waiting Call Barring Messages 2 Call Voicemail Received Messages Outgoing Messages Message Editor Cell Broadcast Message Settings Adjust Ring Volume Ring Or Vibrate Set Ringer Tone Phone Lock L Require SIM Card PIN a Change SIM PIN2 Code New Security Code Extended Menus Selection n Available Networks Preferred Networks Find New Network 27 Show Call Charges Show Call Timers Set Audible Call Timers Set In Call Display Call Charge Settings Li Accessory Setup fl Mute Car Radio 2 Automatic Answer Automatic Handsfree Safety Auxiliary Alert Special Keys Red
142. HECK To verify that the radio is properly communicating with the SIM Card Test Procedure 1 Power up the radio with the Battery input of 7 V olt 2 Wait for the message of Insert Card 3 Insert the SIM Card it should go to the search mode Spec 10 Trouble Shooting any SIM Card Chk are caused by the process the operator not inserting the SIM Card all the way in to the radio 1 Check the SIM Card Block J 1601 for unsolder or bent pins 2 Check the present switch 1602 Open when press Normally Short 0 ohm Toggletheswitch pin5 7 ofU7 03willbe from OV to 2 75V Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 287679 3 Check U 703 for US SS or CD 0703 4 Inspect SIM block for damaged or unsolder connections 5 If the display reads INSERT CARD then check the present detect switch 51602 W hen the card is inserted the switch opens placing a high on the SIM PD line 2 75V Main Board Problem Check SIM VCC at 0703 7 for 4 8 Volt Card must be inserted Check SIM CLK at U703 9 for 3 25 M hz Check SIM atU703 10 11 this lineis used to both transmit and receive data between the BIC and the card at the time the card is inserted or when the radio is powered up w the card inserted Check SIM RST thislinein high when the SIM CARD is inserted and is communicating properly with the radio Trace all of these sigals from the BIC U703 to the J 2 connector Key Board Problem
143. Hz TX SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX5 ON BASE OF Q300 NO IS108MHz IF SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX6 ON PIN 4 OF U300 NO TXREPAHR 7 TX1 CHECKC442 L433 AND AFTER REPLACE U400 TX2 CHECK C439 L302 303 304 C328 AND C329 FOR PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER YES TXREPAIR 5 YES TXREPAIR6 TX3 CHECK IF B IS PRESENT ON COLLECTOR OF Q302 AND PIN 2 3 OF Q301 IF IS CORRECT TRACE THE TX SIGNAL TROUGH THE PATH FROM Q302 TO Q301 TO DECIPHER WICH IS THE FAILURE COMPONENT TX4 TAKES DC VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT AS FOLLOWING B C 81 E0 3V B 0 5V IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLIED BY B CHANGE L380 IF B IS CORRECT REPLACE 0381 WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL 1 2V B Q300 C2 7V 0 6V E IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPLLIED BY 2 7V CHECK C 301 302 325 IF 2 7V ON COLLECTOR IS OK CHECK C 304 314 381 R352 AND AFTER REPLACE Q300 TX6 PIN7 PINS PIMIF eo DM CS GND GND 108MHz GND R275 j Mr 7 6 5 4 3 2 U 300 TIC 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 CP 0 PIN11 2 PIN13 PIN14 RX OUT R475 R475 R275 GND VCO 2 1V 902 4MHz CHECK PRESENCE OF SIGAL FOLLOWING THE SCHEMATIC AS ABOVE DECIPHER WICH IS THE FAULTY LINE IF EVERITHINGS ARE CORRECT REPLACE U300 TXZ IS R475 s sr NO PRE
144. ITY TRANSFER INTRODUCTION NORMAL TRANSFER MASTER TRANSFER MASTER SIM CARD CREATION SECTION 7 DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS INTRODUCTION RECOMMENDED TOOLS DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE EXPLODED DIAGRAM AND PART NUMBERS SECTION 8 ACCESSORIES RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACKS INTRODUCTION RECHARGING EXPERT PERFORMANCE BATTERIES AND CHARGERS BUILT IN E P BATTERY FAST CHARGER 68P09304A 68 1 6 96 PAGE NUMBER 17 17 17 18 19 19 19 19 20 23 23 23 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 35 37 37 37 38 38 SSECTION 8 ACCESSORIES cont NICAD BATTERY PACKS BATTERY PACKS LITHIUM ION BATTERY PACKS TRAVEL BATTERY CHARGER CIGARETTE LIGHTER ADAPTOR CHARGER INTELLICHARGE E P BATTERY CHARGER CAR KITS INTRODUCTION STANDARD DHFA MICRO CAR KITS HANDSFREE CAR KIT INSTALLATION SECTION 9 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY OF GSM TERMS SECTION 10 NOTES FEED BACK FORM NOTES AGen1 68 09304 68 1 6 96 CONTENTS PAGE NUMBER 39 41 43 45 47 49 53 53 53 53 53 53 55 57 59 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 68P09304A 68 Oacent 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE MODULE LEVEL REPAIR MANUAL Cellular Subscriber Group Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom 1 Motorola Ltd 1996
145. If you have enabled the Detailed Diverting If Busy option in the Options M enu the caller will be diverted to the forwarding number otherwise the caller will hear the busy tone or Press and hold the C key This will reject the incoming call No call divert option will be offered If your phone rings and you do not answer it the message Unanswered Call will be displayed to show you that a call attempt was received Ending a Phone Call To end a phone call press O or close the flip Making and Receiving Phone Calls English 22 Making and Receiving Phone Calls large number of your phone s options are accessed by using menus which use a common approach for selection change and cancellation Please read this section carefully before attempting to access a menu option When you understand the common approach to menu navigation and how the menus are shown on the page you will be able to access and change options with ease The menus described here can only be accessed when the phone is the standby mode Menu operation is not possible when you are making or answering a phone call Entering the Menus Three different keys are used to access each of the three menus Q accesses the Phone Book menu M accesses the Options menu E accesses the Quick Access menu Once entered the menususetheM lt gt and C keys in a common manner to access and change individual options Leaving the Menus To leave any
146. Kit 8000 0400 Series 64627 SLN9934 SYN4932 iProfessional Hands free Car Kit Professional DSP Hands free Available soon User install Hands free Car Kit Available soon Carry Accessories fExecutiv Holster Leather 164613 SLN8500 7 PES e iExecutiv Holster Leather Sports Holster Synthetic SYN6198 SYN6457 8700 PROCEDURE LVL3 ed 1 1 DOES PCB NO POWER UP CORRECTLY PROCEED TO WILL NOT POWERS amp STAY ON ON PAGE 3 YES DOES PCB DRAWS CURRENT WHEN PROCEED TO DRAWS CURRENT WHEN IS OFF ON PAGE 19 IS OFF DOES PCB POWER DOWN WHEN TWISTED PROCEED TO POWER OFF WHEN TWISTED ON PAGE 8 DOES WAKE UP DISPLAY PROCEED TO NO OR LOW DISPLAY ON PAGE CORRECT 18 DNE YES PROCEED TO PHONE FAILURE SEE SUPPLIER ON FAILURE SEE PAGE 19 SUPPLIER DOES PCB GO INTO SERVICE AT 102dBm PROCEED TO NO SERVICE AT 102dBm ON PAGE 12 INITIATE CALL THE ANALYZER NO TERMINATE THE CALL CALL MOBILE FROM ANALYZER PROCEED TO WILL NOT INITIATE CALL ON PAGE 9 IS RING AUDIO TONE AUDIBILE PROCEED TO NO OR LOW RING TONE ON PAGE 1 YES ANSWER CALL IS THE TX FREQ OR PHASE ERROR WITHIN SPEC PROCEED TO FREQ ERR OR PHASE ERROR OUT
147. LING 1 INTRODUCTION Each Motorola GSM transceiver will be labelled with various number configurations The following information shows and explains the common labelling titles 2 TITLE EXPLANATIONS 21 MSN The Mechanical Serial Number MSN is an individual number uniquely identifying the unit The MSN will remain the same throughout the units life even if the main board is replaced Because the MSN is unique to the whole phone it is often used for logging and tracking purposes by Motorola National Service Centres on EPPRS The MSN is divided into the sections shown in Figurel MSN 10 digits gt 3 digits ldigit 2 digits 4 digits MC OC DC SNR Model Origin Date Serial Code Code Code Number Figure 1 MSN Configuration 2 2 CEPT GSM This is the International Mobile Station Equipment Identity IMEI number The IMEI is held in the logic circuitry CLbI3 Motorola Ltd 1996 Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom If the main board is replaced then the units IMEI will change therefore the units labelling should be updated with the new IMEI An IMEI uniquely identifies a mobile station equipment to the system and is divided into the sections shown in Figure 2 IMEI 15 digits z 6 digits 2 digits 6 digits 1 digit TAC FAC SNR
148. LLULAR TELEPHONE PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 68P09304A68 DTest4 1 12 96 International 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE MANUAL TEST MODE amp VERIFICATION VERIFICATION SMA A CONNECTOR ANTENNA G S M COMPATIBLE TEST ADAPTOR COMMUNICATIONS ANALYSER 0109354C01 J V Ce e RF IN OUT OG ED BGO a em em UNIT TO pam BE TESTED Figure 1 Testing Configuration VERIFICATION 2 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION 1 INTRODUCTION Initially insert the test SIM card into the slot at the rear of the personal cellular telephone If required further information To test an International 8700 cellular telephone to verify whether or not the unit is functioning correctly the following equipment will be required G S M compatible communications analyser Test adaptor Part No 0109354C01 and appropriate cable connectors Test SIM card Part No 8102430701 Charged battery pack DTest4 Customer Services Publishing on SIM card insertion is available on page 13 Attach the antenna adaptor to the antenna connector of
149. LULAR TELEPHONE TROUBLESHOOTING ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING 1 INTRODUCTION Assembly replacement level troubleshooting and repair of an International 8700 personal telephone is limited to isolation and replacement of the following main items only Antenna Battery Logic RF Assembly Keypad Display Board Front Rear Housings Keypad Membrane Earpiece Speaker Microphone Transducer Alert Transducer It is recommended that known good replacement parts and assemblies be available to be used for troubleshooting by substitution and for replacement of parts assemblies found to be defective If at any time the unit is disassembled whether repaired or not itis recommended that a simple test of making a call and checking signal strength and transmit and receive audio quality is carried out Appropriate action should then be taken on the outcome of the test 2 TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR The troubleshooting information in Table 1 shows some typical malfunction symptoms and the corresponding verification and repair procedures Refer to the disassembly instructions located in the disassembly section of this manual for instructions on removing and replacing parts assemblies from the personal telephone If the Logic RF assembly is replaced a personality transfer will be necessary see page 21 for more information NOTE Defective Logic RF assemblies must be repla
150. M easurements The T est Bay will store these data in Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 437670 Wait for 1 second then power off the radio then on again Read PA AFC Battery 1 0 abd AGC Verify that the return value match the store value Trouble Shooting If it fail this test that means the data not be stored in to the EEPROM or the verifying is wrong Re phase the radio or Check for US SS EEPROM CD EEPROM INIT TIME CAMP SEC To verify that the radio will camp on a Broadcast Channel within a specific time limit The Test Bay set HP8922 to channel 124 85 dBm Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 447670 Power up the radio with the butt plug of 7 V olt Wait for 10 seconds to check radio is camped to the cell by Uniphase EMMI Camp Camp Status Test Procedure 1 Set H P8922 to channel 124 85 dBm 2 Power up the radio with the B attery Input of 6 V olt 3 Wait for the radio to camp to the cell It will display 001 01 _ Trouble Shooting 1 If the radio did not camped Preset the H P8922 turn the radio off and on to check it again 2 Check the wave form as shown The radio search 124 channel by changing the RX VCO voltage Ch 124 2 8 3 V ch 001 2 2 6 V OSC SCOPE If you don t see the above wave form Check US U201 R295 WP C256 C209 C262 CD U201 If the wave form looks
151. MMediate assignment message International Mobile Subscriber Identity Intelligent Network International Switching Center Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN User Part Interworking Function ciphering Key Individual subscriber authentication key Location Area Code Location Area Identification Identity Link Access Procedure balanced channel Link Access Procedure mobile D channel Traffic channel with capacity lower than Bm Linear Predictive Code 59 gt 9 o GSM 8700 6700 LR MA MAH MAI MAIO MAP MCC MCI MD ME MF MLSE MM MMI MNC MO MO PP MoU MRN MS MSC MSCM MSIN MSISDN MSRN MT MTP 60 Location Register Mobile Allocation Mobile Access Hunting Mobile Allocation Index Mobile Allocation Index Offset Mobile Application Part Mobile Country Code Malicious Call Identification Mediation Device Mobile Equipment Multi Frequency tone signalling type Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimator Mobility Management Man Machine Interface Mobile Network Code Mobile Originated Mobile Originated Point to Point messages Memorandum of Understanding Mobile Roaming Number Mobile Station Mobile Services Switching Center Mobile Station Class Mark Mobile Station Identification Number Mobile Station international ISDN number Mobile Station Roaming Number Mobile Term
152. N PIN 17 OF U703 YES NO CHECK YES VOLTAGE ON Q203 AND Q202 IS 2 75V P CHECK R714 C701 AND AFTER REPLACE U703 CHECK C212 C214 AND AFTER REPLACE Q202 Q203 y CHECK CR201 Y201 AND U201 NPU9 CHECK TRACK FROM R714 TO PIN 51 0701 NPU10 CHECK SOLDER ON U900 TRY TO RESOLDER U702 OR CONNECT RADIO TO THE EMMIBOX FOR UPGRADE NPU11 CHECK WATCHDOG LINE FROM PIN 31 OF 0900 TO R741 PIN 56 OF 0703 AND FROM PIN 31 OF U900 TO PIN 60 OF U701 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NPU12 U701 BEING SENT CE TO U704 CONTROL CE LINE FROM PIN 100 OF U701 TO PIN 26 OF U702 IF IS CORRECT REPLACE U702 NPU13 U701 BEING SENT CE FROM PIN 102 TO PIN 40 OF U704 IF IS CORRECT REPLACE 0704 NPU14 0701 BEING SENT CE FROM PIN 114 TO PIN 27 0705 TRY TO CONNECT RADIO TO THE EMMIBOX FOR UPGRADE THE RADIO WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL IMPULSIVE CONTINUOS 11062 1200 110624 1215 40 310 START IS 902 4MHz TX SIGNAL CORRECT AT TXREPAIR 1 TX1 PIN 8 OF U400 IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL CORRECTAT TX2 ON L302 NO IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX gt TX REPAIR 3 BASE OF Q302 NO IS 902 4MHz TX SIGNAL CORRECT AT gt TXREPAIR 4 TX4 ON BASE OF Q381 NO WILL NOT INITIATE CALL 1 IS 902 4M
153. ND 0803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 AV2 CHECK IFU802 AND U803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER ALSO CHECK C825 AND R810 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 AN3 CHECK IF U900 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AT PIN 19 20 21 PIN CONNECTOR 22 20 OF J2 AND R802 R810 C804 AND C825 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NO OR LOW AUDIO MICROPHONE START IS AUDIO PIN10 OF gt MICO1 U900 YES IS AUDIO NO CORRECTON 9 Micoz OFU803 ISAUDIO YES DIGITAL NO 04 lt CORRECT ON gt MIC 03 PIN 84 OF U801 MIC 01 CHECK J802 C810 C813 C808 R806 R805 FOR BAD SOLDER MICO2 CHECK VOLTAGE ON PIN 17 18 19 20 OF U803 IS ABOUT 2 4V IF IS NOT CORRECT REPLACE C832 AND C848 IF IS CORRECT CHECK U900 AND AFTER REPLACE IT 03 CHECK IF 0803 AND R838 R842 R841 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AFTER REPLACE U803 MIC 04 CHECK IF U801 AND R845 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AFTER 0801 o DOES R275 NO PROCEED CORRECT AT PIN26Or gt TONPUS U900 9 YES NO DOES R475 PROCEED CORRECT AT PIN 41 OF d 0900 ON PAGES YES IS 13MHz NO PROCEED PRESENT AT PINS OF gt TONPUB
154. NG LEVEL March 10 1997 Rev 1 0 2 Points Note 2 1 Backhousing Be sure that the pad against vibration from T900 is mounted 2 2 Fronthousing Be sure that the GND pads are in the right position especially close to the antenna Sometimes they are not in right position and make shortages to the antenna switch No TX Sometimes the vibra is not in the right position it makes some noise to the housing If the housing got twisted sometimes the loudspeaker makes bad noise Be sure that the alert has the right polarisation 2 3 Main PCB The first revision of 8700 were built with two types of displays C04 C05 Both types have there own programming in the EE prom of the main board If you want to use another type of display you have to send the main PCB to the responsible national HUB support or to the HTC for reprogramming the EE Prom Follow DB034 to do the GCAP Fix only up to and incl print rev r09 Four changes on main PCB 6700 8700 and two changes on the display board 6700 only up to and incl print rev r09 additional you have to remove C905 up to and incl print rev R13 If you remove or replace a shield be sure that the shield is mounted in the right direction High Tech Centre Flensburg European Cellular Subscriber Division Author Michael Hansen Technical Support 6700 8700 TRAINING LEVEL March 10 1997 Rev 1 0 3 Failure
155. NPU10 CHECK SOLDER ON U900 TRY TO RESOLDER U702 OR CONNECT RADIO TO THE EMMIBOX FOR UPGRADE NPU11 CHECK WATCHDOG LINE FROM PIN 31 OF 0900 TO R741 PIN 56 OF 0703 AND FROM PIN 31 OF U900 TO PIN 60 OF U701 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 NPU12 U701 BEING SENT CE TO U704 CONTROL CE LINE FROM PIN 100 OF U701 TO PIN 26 OF U702 IF IS CORRECT REPLACE U702 NPU13 U701 BEING SENT CE FROM PIN 102 TO PIN 40 OF U704 IF IS CORRECT REPLACE 0704 NPU14 0701 BEING SENT CE FROM PIN 114 TO PIN 27 0705 TRY TO CONNECT RADIO TO THE EMMIBOX FOR UPGRADE THE RADIO WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL IMPULSIVE CONTINUOS 11062 1200 110624 1215 40 310 START IS 902 4MHz TX SIGNAL CORRECT AT TXREPAIR 1 TX1 PIN 8 OF U400 IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL CORRECTAT TX2 ON L302 NO IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX gt TX REPAIR 3 BASE OF Q302 NO IS 902 4MHz TX SIGNAL CORRECT AT gt TXREPAIR 4 TX4 ON BASE OF Q381 NO WILL NOT INITIATE CALL 1 IS 902 4MHz TX SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX5 ON BASE OF Q300 NO IS108MHz IF SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX6 ON PIN 4 OF U300 NO TXREPAHR 7 TX1 CHECKC442 L433 AND AFTER REPLACE U400 TX2 CHECK C439 L302 303 304 C328 AND C329 FOR PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER YES TXREPAIR 5
156. NTROL FROM MODEM IF THE CONTROL IS CORRECT CHANGE U201 IF THE CONTROL IS NOT CORRECT TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U501 P15 VCO REPAIR START IS 794 4MHz CORRECT AT PIN 4 OF FL453 v VCO REPAHR 1 NO IS 2 5V VCO SUPPLY NO CORRECT gt VCO REPAIR 2 FROMPIN 21 OF U201 YES RETUR PCB TO HI TECH VCO REPAIR 1 CHECK IF FL453 IS NOT PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL453 VCO REPAIR 2 CHECK SUPPLIES FROM Q203 AND Q202 IF THEY ARE INCORRECT TAKES REFERENCE FROM A FULLY FUNCTIONALLY PCB TO DECIPHER WHICH COMPONENTS CAUSES NO OR POOR SUPER FILTER SUPPLY FOR VCO POSSIBLE DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS Q202 Q203 C212 C214 AND U201 Pie POWER BURST OUT OF SPEC FOLLOWING THE SCHEMATIC OF IC U310 CHECK THE PA CONTROL IF IS CORRECT REPLACE Q301 Q302 IF IS NOT CORRECT CHECK THE OTHER PIN TO TRACE THE FAULTY LINE PIN7 PIN4 RF SAT DET GND 7 4 2 1 0310 PACIC 8 9 10 11 12 14 PIN9 PIN10 PIN11 PIN12 PIN14 AOC TX KEY DET SW SAT EN IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEMS ARE PRESENT RETURN PCB TO HI TECH INCORRECT LOW BATTERY INDICATION NO ORLOW DISPLAY START YES CHECK FOR BAD IS od 01 SOLDER ON Q102 6V3 AFTER REPLACE IT NO CHECK L500 ON
157. OK decrease the amplitude from 85 dB to 102 dBm clowly If the radio still campled It is NT If the radio loose camped on 102 dB m Check the receive path If you see the wave form Check U500 RXI RXQ pin 14 15 with Osc Scope for Osc Scop If the RXI RXQ as the above CD 500 Modem CAMP CURRENT To check the current of the radio after it camped to the cell Test Procedure Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 457670 Do the same setup test as the previous test read the current on the power supply The current drain of the radio should be within spec Spec 40 190mA Trouble Shooting Do the same test as above wait about 8 seconds after camp 001 01 display for the back lites off Read the current on the power supply typical current is 40 50 mA 1 If the current is less than 40 mA rare Do the phone call test to check whether it can generate a call Use Uniphase to check AFC and AGC phasing 2 If the current greater than 190 mA after the back lites are off Check whether itis generating a TX pulse you can do it by Set the HP8922 on Cell Status TX channel to 62 TX level 10 Camp the radio Set your spectrum analyzer frequency to 902 4 span 50 M hz sweep 150 mS Monitor the antena port of the radio to check whether there is a T X pulse If there is CD U702 software 3 This fail item is caused by various things check for unsolder and solder shorted
158. OT VIA EMMIBOX OR RADIO AGAIN IF STILL CORRECT REPLACE MASTER CARD E NOT CORRECT CHECK Q203 IF IS CORRECT STILL NOT CORRECT FOR 26 MHz FROM REPLACE CERN 6 OF U805 IF IS OK REPLACE U801 IF IS NOT OK REPLACE 0805 NO CHARGER REPLACE U900 YES TEST CONDICTION RADIO SUPPLY FROM EXT B AND IN TEST MODE CHECK 2 75V NO THERMISTOR gt CHECK Q604 ON PIN12 OF DAMAGE J400 YES v CHECK 8V ON PIN4 OF Q601 NO YES v ENTER CHECK 0V ON 500255 AND PIN17 OF CHECK FOR 0V U900 ON PIN 4 OF Q601 NO NO v v NO TRY TO REFLEX CHECK 2 75V RADIO VIA MASTER 4 ON PIN17 OF CARD AND AFTER 1900 REPLACE 0703 BIC YES YES CHECK FOR 8V ON PIN5 6 7 8 gt OF Q601 IF IS NOT CORRECT REPLACE Q601 REPLACE U900 v NO OR LOW RING TONE START IS THE SIGNAL NO CORRECT AT PIN4 OF PHI U803 YES IS THE SIGNAL RT3 44 CORRECT AT gt RT 2 PIN 4 OF 0900 RT1 CHECK IF U801 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U801 RT2 CHECK IF U802 AND U803 ARE POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER ALSO CHECK 825 817 AND R803 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U803 RT3 CHECK IF 0900 IS POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER AT PIN 4 5 6 7 CHECK ALSO PIN
159. PA DAC 1 PA DAC 2 PA DAC 3 PA DAC 4 DAC 5 PA DAC 6 DAC 7 PA DAC 8 PA DAC 9 After Phased FS SCS gt 0 SMT PRT DET HIGH DET LOW PA DAC 0 PA DAC 1 PA DAC 2 PA DAC 3 PA DAC 4 DAC 5 PA DAC 6 DAC 7 PA DAC 8 PA DAC 9 Tone Continue tone 16 477 432 1530 106 10 20 66 40 27 187 187 187 187 140 145 120 66 57 48 38 30 PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC MUL 0 24 25 49 75 99 100 124 PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC PA DAC MUL 0 24 25 49 75 99 100 124 M isc for trouble shooting Radio don t camp even it pass tune It has to be phased or do the AFC and AGC Phasing by the Uniphase then it camp Oct 1 1996 Cheung 104 11 12 13 14 128 128 83 11 12 14 15 140 128 85 52 128 128 154619 Written Tony 767670 After tune the PA table is not set right yet After tune you can do the AFC and by Uniphase then you can make a call Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung GSM6700 amp 8700 Models Matrix xls Page 1 K06 PROGRAMS SHOP ORDERS Modem GCAP Models GSM8700 RADIO BOARD S ORDER HW SW PRE FIA DESCRITION Topside prog T S stencil Bottomside prog B S Stencil SWF3052A SLF6830C K06 ITALY 0109033A43 LC9452 0109032A94 LC9679 74 05 36 SWF2266B SLF6830C K06 NON ITALY 06 0109033A43 LC9452 0109032A94 LC9679 74 05 36 SWF3169B SLF7360C E56 29 14 368
160. Positive Flatness The amplitude fluxuate higher than 1 dBm Failed for Negative Flatness The amplitude fluxuate lower than 1 dBm When the radio transmitting the TX burst and the A OC line from the M odem should be in the same time when the pulse from the AOL line of the M odem earlier or later than the TX Burst the radio will be failed for this test During a phone call you can see the following wave form On HP8922 Cell Status Pwr Ramp Ramp Rise R amp False Oct 1 1996 Cheung Written Tony Rise Ramp Fale Ramp Time Mask If the burst cross the time mask as shown below this radio will be failed for Time M ask test x C 3 The Test will do the following Set up the 8922 Cell Status BCH 1 ampl 102 dBm 124 level 5 High CH 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 V 2 Verify the radio is camped 3 Initiate call 4 Decrease the power supply to 5 6 V 5 Step up the HP 8922 from 102 dBm to 85 dBm 6 Verify the The burst should be within the time mask on HP8922 Cell Status gt Pwr Ramp Rise Ramp False Ramp Spec 1 Trouble Shooting Check AOC line U310 8 If the resistor R357 amp L501 is Unsolder If the value of R 357 is higher from 85K to 150 K will fix the problem TX CURRENT HIGH CHANNEL TheTest Base will do the following Power up the radio from the Battery Input of 6V olt 1 Setup HP8922 1 RF level
161. Prediction SMS REQuest SMSCB Radio Frequency CHannel SND Reduced TDMA Frame Number SP Radio Link Protocol SRES Remote Operations Service Element a CCITT specification SS for O amp M Remote Transcoder Unit SS Received signal level STP Received signal quality SYSGEN 68P09392A89 Set Asynchronous Balance Model Slow Associated Control CHannel Service Access Point Indicator Identifier Synchronization Burst Service Center Signalling Connection Control Part Synchronization CHannel Service Control Point an intelligent network entity Stand alone Dedicated Control CHannel Specification Description Language Slow Frequency Hopping Subscriber Identity Module Short Message Service Short Message Service Call Broadcast SeND Signalling Point Signed RESponse authentication Supplementary Service System Simulator Signalling Transfer Point SYStem GENeration 61 GSM 8700 6700 TCH TCH F TCH FS TCH HS TCP TDMA TE TMN TMSI TN TRX TTY TS TUP gt Fes o 2 o 62 Terminal Adaptor Timing Advance Transaction Capabilities Application Part Traffic CHannel A full rate A full rate speech TCH A half rate speech TCH Transmission Control Protocol Time Division Multiple Access Terminal Equipment Telecommunications Management Network Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity Timeslot Number Trans
162. READ SERIAL The radio factory data is being verified The information about the previous test Trouble Shooting Check 05 55 on 0701 Re tune may be operator error Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 144679 PROGRAM SERIAL To store the Factory Serial into EEPROM Store the Scanned Barcode into EEPROM Trouble Shooting Check for Solder short and U nsolder U 701 0703 and U 705 OFF DRAIN To check the current drain of the radio without turning it on Test Procedure Connect the radio with power supply 3 to the battery input Place the DMM in series w the power supply J400 pin 11 GND pin 13 7V Read the current drain from the DM Spec 0 0 6 mA Trouble Shooting 1 Check for Solder short on the board 2 Isolate B att from B by removing 0999 If off drain proble still exits then trace Batt to all components Battery Charger Check voltage on the batter charger circuitry with the board off 3 If the Off Drain problem goes away when Q999 is removed then the problem is with B With the board off check the voltage on all power supplies from U 900 GCA P They all should be close to OV Also check the GIFSY N regulator Q202 Q203 4 Check for all voltage Logic 5 V Logic 2 75 V Ref 4 75 V Ref 2 75 V and Vref 5 Isolate the RF Supplies to check where the Off Drain Caused 6 If all the power supplies look good then try to isolate B from parts of the board Ohm out to gro
163. Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 21 3 MASTER TRANSFER This method of transfer should only be followed when the defective unit will not power up or complete a Normal Transfer As mentioned earlier there are different variations OEM looks of the Motorola International 8700 cellular telephones each model requiring the main board to be configured differently for correct operation When carrying out a Master Transfer it is not possible to transfer the customers selected features or stored phone numbers only the model personality can be programmed into the repaired unit Each different version of the International 8700 cellular telephone requires its own Master Transfer card which contains essential set up Information Master SIM cards may be ordered pre programmed or created from a Normal Transfer card The instruction steps should be followed in order INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE page 17 for details At no point should either 021 022 or 025 be entered while a Master Transfer card is in the radio If either of the stated commands are entered the master information on the card will be erased To prevent the above happening the card can be locked by entering 06 via the unit s keypad with the card inserted Unlock the card by entering 07 Note If during either transfer process a problem arises an error message will be displayed If the Transfer card is removed before the data transfer is c
164. Resolder any dry joints or replace the battery contact assembly if any of the contacts are broken Check the PCB external connector J400 socket or around pin 2 for dry joints to the PCB or broken contacts Check for 6 5Vdc at pin 40 U900 both with battery and external power If no B with battery check Q999 If no with external power check CR998 If replacing the above components does not eliminate the fault return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 2 NPU Repair Procedure 1 17 97 No regulated 2 75V dc voltage present at U900 pins 22 and 28 The components that will most likely affect the regulated 2 75V supply are the B supply and U900 Check that B related components are not physically damaged have no dry joints and are positioned correctly If none of the above mentioned problems are apparent you can either take measure ments on the defective PCB to decipher which component s you feel should be replaced or replace the following components in the order shown 1st Replace T900 2nd Replace U900 Check the PCB after each component change to verify fault elimination If replacing the above components does not eliminate the fault return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 68P09392A89 39 55 9g 25 9 5 22 c 7 GSM 8700 6700 3 NPU Repair Procedure No 13MHz reference clock signal at pin 57 of 7201 The components that
165. Rx Operating Voltage 5 7 to 8 5 dc Transmit Current 200 mA average 1 0 A peak Stand by Current Average 10mA DRX 2 Dimensions 131 mm L x 59 mm W x 24 mm D 5 2 x 2 3 x 0 9 Size Volume 165 cubic cm 10 cubic in w LP4 battery Weight Approximately 1540 Includes Super Slim Lilon battery pack and antenna Temperature Range 20 to 55 Table 2 Transmitter Function Specification HF Power Output 33 dBm 2dBm Output Impedance 50 ohms nominal 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 iii GSM 8700 6700 Table 2 Transmitter Function Specification Spurious Emissions 36 dBm up to 1 GHz lt 30 dBm gt 1 GHz Table 3 Receiver Function Specification RF Level 102 dBm RX bit error rate 100 k bits lt 2 Channel Hop Time 500 microseconds Time to Camp Approximately 10 seconds Table 4 Speech Coding Function Specification Speech Coding Type Regular Pulse Excitation Linear Predictive Coding with Long Term Prediction RPE LPC with LTP Bit Rate 13 0 k bps Frame Duration 20 ms Block Length 260 bits Classes Class 1 bits 182 bits Class 2 bits 78 bits Bit Rate with FEC Encoding 22 8 k bps Specifications subject fo change without notice 68P09392A89
166. S OFF WHEN TWISTED CHECK Y201 CR201 U201 U702 U704 FOR POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER WILL NOT POWERS DOWN CHECK IF THERE ISN T ANY SHORT ON WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS CHECK ALSO CONNECTION FROM PIN 25 OF J2 TO R990 OR BAD SOLDER ON U900 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 FREQUENCY ERROR OUT OF SPEC CHECK Y201 AND CR 201 FOR PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER PHASE ERROR OUT OF SPEC START ARE TXI amp TXQ NO CHECK U501 FOR CORRECT AT PHISICALLY DAMAGE PIN 61 63 OF OR BAD SOLDER U201 AFTER REPLACE IT v YES CHECK FOR RIGTH FREQUENCY 216MHz ON C228 AND 108MHz AT PIN 4 OF U201 TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U201 ISB PRESENT AT PIN1 OF RETURN PCB 999 CHECK POLARITY OF C907 AND CR998 AFTER REPLACE CR 998 NPU3 CHECK CR910 C916 FOR POLARITY AFTER REPLACE T900 NPU4 CHECK POLARITY OF C901 AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU6 CHECK C908 FOR SHORT CIRCUIT AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU7 CHECK POLARITY OF C906 AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU8 IS 13 MHz CKIN PRESENT ON PIN 17 OF U703 YES NO CHECK YES VOLTAGE ON Q203 AND Q202 IS 2 75V P CHECK R714 C701 AND AFTER REPLACE U703 CHECK C212 C214 AND AFTER REPLACE Q202 Q203 y CHECK CR201 Y201 AND U201 NPU9 CHECK TRACK FROM R714 TO PIN 51 0701
167. SENT AT NO CHECK C228 PIN 44 OF gt 900 PIN 0201 41 YES YES ISRX275V CHECK FOR SOLDER M PIN3OF U201 AND AFTER REPLACE U201 IT v ves CHECK FOR BAD SOLDER CR203 L203 AFTER REPLACE REPLACE U201 NO SERVICE 102dBm SET THE COMMUNICATIONANALYZER TO INJECT VIA ANTENNA PLUG 30dBm AT 947 4MHz PUT THE RADIO IN TEST MODE AND LOAD SYNTHETIZER WITH 33062 COMMAND START IS RX1 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL gt RXREPAIR 1 CORRECT ON PIN 5 OF U400 Se IS RX2 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL p RXREPAIR2 CORRECT ON C407 Qe IS RX3 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL p RX REPAIR CORRECT ON C408 YES IS RX4 947 4MHz RX NO SIGNAL p RX REPAIR 4 CORRECT ON C409 YES IS RX4 794 4 MHz VCO NO SIGNAL p VCO REPAIR CORRECT ON C409 YES NO SERVICE AT 102dBm Q NO IS RX5 153 2 CORRECT ON gt RX REPAIR 5 R426 IS RX6 153MHz NO CORRECT ON gt RX REPAIR 6 C421 IS RX7 153MHz NO CORRECT ON PIN 31 OF U201 YES ARE RXI AND NO RXQ CORRECT AT PIN 14 AND 15 OF U501 ARE THE SPI ACTIVITY NO PRESENT AT PIN 4 6 AND 8 OF U501 YES gt RX REPAIR 7 gt RX REPAIR 8 gt RX REPAIR 9 TRY TO REPHASE VIA GATE 22 IF STILL NO FUNCTION CHANGE U501 IF ANY MENTIONED A
168. SIM1 0 SE Chie oA I 107908 shag Aa 5 a m TXKEY amp Sha 0528 d ls EPROM EN j Qni ROMPCS ag t X D 8 EN thee 0706 4 BA vest eT oromesa ZAR 2 I ne 810 05 s wA erc Boake oso 83 BIG US T a B LMI SPLMI iso ar ste 102 rum de wet LH 5 10 D T j SPIMO RAMICS Vik jg nig 101 15 TO MODEM G mE hosi pre 6590 181 RAHICS 1845 ko 4 1 sion i SPISEK 6 32 100 0 1 Ni ts ME by k g N PLACE NEAR CONNECTOR Qs D 5 2850 DM CS D I e BA poe ie i 2 x 1 Me DO 1 D3 1904 10122 DI I MDM RD lt 0188 mx T Mar 1022 9 Me E pi be 0 ROT los wmi og 4 mii MUR lo un EN I ks ds E AG eine EZ SPLRFCSG SPJ RFES 16 M be d Js 3 ls n E 1098 oy TO 51 13802M40 UTOS pods end essocieted Na Kor M er 1851 0 NI oN mummers removed fron PCB E i 0 H I Vs si RIS 18 Bl 0922 2 L 1 TH case sF 7 u05 T pt 21 pal oe 08 2 280 28164 or DEM ms VC 59 29 SIM 4 15 Ne rer 14 n 8042 2344 01988 019 ns i m a E im 5 3 Zara mr i
169. SM 8700 6700 Table 8 Logic Processing Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Logic Processing Probable Cause Verification and Remedy Symptom 2 Display is C Logic RF Board Assembly Substitute a known good Logic RF erratic or defective Assembly die If known assembly works the original is disce 12 faulty should examined for solder and or connections Likely fail components 41101 J2 Q102 Q104 U101 and U701 3 Incoming call alert trans ducer audio distorted or volume is too low a Connections to from Keypad Display circuit board faulty Gain access to Keypad Display board as described in Disassembly on page 21 Check connection from alert transducer and from the Keypad Display board to the Logic RF assembly If connection not at fault proceed to b b Alert transducer defective Gain access to alert speaker as described in Disassembly on page 21 2 Disconnect the alert speaker 3 Connect a known good alert speaker 4 Place call to portable telephone from land line or other mobile portable telephone and verify alert signal volume and clarity If good re assemble portable with new alert speaker If alert speaker not at fault re install original alert speaker and proceed to c c Keypad Display board assembly defective Replace Keypad Display board If Keypad Display board is not at fault re
170. Stop the transmiter 12 Set AFC DAC to 4092 13 Do the same test as above 14 Read the frequency as F2 15 Verify AFC pulling range F2 F1 is within the spec Spec lt 180 K hz Test procedure 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 7 volt 2 Set the HP 8922H to Spec Analyzer with center frequency of 890 20 Mhz span2M hz 3 Key in 11001 1210 260000 40 4 Read the frequency on HP8922H as Fa 5 Key in 37 Clear 26409227 40 6 Read the frequency as Fb Pull range Fb Fa Spec lt 180 K hz Trouble Shooting 1 Check the 13 M hz by the Spectrum A nalyzer as shown below co O Key in 110017 2600007 frequency about 12 999 500 Hz 264092 frequency about 13 000 500 Hz Span 100 Khz Freq 13 Mhz HN 2 Check the AFC voltage from U 501 29 this change in voltage creates the change in frequency 3 Check for W rong parts C247 C203 4 CD CR201 or Y 201 RX LEVEL 1 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 257679 TophasetheRX IQ and AFC in the Receive circuit on band 1 by using an equation for calculation Spec 70 to 50 dBm 1 Set the radio to Test Mode 3 UI The Test Bay will Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 7 volt Set the HP8922H to Test M ode Broadcast Channel Only gt Channel 1 gt Amp 50 dBm Unmute the RX Path Select Channel 1 Measure the amplitude of
171. T PIN 3 OF U900 NO NO NO NO gt PROCEED TONPU1 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TO NPU2 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TONPU3 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TONPU5 ON PAGE 6 gt PROCEED TONPU4 ON PAGE 6 POWERS OFF WHEN TWISTED CHECK Y201 CR201 U201 U702 U704 FOR POSITIONED CORRECTLY OR BAD SOLDER WILL NOT POWERS DOWN CHECK IF THERE ISN T ANY SHORT ON WATCHDOG PULL UP PADS CHECK ALSO CONNECTION FROM PIN 25 OF J2 TO R990 OR BAD SOLDER ON U900 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U900 FREQUENCY ERROR OUT OF SPEC CHECK Y201 AND CR 201 FOR PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER PHASE ERROR OUT OF SPEC START ARE TXI amp TXQ NO CHECK U501 FOR CORRECT AT PHISICALLY DAMAGE PIN 61 63 OF OR BAD SOLDER U201 AFTER REPLACE IT v YES CHECK FOR RIGTH FREQUENCY 216MHz ON C228 AND 108MHz AT PIN 4 OF U201 TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U201 ISB PRESENT AT PIN1 OF RETURN PCB 999 CHECK POLARITY OF C907 AND CR998 AFTER REPLACE CR 998 NPU3 CHECK CR910 C916 FOR POLARITY AFTER REPLACE T900 NPU4 CHECK POLARITY OF C901 AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU6 CHECK C908 FOR SHORT CIRCUIT AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU7 CHECK POLARITY OF C906 AND AFTER REPLACE U900 NPU8 IS 13 MHz CKIN PRESENT O
172. TX REPAIR 2 NO IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL AT TX TX REPAIR 3 3 BASE OF Q302 NO IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX REPAIR 4 TX4 ON BASE OF Q381 NO WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL IS 902 4MHz TX YES SIGNAL CORRECT AT TX5 ON BASE OF Q300 TX REPAIR 5 y NO IS108MHz IF SIGNAL YES CORRECT AT TX 6 ON PIN 4 OF U300 y TX REPAIR 6 NO TX REPAIR 7 TX1 CHECKC442 L433 AND AFTER REPLACE U400 TX2 CHECK C439 L302 303 304 C328 AND C329 FOR PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER TX3 CHECK IF B IS PRESENT ON COLLECTOR OF Q302 AND PIN 2 3 OF Q301 IF B IS CORRECT TRACE THE TX SIGNAL TROUGH THE PATH FROM Q302 TO Q301 TO DECIPHER WICH IS THE FAILURE COMPONENT TX4 TAKES DC VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT AS FOLLOWING E 0 3V B C Q381 B 0 5V IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLIED BY B CHANGE L380 IF B IS CORRECT REPLACE 0381 TX5 TAKES DC MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE AS FOLLOWING 1 2V B Q300 C2 7V 0 6V E IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPLLIED BY 2 7V CHECK C 301 302 325 IF 2 7V ON COLLECTOR IS OK CHECK C 304 314 381 R352 AND AFTER REPLACE Q300 WILL NOT INITIATE A CALL TX6 PIN7 PING PINS PIN4IF PIN3 ea DM CS GND GND 108MHz GND R275 796 4MHz 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 U 300 TIC 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
173. Transceivers 55904 SWF1617 for PRC market S5895AAB SWF1617 for Hong Kong market 55901 SWF1617 for Taiwan market Description Weight and Volume Weight with 1200 mAH Lilon battery 213 grams Volume 208 cc Electrical Design 45 reduction in transmission power consumption over 8400 8500 60 reduction in standby current drain Housing The same as GSM 8500 Display Indicator The 8700 will use the same display as the International 8500 The display consists of a 96 x 32 pixelized matrix grid display offering up to 4 lines of English characters in 37 x 26 mm viewing area segmented battery icon five segment signal strength indicator and seven independent icons will also appear in the display In idle mode the display will supply information on time before battery discharge and signal strength Lens The lens will be exactly the same as the Greater China 8500 Look II except for the product name The display will be surrounded by lens with small border to maximize viewing area No internal circuitry should be visible The GSM logo printing will be appearing directly below the display on the left side of the lens GC87 will appear directly below the display on the right side of the lens The remaining lens area will be gloss black in color The printing will be gold Flip The flip will be the same as the Greater China 8500 Look II except that the Motorola Logo will appear on the inside of the
174. VOLTAGE LIKE AS FOLLOWING 0V B Q 421 1 9V 0 6V E IF THE COLLECTOR SUPPLY IS CORRECT REPLACE Q421 IF THE COLLECTOR IS NOT SUPPLY BY PIN 33 OF U201 CHECK R423 AND AFTER REPLACE U201 RX 8 START IS RX LOCAL OSC 306MHz NO PRESENT ON gt RX LOCAL OSC 1 PIN 39 OF U201 YES RX LOCAL OSC 2 RX9 IF THERE IS NOT ACTIVITY ON SPI BUS TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U501 RX LOCAL OSC 1 CHECK FOR CR431 L433 AND U201 PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE U201 RX LOCAL OSC 2 CHECK IQ_ REF FROM PIN 16 OF U501 TO PIN47 OF U201 1 38V IS CORRECT CONTROL FROM MODEM IF THE CONTROL IS CORRECT CHANGE 1201 IF THE CONTROL IS NOT CORRECT TRY TO REPHASE AND AFTER REPLACE U501 VCO REPAIR START IS 794 4MHz YES CORRECT AT VCO REPAIR 1 PIN 4 OF FL453 NO IS 2 5V VCO SUPPLY NO CORRECT VCO REPAIR 2 FROM PIN 21 OF U201 YES RETUR PCB TO HI TECH VCO REPAIR 1 CHECK IF FL453 IS NOT PHISICALLY DAMAGE OR BAD SOLDER IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE FL453 VCO REPAIR 2 CHECK SUPPLIES FROM Q203 AND Q202 IF THEY ARE INCORRECT TAKES REFERENCE FROM A FULLY FUNCTIONALLY PCB TO DECIPHER WHICH COMPONENTS CAUSES NO OR POOR SUPER FILTER SUPPLY FOR VCO POSSIBLE DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS ARE Q202 Q203 C212 C214 AND U201 POWER BURST OUT OF SPEC FOLLO
175. WING THE SCHEMATIC OF PAC_IC U310 CHECK THE PIN 7 PA CONTROL IF IS CORRECT REPLACE Q301 Q302 IF IS NOT CORRECT CHECK THE OTHER PIN TO TRACE THE FAULTY LINE PIN7 PIN4 PIN2 RF PIN1 EXC PAC ENI SAT DET 7 4 2 1 U 310 PAC IC 8 9 10 11 12 14 PIN9 PIN10 PIN11 PIN12 PIN14 AOC TX KEY DET SW SAT DET IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEMS ARE PRESENT RETURN PCB TO HI TECH INCORRECT LOW BATTERY INDICATION CHECK PIN 46 AND 47 OF U901 FOR CORRECT INDICATION TO U703 PIN 4 AND 64 TRY TO REPHASE MASTER CARD AND AFTER GATE 22 AND IF ANYTHING CHANGE REPLACE U703 NO OR LOW DISPLAY START YES CHECK FOR BAD SOLDER Q102 AFTER REPLACE IT IS PIN 4 OF U101 AT 9 6V NO CHECK L500 ON PIN 6 OF U101 AND POLARITY OF C101 C102 C103 IF ANY MENTIONED PROBLEM ARE PRESENT REPLACE 0101 PCB DRAWS CURRENT WHEN IS OFF CHECK TRANSISTOR REGULATOR Q202 Q203 AND U201 ARE NOT PHISCALLY DAMAGE CHECK ALSO U900 TO MONITORING WHICH COMPONENT BECOMING WARMER AFTER REPLACE IT VREF FROM B U900 B P A NOD 0201 0202 U900 2 75V Q203 2 75V PHONE FAILED SEE SUPPLIER ENTER 7100s 71014 AND REPORT THE CODES 04 XX 07 XX 05 XX Y Y CHECK 0203 FOR TRY TO REFLEX U702 ENTER 1714 AND 57 AND POWER UP THE 275 IF IS N
176. X X X X x gt x gt x Feature List Cost Control Features Electronic Lock Automatic Lock Programmable Unlock Code Display Unlock Code Display Call Timers and or Charge Meters Last Call Total Home Roam Programmable Audible Call Timer One Time Repeatable User Defined Automatic Timer Display Charge units currency Minutes Store Charge Rate Home Rate Roam Rate Call Restriction Levels Restrict Keypad Dialing Variable Memory Recall RestrictionX Restrict Incoming Calls Restrict Phone Number Length Vari Full Service No Restrictions PIN Entry PIN Enable Disable PIN Change PIN Unblocking Network Related Service Selection Auto PLMN Selection PLMN Select from Scan List Scan List Display auto and manual Change Preferred List Rearrange Order of Preferred List Full Size SIM card Display Own Phone Number Advise of Charge Messaging And Data SMS Mobile Terminated Point to Point Cell Broadcast Data Calls 9600 Data Fax support Alternating Speech Fax Vehicular Features On Hook Call Processing Volume Adj Speaker Safety Timer Full Duplex Hands Free Operation Ignition Sense Auto Turn On Entertainment Mute Auto Answer Other Features Status Indicators Easy Battery Removal Internal Charger Dead Battery Operation with Chargers Rapid Charger Cigarette Lighter Charger Option 68P09392A89 Present x x x gt x x x gt x gt x x x x x x x x x x x x x x gt x gt x x x x x x x
177. Y DAC VALUE This test the radio s DAC The radio read the battery voltage in analog mode then convert it into digital mode by U 703 send this message out through J 400 5 Uplink to EM MI The test bay will do the following 1 Connect the Battery Input with 5 8 V by power supply 3 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 747670 2 Togglethe radio ON 3 Read the Battery voltage by Uniphase Spec 5600 6500 Test Procedure Do the same test as the test bay does 1 Connect the Battery Input with 5 8 V olt 2 Toggle the radio 3 Go to Uniphase M onitor Battery 4 Read the Batt reading Don t care about the A because there is no B utt Plug power input Trouble Shooting Connect the radio with the Butt Plug of 7 2 Battery Input of 5 8 V Power up the radio Measure the voltage U 703 64 by DMM for 0 9 V olt f you gotthis 0 9 V on U703 64 you still don t have a reading by Uniphase CD 0703 f you don t get this reading on U 703 64 check U 900 47 46 and 48 for unsolder or CD U 900 Check for stable voltage by the Osc Scope Check P64 for 0 9 volt for 5 8 volt on battery input MIE Misc PA Table If the radio never been tuned the PA Table will be FS SCS255 SMT PRT 255 They all set for 255 255 255 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung MULT 100 124 255 After Tuned FS SCS 0 SMT PRT DET HIGH DET LOW DAC 0
178. a for transmission is digitized and sectioned into blocks The user data blocks are sent as information bursts in the allocated time slot of each TDMA frame see Figure 2 The data blocks are modulated onto the carrier using Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GMSK a very efficient method of phase modulation USER DATA SECTIONED INTO BLOCKS T E uA INFORMATION BURSTS SENT IN ALLOCATED TIME SLOTS 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 JO 1 2 13 4 5 6 7 FRAME 0 FRAME I 4 FRAME 2 FRAME 3 zl Figure 2 Time Division Multiple Access Transmission Each time an information burst is transmitted it may be transmitted on a different frequency This process is known as frequency hopping Frequency hopping reduces the effects of fading and enhances the security and confidentiality of the link A G S M radiotelephone is only required to transmit for one burst in each frame and not continually thus enabling the unit to be more power efficient Each radiotelephone must be able to move from one cell to another with minimal inconvenience to the user The mobile itself carries out signal strength measurements on adjacent cells and the quality of the traffic channel is measured by both the mobile and the base station The handover criteria
179. a call and verify improvement in earpiece audio If good re assemble portable with new earpiece speaker If earpiece speaker not at fault re install original earpiece speaker and proceed to c c Keypad Display circuit board defective Replace Keypad Display board refer to symptom 1d If Keypad Display board is not at fault re install original Keypad Display board and proceed tod d Antenna assembly is defective Check to make sure antenna pin is properly connected to the Logic RF Board Assembly If OK substitute a known good antenna assembly If antenna assembly is not at fault re install original antenna assembly and proceed to e e Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly refer to symptom Ic Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB ETrbl5 1 6 96 68P09304A68 0 19 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE Table 1 International 8700 Cellular Telephone Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Assembly Replacement Level SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE VERIFICATION AND REMEDY 7 Portable telephone will not a SIM card defective Initially check that the contacts on the card are not dirty clean if necessary recognize accept SIM card and check if fault has been eliminated If the contacts are clean insert a known good SIM card into the portable telephone Power up the unit and confirm whether or not the card has been accepted If the f
180. a phone call from the unit Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 477670 2 Enable hand free audio path 3 Send 1 K hz tone with amplitude 150 mV 5 4 V erify the level of the 1 K hz within specification Spec 950 1450 Procedure 1 Without opening the radio A In H mode on the HP8922H select the Cell Control screen and place the phone in a call state B Select Audio from Cell Control screen and set the following Speech to COND Speech gain to 1 0 Speech Out on AF ANL IN C Set AF Gen Levels on Audio screen Frequency 1 0 Khz A mplitude 2 150 mV D Verify that call remained connected 1 Go to your audio monitoring screen 2 Using Uniphase a Goto K ey Strokes Other b Stop the program using Atl F4 CALL EMMI SetAudPath 0 This command is case sensitive d Hit Enter e Hit Continue Alt F2 f Check the mV level on the HP8922 A udio screen Procedure 2 Setup the HP8922 Cell Status Audio 1K hz 150 Speech none AF Anl In Speechout Cell Scop Vert div 1V Time div 500uS Make sure that the 1 K hz tone is coming to the External connector p8 1 Camp the radio amp make a phone call 123 OK 2 Short B E of Q802 to disable Q802 to let the 1 K hz goes into U 803 p8 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 487670 u70700 m B Q802 ER ShortB E of 0802 3 Y ou should see the 1 K hz signal on HP8922 Scope with 950 1450 mV r
181. able only ib Maste when Extended Menus are switched on Adjust Ring Volume This option is used to set the incoming call ring tone volume The volume will be displayed as follows Adjust the volume by pressing the volume keys on the side of your phone Ring or Vibrate This option sets the way your phone alerts you to an incoming call The options are Ring Only the phone will ring with the tone specified by the Set Ringer Tone option Vibrate Only the phone will vibrate using VibraCall Vibrate Then Ri ng the phone will vibrate twice and then ring No Ring or Vibrate the phone will just display the Ca message The setting you choose also defines the type of alert for an incoming SMS message except that if you select Vibrate Then Ring your phone will just vibrate Using the Options Menu 47 English 0 Set Ringer Tone This option sets the tone your phone will make when an incoming call is received Standard Tone Your phone makes a standard ringing tone Single Ring Tone Music Tone When selected your phone will produce one of these alternative ringer tones a If you select the Single Ring Tone option the phone will only ring once when a call is received 0 Phone Lock This option is used to set and change the unlock code The unlock code can be set to protect your phone from unauthorised use It can be set to automatically lock your phone each time it is switched on The unlock code is
182. acing the battery packs 2 RECHARGING The International 8700 has a built in rapid charger The internal charger can be powered by either the Travel Charger or the Cigarette Lighter Battery Charger Both these accessories can power the phone for telephone call or fast charge a discharged battery but not both simultaneously Batteries can also be charged by either the Desktop Rapid Intellicharge the Slow Charger or various car kit options Note that at the time of release of this manual the Lithium Ion battery can only be charged by the Desktop Rapid EeP Intellicharge Battery Super Slim Slim Slim Standard XT XT Slim NiCad NiMH Lilon NiCad Lilon NiMH NiCad Weight grams 185 215 214 155 270 224 295 phone amp battery Volume cc 165 175 173 165 220 209 220 Phone amp battery Talktime mins 120 160 165 220 175 235 120 140 210 280 400 460 390 520 approx Stand by time hours 38 52 56 39 67 127 124 approx Capacity mA Hours 400 550 600 400 700 1200 1300 Rapid charger mins 60 60 60 60 90 240 120 Upper talktime figures may be acheived if network supports DTX With DRX 2 Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom HAcc8 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 35 36 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 3
183. adhesive 26 5009776E14 Alert Speaker 27 3209319501 Mic Grommet 28 0109850N07 Rear Housing 29 7509326S01 Speaker Cushion behind ear piece 30 7209005C05 LCD Display 96X32 PIX 31 0109505C10 SIM Card Contacts 32 0909958J04 Accessory Battery Connector 33 4009060E01 Switches 3 of 34 4009083C01 Read Switch 35 0909883L04 40 pin connector Keypad PCB 36 2809882L05 40 pin connector Main PCB 37 1309432S01 Escutcheon 38 4209852N02 Rear Housing Clips 39 1509618K03 Antenna Tube GDis7 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 33 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 34 PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 68P09304A68 O GDis7 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE ACCESSORIES RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACKS GENERAL 1 INTRODUCTION The International 8700 personal phone normally operates from a 6 0V dc battery pack There are a number of battery packs available which include the following i The Slim Lithium Battery i The Slim NiCad Battery iii The Slim NiCad Battery iv The Slim NiMH Battery v The Standard NiCad Battery vi The XT NiMH Battery vii The XT Lilon Battery Full specifications are given in the table below Each battery pack is housed in polycarbonate case which provides superior impact resistance Removal of the battery pack is accomplished through quick release latch If required the User Guide contains information on removing and repl
184. adio Channel Unit RECommendation RELease Regular Pulse Excitation Long Term Prediction REQuest Radio Frequency CHannel Reduced TDMA Frame Number Radio Link Protocol Remote Operations Service Element a CCITT specification for O amp M Remote Transcoder Unit Received signal level Received signal quality Set Asynchronous Balance Model Slow Associated Control CHannel Service Access Point Indicator Identifier Synchronisation Burst Service Centre Signalling Connection Control Part Synchronisation CHannel Service Control Point an intelligent network entity Stand alone Dedicated Control CHannel Specification Description Language Slow Frequency Hopping Subscriber Identity Module Short Message Service Short Message Service Call Broadcast SeND Signalling Point Signed RESponse authentication Supplementary Service System Simulator Signalling Transfer Point SYStem GENeration Terminal Adaptor Timing Advance Transaction Capabilities Application Part Traffic CHannel A full rate TCH A full rate speech TCH A half rate speech TCH Transmission Control Protocol Time Division Multiple Access Terminal Equipment Telecommunications Management Network Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity Timeslot Number Transceivers TeleTYpe refers to any terminal Time Slot Telephone Users Part Unnumbered Information frame Air Interface Voice Activity Detection Visited Location Register Very Large Scale Integra
185. al supply to 8 6 Voltto power up the radio 2 Connect the Battery Input with power supply 3 of 7 2 V olt Be sure the radio is ON 3 Set the charger to Low Current M ode 4 Read the current as 11 11 is within specification 100 170 mA Set the charger to High Current M ode Read the current as 12 12 is within specification 200 400mA Set the charger to M ax Current M ode Read the current as Imax Imax is within specification 900 2000 mA UT N Test Procedure 1 Connect 8 6 Volt to the erxternal connector with power supply 1 2 Connect 7 2 V olt to the battery input with power suplly 3 Be sure the radio stay Set the radio in T est M ode Key in 5000304 Low current charge mode Read the current as 11 Key in 500070 High current charge mode Read the current as 12 Key in 5002554 M ax current mode Read the current as Imax C Trouble Shooting 1 Check as shown Battery B i i 500502 7 6 Volt Q601 5010027 7 5 Volt 5025548 7 0 Volt 2 If the current is off a little re tune the radio 3 If the current stay in 0 or maximum Check R602 US U900 16 Take Q601 off then key in 50050 0900 15 should be 0 V then key in 500004 U 900 15 should be about 6 8 V with ripple If not CD U900 CHARGER BYTE Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 377670 The test bay using the equations to calculate Byte 1 amp
186. all a number embedded in a message are given in the Messages Menu section 1 The Phone Book entries that you are able to access will depend on the One Touch Dial Setting option in the Phone Book menu International Phone Calls To make an international phone call press and hold key After a couple of seconds the international dialling prefix will appear in the display this allows you to call from any country without knowing the local international access code Now enter the country code followed by the phone number The country code follows the conventional format 49 for Germany 44 for the UK 46 for Sweden etc Just like a conventional international call remove the leading 0 of the area code when you dial 7 Inserting Pauses Into Phone Numbers To obtain a three second pause character in a phone number press and hold the key for a couple of seconds the pause symbol will appear The pause character produces a three second delay whenever it is used However the first pause character in a phone number is a special case it will not begin its delay until the call is answered Making and Receiving Phone Calls 19 English Pause Working Example If for example you have a tone based voicemail system on 555 6911 with a mailbox number 1066 and password 2001 Then you may dial the following number 555691101066020010 The first part of the number would used to call the voicemail system When the call
187. all metering eese 55 Call meters menu 55 Call related features menu 36 Call 56 Call voicemail 44 62 Call waiting eene 40 Calling a 18 Calling an embedded number 45 Cancel all diverting 39 62 Capacity Checking battery capacity 36 Checking Phone Book capacity 32 Cell broadcast 46 55 0 5 rre rentrer ees 44 Change bar password 42 Change SIM PIN2 code 49 Change unlock code 48 Characters _ 28 Charge meters M 57 Charger indicators 13 Check capacity of the Phone Book 32 B D Data calls Accessories 65 Divertinig 39 Delete Last ten calls 32 fccit 45 46 Phone book entries 31 Desktop charging of your battery 12 Detailed diverting 38 Dialling phone book numbers 19 bcr d 10 Display characters 28 Displaying your own phone number 33 Divert All c
188. alls eee 38 Cancelling 39 Data lt 39 Fax CAUSE une end 39 Voice calls 38 When unavailable 38 DISSI EC 50 E Editing messages 44 Emergency calls 20 Ending a phone call 21 Entering characters 28 Erase name and number 31 Extended menus 25 50 F AGING Gann nedi 67 Fax calls Accessories 65 Diverting 39 Find entry by location 30 61 Find entry by name 30 61 Find new network 54 Fitting your battery 15 Fixed dialling eeess 33 Calling numbers 33 iio re 34 Flip aaa aaa 9 In use symbol l seem 10 International phone calls 19 K Keypad tones Selecting erii nha 50 L Language selection 50 Last ten _ 32 63 Lifetime timer sses 57 LOCK NOW as 48 62 Low battery warning 10 Making a phone call
189. an 26 dBm or lower than 24 dB m Use H P8922 Cell Status Pwr Ramp to see the signal Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 597670 Peak TX Power 25 dB dBm 25 1dBm If you see this it may fail Peak Phase RMS Phase or Positive Flatness Time Mask 157 Bits in this burst Test Procedure The Test Bay will do the following Set up the H P8922 Cell Status 1 ampl 102dBm TCH 124 level 5 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 2 V 2 Verify the radio is camped 3 Initiate a call 4 Decrease the power supply to 5 6 V 5 Step up the HP 8922 BCH 102 dBm to 85 dBm 6 easure the TX power should be within specification Spec lt 20 degree Trouble Shooting 1 Step down the TX level on HP8922 to check whether the peak phase error 15 back to within the specification If yes only 2 or step down the radio may be not phased correctly Re phase the radio Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 607670 If No 2 Check the AOC line from U 500 p32 33 to U 301 9 for unstable voltage This Vary from 0 3 V to 2 V when TX level is changing n n mn ses 0 6 mS 3 Check the PA table compare with a good radio s setting 4 M ake sure the connection of the cable are good RMS PHASE ERROR HIGH LOW CH Root Mean Square W hat we see the amplitude of the wave form on Osc Scope is not the actual AC measurment by the DM M We have to devide this wave form
190. an Are you in an area of variable coverage This uses extra battery power normal s your antenna fully extended This helps use less battery power s it a new battery A new battery will need two to three charge discharge cycles to attain normal performance See Charging a New Battery 5 it an old battery Battery performance will decline after several years use Replace the battery S it a battery that hasn t been completely discharged Allow the battery to fully discharge until the phone turns itself off and then charge the battery overnight Check that the Frequency Of Search feature in the Network Selection menu has not been set to Fast or Continuous See Network Search Check that the Battery Saving Mode feature has not been set to Of f Are you using your phone in extreme temperatures At extreme hot or cold temperatures battery performance is significantly reduced You can t cancel Call Diverting Wait until you are in an area with good network coverage and try again or Call Barring The symbol is flashing There is not enough memory available to store another SMS message Use the Messages menu to delete one or more existing messages I can t make international calls Some Service Providers automatically bar the ability to make international calls Contact your Service Provider Have you included the relevant codes Press and hold the 0 key to display the international dialling prefix and then enter the app
191. as not been removed in Step 2 extend the antenna whip to its full out position before seperating the housings Align the unit on the rear housing removal tool Pull the lever upwards to disengage the rear housing tabs from the front housing 4 The front housing containing all the internal circuitry can now be lifted away 68P09304A68 O 25 26 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 5 Unclip microphone plug using a plastic bladed tool lt Carefully ease Logic RF board away from the Keypad Display board which connects to it via a 41 pin plue socket connector 68P09304A68 O GDis7 1 6 96 GDis7 1 6 96 DISASSEMBLY 2 7 The Logic RF board now be removed completely from the front housing Carefully unclip the plastic slider plate starting from the opposite side to the SIM card eject button 68P09304A68 O 27 28 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE Bg Unclip the Alert Transducer plug from the keypad PCB Unclip the Vibrator plug from the kepad PCB 68P09304A68 O GDis7 1 6 96 GDis7 1 6 96 DISASSEMBLY 7 1 1 the Keypad Display board using plastic bladed tool To remove the flip hold it fully ope
192. asked to enter the telephone number name and location number of the new entry The last telephone number displayed will be presented by default it can be used or discarded as required If the entered location is not valid a timed message Ra n g e YYY 222 will be displayed and the phone will return to the Enter Location prompt If the chosen location is currently used by another entry you will be asked for confirmation that the location can be overwritten If you do not supply a location number the next available location will be used When the new entry has been entered a timed message Stored XXX will be displayed Using The Phone Book Menu 31 English Personal Last Ten Hu 7 Numbers Calls My Phone Number s Fixed Dialling One Touch ye Dial Setting Check Capacity This option is used to check the number of free Phone Book entries in the phone or SIM card memory areas Check Phone Capacity Check SIM Capacity Once selected a timed message XX Unused Locations displays the requested information Prevent Access This option enables you to prevent access to the Personal Numbers list To SIM Card Memory To Phone Memory To Phone amp SIM Memory No Memory Restrictions You can prevent access to all entries in the SIM card memory the phone memory or both the phone and SIM card memory To cancel all access restrictions use the No M emory Restrictions option When you change the restr
193. asure the voltage on U703 64 by DMM for 1 5 to 1 8 Volt Check for stable voltage by the Osc Scope 5 Decrease the battery input from 7 5 V olt to 5 V olt 6 M easure the voltage on U703 64 by DMM for 0 5 to 0 7 V olt Check for stable voltage by the Osc Scope 1 5 1 8 Volt 8 V input 0 5 0 7 Volt 5 V input Check for stable voltage E with Osc Scope _ Check for US U 900 46 47 US 0703 4 64 CD U900 SWITCH GAIN OFFSET T he test bay will Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 397679 1 Set the external connector input to 9 V by power supply 1 2 Connect the battery input with 7 5 V by power supply 3 3 Toggle the radio ON 4 Read the Battery voltage 5 Wait for 1 second for battery DAC to stabilized 6 Request battery DAC value as DAC1 7 Set battery input supply to 6 3 Volt 8 Wait for 1 second for the battery DAC to stabilized 9 Request battery DAC value as DAC 2 Gain 128 x 1000 x 7 5 6 3 DAC 2 DAC 1 where DAC 1 2256 x Byte 3 Byte 4 for 7 5 Volt DAC 2 256 x Byte 3 Byte 4 for 6 3 Volt Gain 128 1000 x 7 5 6 3 DAC 2 DAC 1 where DAC 1 2256 x Byte 5 Byte 6 for 7 5 Volt DAC 2 256 x Byte 5 Byte 6 for 6 3 Volt Spec A Gain 94 160 B Gain 94 160 Test Procedure T here is no similar test on the analyzer s bench Trouble Shooting It should not be failed by this test because it used the results from the previous test
194. attery should be at or near room temperature when charging e Once week allow your battery to discharge completely before recharging to fully discharge leave your phone on until it turns itself off Do notleave the battery connected to any charger except the E P Desktop Charger for longer than 24 hours Battery Performance and Maintenance Best battery performance will be achieved when you regularly charge and discharge batteries as instructed in this manual Battery performance is greatly affected by the coverage of the GSM network Set Battery Saving Mode to On see Phone Setup M enu and orFrequency of Search to Slow or Medium see Network Selection Menu Keep the antenna fully extended whenever possible to ensure maximum signal strength The performance of your batteries will gradually reduce if used substantially If left unused a fully charged battery will discharge itself in approximately one month When not in use store your battery uncharged in a cool dark and dry place About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card 11 English Desktop Charging of Your Battery Typical charge times for achieving a 90 charge level using the E P Desktop Charger are Battery Type Charge Time Slim 600 mAh NiM H 1 5 hours Slim 400 mAh Li lon 4 hours Extra Capacity 1300 mAh NiMH 1 5 hours Extra Capacity 1200 mAh Li lon 4 hours a The battery will continue to slow charge until fully charged 4 Formaximum NiMH batte
195. ault no longer exists the defective SIM card should be replaced If the SIM card is not at fault proceed to b b SIM card retaining assembly defective or mis aligned Gain access to the retaining assembly as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Examine for defects and replace if necessary If not at fault proceed to c c Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly refer to symptom 1c Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB 8 Hinged mouthpiece does not go on off hook correctly usually indicated by inability to answer incoming calls by flipping the mouthpiece down or inability to make outgoing calls a Magnet in flip defective Replace flip assembly with known good one refer to the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Place call to portable phone and verify ability to answer by opening flip If fault still present replace original flip assembly and proceed to b b Reed switch defective Gain access to Keypad Display board as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Unsolder the reed switch and replace with known good one Reassemble unit Place call to portable phone and verify ability to answer by opening flip If fault still present replace original reed switch and proceed to c c Keypad Display board is defective Replace the Keypad Display board with known good one Place call t
196. blems are apparent Ensure that the watchdog pull up pads R904 are shorted together and monitor U801 U701 and U501 to see if any become warmer than the other components U801 and U501 are the most likely Should any of the mentioned components become warmer replace it If the above information does not pin point a specific component replace the following components in the order shown 1st Replace U801 2nd Replace U501 Check the PCB after each component change to verify whether or not the fault has been eliminated If after replacing the two components the fault is still apparent return PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 68P09392A89 43 55 9g 25 gt EE GSM 8700 6700 Logic Processing Supplement 3 Phone Failure See Supplier Display shows phone failure see supplier Apply power to the unit and enter Test Mode Press 7100 Read the return code INFO 00 05 INFO 00 03 INFO 00 07 Perform a master cloning If problem persists U705 U500 should be replaced Replace Speech Replace Modem IC Coder U801 57 Master Clear If problem still exists replace the RF Logic Board 62 35 09 FS 44 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting Logic Processing Supplement 4 Unit Powers Down When Twisted This indicates possibilities of a dry cold solder joint that normally makes contact However when the PCB is twi
197. ca Services Level 3 Authorised GSM 6700 8700 RE BLOCK DIAGRAM 153 MHz RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR a 7dB 108 MHz DM_CS TX OFFSET LOCAL OSCILLATOR 13MHz CLOCK from U310 12 Ito U310 11 13 DCLK B from U703 37 U310 10 from 0701 6 DM CS MDM RD MDM WR SPI MI SPI RFCS SPI SC SPI MO Europe Middle East amp Africa Customer Services 20 03 98 LEVEL 3 COLOUR DIAGRAMS Rev 1 0 Dual Band ZAP Colin Jack Michael Hansen Billy Jenkins Page of 2 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE Module Level Repair Manual 68P09304A68 O COMPUTER SOFTWARE COPYRIGHTS The Motorola products described in this instruction manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program Accordingly any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Furthermore the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication estoppel or o
198. cal Explosion Illustration on page 52 as necessary while performing the disas Assembly Procedure Once the unit is disassembled and the repair is carried out it then becomes obvious that to assemble the unit the procedure is the reverse of that previously completed for disassembly 68P09392A89 21 5 E G 2 GSM 8700 6700 Antenna Removal Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 22 Turn off the telephone Press down on the battery s tab slide down and remove the battery from the housing Carefully pry off the antenna cap using a plastic pry tool Remove the antenna assembly by simply pulling it out of the housing If it proves difficult to remove remove it after separating the front and back housings Align the unit on the rear housing removal tool Pull the lever upwards to disengage the rear housing tabs from the front housing 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Disassembly Board Removal Step 1 The front housing con training all the internal circuitry can now be lifted away Step 2 Unclip the microphone plug using a plastic pry tool g a a 3 2 lt Step3 Carefully ease the Logic RF board away from the Keypad Display board which connects to it via a 41 pin plug socket connector m Um gt
199. can thus be much more accurately determined and the handover made before the channel quality deteriorates to the point that the subscriber notices When a radiotelephone is well within a cell the signal strength measured will be high As the radiotelephone moves towards the edge of the cell the signal strength and quality measurement decreases Signal information provides an indication of the subscriber s distance from the base station As the radiotelephone moves from cell to cell its control is handed from one base station to another in the new cell This change is handled by the radiotelephone and base stations and is completely transparent to the user 68P09304A68 O BDesc2 1 6 96 1 3 SERVICE AREA The area within which calls can be placed and received is defined by the system operators Because this is a radio system there is no exact boundary that can be drawn on a map If the telephone is outside a coverage area the no service indicator will illuminate and calls will be unable to be placed or received If this happens during a conversation the call will be lost There may also be small areas within a particular service area where communications may be lost MUTE _ BUTTON SIM EJECT BUTTON pu 32 X 96 PIXEL LCD DISPLAY P A MICROPHONE DESCRIPTION The radiotelephone s identity information is held by its local G S M system in its Home Location Register HLR and Visitor Location Register
200. ce then only time meters are available The meter can be displayed during a phone call and audible tones can be generated to indicate the passage of call time Your phone can handle values up to 21 digits long although during calls it can only display the last 12 digits If the value exceeds 21 digits then Too Large is displayed In addition you can set a maximum charge limit so that your phone will monitor either the number of units used or the call cost and then not allow the limit to be exceeded Show Call Charges This feature allows you to display the cost of your calls or the amount of credit remaining The figures are in phone units or currency depending on the setting ofthe Set Charge Type option Show Call Charges is only available if you receive the Advice of Charge service Show Last Call Displays the cost of your last chargeable call Using the Options Menu 55 English Total For All Calls Displays the cost of all your chargeable calls since the charge meters were reset to zero using the Reset Call Charges option Credit Remaining Displays the difference between your total call costs and the limit specified by the Set Total Charge Limit option If there is no limit Charge Limit Set will be displayed Show Call Timers This feature allows you to display the duration of your calls and to reset your time meters to zero If you receive the Advice of Charge service then all calls are timed
201. ced with pre tested pre phased assemblies 3 TESTING AFTER REPAIR After any repair work has been carried out the unit should be thoroughly tested to ensure that its operates correctly This is especially important if the Logic RF assembly is replaced For general repairs which do not include replacing the Logic RF assembly simply placing a call and checking signal strength and transmit and receive audio quality is normally sufficient When the Logic RF assembly is replaced the unit must have acomprehensive test on a GSM compatible communications analyser See Testing Procedure on page 16 for further details The simple test of placing a call on air is usually carried out at this stage to complete the testing procedure Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom ETrbl5 O Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 17 18 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE Table 1 International 8700 Cellular Telephone Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Assembly Replacement Level SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE VERIFICATION AND REMEDY 1 Portable telephone will not turn on or stay on a Battery pack either discharged or defective Measure battery voltage across a 50 ohm 21 Watt load If the battery voltage is 5 5 V dc recharge the battery using the appropriate battery charger If the battery wil
202. ceivers TeleTYpe refers to any terminal Time Slot Telephone Users Part UI Um VAD VLR VLSI VPLMN XC XCDR 3PTY 68P09392A89 Unnumbered Information frame Air Interface Voice Activity Detection Visited Location Register Very Large Scale Integration IC Visited PLMN Transcoder Transcoder Three ParTY service 1 17 97 SERVICE MANUAL MOTOROLA FEEDBACK FORM Cellular Subscriber Group Service Manual Feedback Form To report any problems or omissions to this service manual 1 Photocopy this page 2 Fill out the boxes below and give your comments This comment page can be used for any Motorola Cellular Subscriber service manual 3 Fax this form to Motorola Asia Pacific Cellular Subscriber Division Fax number 847 523 8795 Attn Mr Reginald Townsend Service Manual Number Revision Your Name Address Telephone Number Nature of Problem or Omission Specify Section Page Number Diagram etc O 1996 Motorola Inc B B B R2 75V _ _ from Q202 C
203. cks of software from the PROM s U702 and U705 If there is a problem with either U701 U702 U704 or U705 the watchdog will not be pulled high This will cause U900 to power down the 2 75V regulator s and halt the power up process gt 9g 25 Check the CE lines at pins 26 and 27 of 0702 0705 respectively for activity f there is no activity proceed to NPU repair procedure 8 f above activity is present check for activity at pin 39 and 40 of U704 f there is no activity proceed to NPU repair procedure 9 If above activity is present check the OE line at pin 1 of U705 for activity f there is no activity proceed to NPU repair procedure 10 If the above procedures don t eliminate the fault return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 68P09392A89 41 GSM 8700 6700 48 NPU Repair Procedure No CE signalling present at pin 26 and 27 of U702 and U705 respectively If there are no CE chip enable pulses being sent from U701 to the software chips U702 and 0705 it means that U701 is not trying to communicate with the EPROMs Check that U701 U702 and U705 are not physically damaged have no dry joints and are positioned correctly If none of the mentioned problems are apparent replace U702 and U705 If replacing the above components does not eliminate the fault return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 9 NPU Repair Procedure 62 S 55 F 42
204. ct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 707670 1 Setup HP8922 BCH 124 90 dBm TCH 1 TXlevel 5 2 Power up the radio with the Batterty Input of 6 V olt 3 Verify the radio is camped 4 Initiate a phone call 5 Set HP8922 timing advance to 40 T 6 Reduce the RF level of HP8922 to 102 dBm 7 Wait for 2 seconds 8 Verify theRX Quality and RX Level are good on HP8922 Spec 4 Trouble Shooting Usually this item will not fail the radio If it does it may be the software problem RESET TIME ADVANCE After the Cell set the time advance to check the radio on the phone call It reset the time advance to 0 1 Set up HP8922 124 90 dBm TCH 1 TXlevel 5 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 717670 2 Power up the radio with the Batterty Input of 6 V olt 3 Verify the radio is camped 4 nitiate a phone call 5 Set HP8922 timing advance to 40 T 6 Reduce the RF level of HP8922 to 102 dBm 7 Wait for 2 seconds 8 Verify the RX Quality and RX Level are good on HP8922 9 Verify the TX Frequency Error Peak and RM S Phase Error Time M ask and current is within specification 20 Set the HP8922 Timing A dvance to OT Spec 4 Trouble Shooting Usually this item will not fail the radio If it does it may be the software problem HAND OVER To test the radio stay ON from 1 Band 1 Channel 1 to Band 2 Channel 62 2 RX level 90 dBm to 85 dBm 3 TX level 5 to level 15 The test bay wil
205. cted for a few seconds followed byEnd Call To end your call press O or close the flip Automatic Redial If your call attempt does not succeed the message Redi al will be displayed for five seconds Pressing O at this point will automatically redial the phone number When the call is answered you will hear a short ring tone The maximum number of redial attempts is set by your Cellular Service Provider If the phone call cannot be connected within this maximum the message Redi al Failed will be shown Redialling the Last Number Called L When in standby mode press O Alternatively you can retrieve the last number dialled using the Last Ten Calls feature in the Phone Book menu 0 One Touch Dialling Phone Book Numbers To quickly retrieve and dial anumber stored in the first nine locations of your Phone Book press and hold the appropriate digit key For example pressing and holding 2 will dial the phone number stored in location 2 of your Phone Book a You do not need to press O to call the number 0 Dialling Phone Book Numbers Location Alternatively you can 1 PressQ Location ForexampleQ 2 3 will retrieve the phone number stored in location 23 of your Phone Book If you don t know the exact location you can enter a random location and then lt gt keysto scroll to the number you want 2 Press O to call the number Calling an Embedded Number in a Message Details on how to c
206. d U 703 pin49 amp pin 63 00 Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 124679 READ VERSION ERR PROCESSOR VERSION To Check the M icroprocessor s V ersion in the software 702 KEY IN 19 CHECK THE CALL PROCESSOR VERSION EXAMPLE 14 05 03 Trouble Shooting 1 Check for Unsolder and Solder short on U 701 2 Wrong Software U 702 FLEX EEPROM load the default information in to the EEPROM whichis 1 Speech Coder 2 Verifiy the status of Call Processor 3 PA Table 4 RXI amp RXQ 5 Manufacture ID 6 Battery DAC 7 Pseudo ramdom byte sequence 8 Classmark The test bat will Power up the radio with battery input of 7 V olt Wait for 3 seconds then set Factory s Info Turn Power Off for 1 sencod then power the radio again Disble MPC Subsidy Lock Flag Verify state of Battery A D Enter Test M ode Trouble Shooting 1 Check for Unsolder U 705 2 CD U705 3 Verify that the board did not shut off during this test Run EEPROM Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 137670 D efault MODEM VERSION To Check the odem s Version U501 using EMMI Command RQVN Test Procedure Plug in the buttplug with 7 V olt Key in 20 The radio will display the M odem version Example V 35 06 Trouble Shooting K ey in 20 the M version should be displayed US SS U501 Check the SPI Bus amp parts around U 500 The M odem comunicates with the call processor by the SPI Bus
207. d of time if the data transfer has been completed correctly Clone will re appear in the recipient units display 9 5 o 2 D 2 gt D T 95 ok GSM 8700 6700 Step 10 The second data block must now be transferred Repeat steps 1 to 9 but enter 022 to program the second data block into the Transfer card Step 11 The third data block known as table 5 must now be transferred Repeat steps 1 to 9 but enter 025 to program the third data block into the Transfer card Step 12 When the third block of data has been transferred successfully remove the Transfer card and check the repaired radio functions correctly See Testing on page 13 Master Transfer This method of transfer should only be followed when the defective unit will not power up or complete a Normal Transfer As mentioned earlier there are different variations OEM looks of the Motorola GSM 8700 6700 cellular telephones each model requiring the main board to be configured differently for correct operation When carrying out a Master Transfer it is not possible to transfer the customers selected features or stored phone numbers only the personality can be programmed into the repaired unit Each different version of the GSM 8700 6700 cellular telephone has its own Master Transfer card which contains essential set up information Master SIM cards may be ordered pre programmed
208. dBm and midamble 0 4 M easure the avergae current 290 mA to 400 mA If the current is no match the spec It fail the test 5 Measure the frequency to within 10 K hz 6 Set the power level 0 31 dBm 7 Select channel 124 and repeat the test as above Verify the above measurement are within specification Spec 26 to 36 dBm Test Procedure 1 Power up the radio with the Batt connector of 8 V olt 2 Using Uniphase TX Pseudo function set channel 1 power step 0 This sets the radio up to transmit at low channel 1 at max power Y ou should see this on your HP8922H Center Frequency 890 2Mhz Span 1 Mhz Ref Level 42 dBm The current drain at M ax Power should burst to about 470 mA On power supply 1 w B utt Plug Trouble Shooting 1 Setup the HP8922 to Cell Cntl Spec Anal Sweep 5 Sec M ax Hold 2 Key in 110012 12012 310 or TX Pseudo in Uniphase 3 Verify the wave form and observe the peak power and compare with the good broad 4 f there is TX at all then check the 890 2 M hz at the PA on the collector of Q302 you should see about 13 15 dB m If signal is there but not the correct amplitude trouble shoot the PA as below Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 187670 Due to the signal is in pulsing mode it is a little difficult to get the actual reading Slow sweep time on spectrum analyzer down to 2 Sec and use above TX Seudo function or 1100172 12002 310
209. ding on the current setting K Read Messages Y CallTimer Your newest message will be displayed you can then read Displays the duration of your last chargeable call See Show Call delete and edit messages as normal See Received M essages for Timers for more information more information Z Talk and Fax U Outgoing SMS Switches Talk and Fax on for the next call only See Talk and Fax Your newest message will be displayed you can then read send for more information delete and edit messages as normal See Outgoing essages for more information b Show My ID Your phone number will be sent with the next attempted call a Message Editor after this your phone number will not be sent until you reselect The last message that was edited will be displayed Press and this option hold C clear the message and start a new one or modify the message displayed See How to Create and Edit SMS C Restrict My ID Messages for more information Your phone number will not be sent with the next attempted call after this your phone number will sent until reselect W Received Calls this option Displays the first entry in the Last Calls Received list You can scroll through the list and call the numbers as normal See Last Calls Received for more information X Call Charge Displays the cost of your last chargeable call See Show Call Charges for more information Using the Quick Access Menu 63
210. e ECT mu um 7 1 nat E 9 cm pi 9 ALBIS z za lsz for lss bs 7 Es 54 Bs 758 ont 3 yy rer BE m TC7WO4FU IS 3 INVERTER SSOP8 P PACKAGE E RE S BATT m ONE OTHER INVERTER IS USED FOR SPEECH CODER 12 mir L mu m 2 J z BONE E 5 0 048 FOR TEST PURPOSES x ls T u 82 et 3 ve cate s uy 3 uns ums pn MAN_TEST 7 220 B artery 4 989 m A heng g is esos X3 Leas ving AA 0 0620 UPSS817 ak Te imd gi Bi SENSE 4 in ls 125 3g KAR esl pu gt z m D Tw s 0 ro d BIC Ad T0FP64 lea i SE cos NNN Bi 6 3 wf S 100 9 Jos sr Jos po Jer po Jes f r Jes es lea fer leo Iro lre 0503 NEN s UPLINK al 700 007 4 E nS BERBERE 5 53358858 T 5 51 09743E 13 I amp EEE um 1 le 7 cns Alin raporte 2 T sowan toe 0 Nest ves icc RESET F 5 B BE RESET s r opa By _ SENSE aa ade s Sier mr pss porns CONN ae Bcra 9 R818 0894 Te 7 28 1 PLACE CRG07 AS CLOSE DP E 10012 Jay not PUR SENSE al 2 um 83 9 VV AS POSSIBL
211. e Diversity Radio Channel Unit Discontinuous Reception Direct Transfer Application Part Data Terminal Equipment Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone signalling type Discontinuous Transmission erlang Energy per Bit Noise floor Echo Canceller Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density Equipment Identity Register Effective Isotropic Radiated Power Electromagnetic Compatibility Electronic Mobile Exchange European Telecommunications Standards Institute 1 17 97 Glossary FACCH Fast Associated Control CHannel FACCH F Full rate Fast Associated Control CHannel FACCH H Half rate Fast Associated Control CHannel FB Frequency correction Burst FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel FEC Forward Error Correction FN Frame Number FTAM File Transfer Access Management GMSC Gateway Mobile Services Switching Center GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GSM Group Special Mobile GSM MS GSM Mobile Station GSM PLMNGSM Public Land Mobile Network HANDO Handover HDLC High Level Data Link Control HLR Home Location Register HOLD Call Hold Supplementary Service HPLMN Home PLMN HPU Hand Portable Unit HSN Hopping Sequence Number 1 17 97 68P09392A89 IA5 ID IMEI IMM IMSI IN ISC ISDN ISUP IWF LAC LAI LAPB LAPDm Lm LPC Information frames International Alphanumeric 5 IDentification International Mobile Equipment Identity I
212. e any problems that may occur Index A comprehensive index A lt e The Manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in technical and product specifications without prior notice Your GSM cellular telephone is one of the most exciting and innovative electronic products ever developed With it you can stay in contact with your office your home emergency services and others wherever service is provided General Your cellular telephone utilizes the GSM standard for cellular technology GSM is a newer radio frequency RF technology than the current FM technology that has been used for radio communications for decades The GSM standard has been established for use in the European Community and elsewhere Your cellular telephone is actually a low power radio transmitter and receiver It sends out and receives radio frequency energy When you use your cellular telephone the cellular system handling your call controls both the radio frequency and the power level of your cellular telephone Exposure To RF Energy There has been some public concern about possible health effects of using cellular telephones Although research on health effects from RF energy has focused for many years on the current RF technology scientists have begun research regarding newer radio technologies such as GSM After existing research had been reviewed and after compliance to all applicable safety standards had been tested it has been conc
213. e options you must enter the requested code before proceeding key This will take Menu Navigation A Working Example The following steps will take you through how to switch the Extended Menus option on c 1 When the phone is in the standby mode pressthe M key This will access the Options menu and Cal Related Call Related Features will be displayed Features 2 Pressthe 4 key twice to go to thePhone Setup menu item 1 3 PresstheO key to select the sub menu The display will i ad now show ust Ri ng Vol ume menu option D 4 Presthe repeatedly until the Extended Menus sub ae menu item is shown in the display setup AT Adjust Ring Volume 5 Press the O key to select this item You can now select between or Of f the current setting will be shown with a Ring Or Vibrate z character If thez character is next to Of f press then O to switch on the Extended Menus If the z Accessory Set Ringer Tone character is next to press leave the setting as it is Setup er ED Require SIM Card PIN r Change SIM PIN2 Code D F New Security Code ED 2 Extended Menus E EM gt Off 0 Short Extended and Personalised Menus With Personality you can personalise the menus by choosing which features you want readily available The features that are less frequently used can be stored out of sight The menu diagrams in this manual show the condition of the menu settin
214. e possible Exchange cellular telephone same as customer s unless multi bezel phones are being supported Charged battery pack Full size transfer SIM card Full size master transfer SIM card 3 EXCHANGE PROCEDURE The following steps must be carried out when exchanging a defective International 8700 personal cellular telephone if covered by warranty for a fully functional exchange unit BDesc2 Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom Select an exchange unit which should be the same model as the defective unit Transfer the personality of the customer s defective telephone into the exchange unit See page 21 of this manual for further details When the personality transfer has been completed successfully insert the customer s SIM card into the exchange unit See page 11 for further details on SIM card insertion With the SIM card in place power up the exchange telephone Place a call to confirm that the unit is functioning correctly Write the mechanical serial number of the customers original unit on the warranty label of the exchange unit positioned above the type approval label on the rear housing Then give the exchange phone to the customer Return the defective unit to the nearest Motorola HUB or Autho
215. e radio turns off when the transmitter is on check the path from U500 to U 310 pins 9 10 11 and 12 CD 0310 CD 0200 7 If no gain Q381 amp Q301 then check L 501 AOC line 9302 gain should be constant Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 207670 PA Control Operation M easurement taken with the spectrum analyzer vary a great deal in the PA circuit depending on exactly where the measurement is taken and what type of probe and RF cable is used B ecause of this we recomend taking readings from a good board and comparing See Block Diagram GAIN 10 DBM FROM PAVE OUTPUT TO RF SWITCH POWER DETECT 890 2 Mhz Mid CH The PA is made up of 3 parts Q381 Q302 Q301 2 of which are variable gain and 1 that is constant gain B is used to power all 3 parts of the PA Collectors of Q381 amp 0302 and drain of Q301 The biasing for the PA is provided by the PA control IC PAC Q302 is set up as the constant gain portion of the pA with its biasing being control through 0 304 and biasing voltage on the Base of 0381 and on the Gates of 0301 therefore increasing the gain of the 0310 also commuicates with U501 MODEM using the AOC DET SW and SAT DET lines These lines are used to let the M know when the PA has gone into saturation W hen satuation occurs the M can adjust it s AOC line to control the PAC s output PA biasing voltage For more information on these
216. ector on the main board Operating power for the personal telephone can be obtained from anyone of the following sources Slim Battery Lithium SNN4383 This rechargeable Lithium Ion battery pack is the lightest Motorola battery offered for the GSM 8700 6700 It measures 9 4mm thick and gives approximately 33 hours standby 68P09392A89 1 E 5 GSM 8700 6700 Slim Battery NiCad SNN4132 This rechargeable Nickel Cadmium battery pack measures 9 4mm thick and gives approximately 33 hours standby Slim Extra Cap NiCad SNN4102 This rechargeable Nickel Cadmium battery pack measures 9 4mm thick and gives approximately 45 hours standby Slim Battery NIMH SNN4612 This rechargeable Nickel Metal Hydride battery pack measures 9 4mm thick and gives approximately 50 hours standby o Standard Battery NiCad SNN4027 This rechargeable Nickel Cadmium battery pack measures 11 6mm thick and gives approximately 58 hours standby Slim Extra Cap Li lon SNN4458 This rechargeable Lithium Ion battery pack measures 18 5mm thick and gives approximately 100 hours standby o Extra Capacity Battery NIMH SNN4259 This rechargeable Nickel Metal Hydride battery pack measures 18 5mm thick and gives approximately 108 hours standby Cigarette Lighter Adaptor SLN9933 68P09392A89 The battery charger plugs into the accessory conn
217. ector socket situated at the base of the telephone and a vehicle s cigar lighter socket As well as providing a battery charging function the charger provides power directly to the phone whilst it is in use even with a dead battery Vehicle Adaptor Kits There are various vehicle adaptor kits available They all provide power to the unit from the vehicle s own electrical system via the accessory connector socket located at the base of the phone All the kits offer battery charging as standard Travel Battery Charger This is a mains adaptor which plugs directly into the phone It charges the phone s battery whilst attached and also provides dead battery operation NOTE The GSM 8700 6700 may have various battery options as standard depending on the particular market requirements 1 17 97 Figure 1 1 17 97 GSM 8700 Personal Cellular Telephone Description Retractable Antenna Earpiece Button CL X 2 x 12 Digit JG Ga LCD ESI Display X 68P09392A89 g o E 5 7 GSM 8700 6700 Feature List An X indicates that the feature is present in the GSM 8700 6700 Feature List Visual Audio Features Display Number Capacity per location Name Capacity per location Language Selection Automatic Language Selection based on SIM Silence Rin
218. ed decrease in the voltage occurs and the discharged condition 1 04 V per cell is reached abruptly Metering to determine the state of charge in this type of battery is difficult and is not normally performed AN CAUTION Do NOT allow the battery terminals to become shorted together e g paper clip placed accidentally across the battery contacts when the battery pack is removed from the portable Sustained high discharges permanently damages the battery voids the battery warranty and may create burn or fire unit general characteristic of all rechargeable batteries in storage is self discharge If the battery is used after unknown periods of storage it is recommended that it be charged using the overnight charger to obtain maximum capacity 4 BATTERY MAINTENANCE The only maintenance required is recharging the battery and keeping the contacts clean a pencil eraser works well Use only Motorola approved charger The use of other chargers unless approved will void the battery guarantee and may result in permanent damage to the battery and the radio Follow the charging instructions which accompany 68P09304A68 0 each charger All battery packs are considered to be non serviceable Defective batteries should be replaced A mn Batteries may explode if disposed of in fire 5 STORAGE Battery packs may be stored at room temperature in any state of charge without da
219. ed in Motorola approved chargers Do not leave any battery packs in a charger for more than 24 hours Overcharging will prevent the battery pack from achieving its maximum life and capacity The original first generation Lithium Ion battery packs can only be recharged by the new IntelliCharge desktop rapid charger Charging of the battery pack is possible with the battery attached to the portable telephone or by itself The Battery Pack should be near room temperature when charging 3 CHARACTERISTICS Each Lithium Ion battery pack consists of 2 cells connected in series to provide a nominal 7 2V dc output Devices internal to the battery pack provide thermal sensing and short circuit protection The voltage of a Lithium Ion does not stay as constant under load as a similar Ni Cad Instead it has a slow ramp down of operating voltage with a gentle roll off as the fully discharged condition is reached A ooo A Do NOT allow the battery terminals to become shorted together e g a paper clip placed accidentally across the battery contacts when the battery pack is removed from the portable Sustained high rate discharges permanently damages the battery voids the battery warranty and may create burn or fire unit 4 BATTERY MAINTENANCE The only maintenance required is recharging the battery and keeping the contacts clean a pencil eraser works well Use only Motorola approved charger The use of
220. ee characters from a name but you do not need to enter all three characters to begin a search The Phone Book entries will be searched and the first alpahabetically matching entry will be displayed If there isn t a name matching your entry the nearest alpahabetically matching entry will be displayed If you do not enter any name information the first alphabetical entry will be displayed If there are no names stored No Names Stored will be displayed To display adjacent Phone Book entries use the and keys When the desired name is displayed press the O key to select it The phone will now enter the Call Number M odify Name Or Number or Erase Name And Number options sub menu English 30 Using The Phone Book Menu Find Entry By Location L PressQ Location This option is used to select a telephone number from a list of numerically sorted Phone Book locations Once selected this option will display the message Ent er Location You can now enter a location number If the entered location is not valid a timed messageRange 1 XXX will be displayed and the phone will return to theEnter Location menu item The Phone Book entries will be searched and an entry will be displayed If you enter a location number for which there is no entry Location Empty will be displayed and the nearest non empty location will be selected instead If you did not enter a location the first numerical entry will be displayed If th
221. en you select this item the first location will be displayed Use the lt and gt keys scroll through the phone numbers stored To enter or change a number scroll to the location and press You will be prompted to enter a phone number and then a name Press O to store the information A Depending on your Cellular Service Provider you may find that one or more of the entries in the My Phone Number s list will have been defined You may not be able to change these predefined entries Fixed Dialling A Availability of the Fixed Dialling menu depends on the type of SIM card This feature allows you to limit use typically third party use of your phone to a predefined list of telephone numbers or if you wish to a list of country codes area codes or other prefixes of your choosing When Fixed Dialling is switched on the only numbers that can be dialled from your phone are those stored or whose prefix is stored in the Fixed Dial list If you attempt to dial any other number apart from an emergency number the message Restricted will be displayed You will not be able to make fax or data calls To make a call when Fixed Dialling is switched on either dial the number manually or select it from the Fixed Dial list and press Up to 20 entries can be stored in the Fixed Dial list The list is stored on your SIM card This option may be affected by the Call Barring setting View Fixed Dial List This option
222. entation IA5 International Alphanumeric 5 COLR Connected Line identification Restriction ID IDentification CONF Conference Call add on IMEI International Mobile Equipment CSPDN Circuit Switched Public Data Network Identity CUG Closed User Group IMM IMMediate assignment message CW Call Waiting IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom JGlos9 Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 49 50 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE IN ISC ISDN ISUP IWF Kc LAC LAI LAPB LAPDm Lm OMCS OSI PAD PCH PDN PIN PLMN POTS PSPDN PSTN PTO Intelligent Network International Switching Centre Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN User Part Interworking Function ciphering Key Individual subscriber authentication key Location Area Code Location Area Identification Identity Link Access Procedure balanced channel Link Access Procedure DM mobile channel Traffic channel with capacity lower than Bm Linear Predictive Code Location Register Mobile Allocation Mobile Access Hunting Mobile Allocation Index Mobile Allocation Index Offset Mobile Application Part Mobile Country Code Malicious Call Identification Mediation Device Mobile Equipment Multi Frequency tone signalling type Maximum Likelihood Sequence Es
223. ephones can operate from 6 0 V dc Nickel Cadmium rechargeable battery packs Figure 1 shows the dimensions and contact HAcc8 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom configuration of a selection of rechargeable battery packs Each battery pack is housed in a sealed polycarbonate case which provides superior impact resistance Removal of the 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 37 38 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE battery pack is accomplished through a quick release latch If required refer to the Disassembly Instructions in this manual for battery pack removal and replacement information 2 CHARGING Battery pack recharging can be accomplished by a number of charging devices including the original IntelliCharge the new IntelliCharge desktop rapid charger Overnight desktop trickle charger internal charger and via various vehicle adaptors The Battery Pack should be near room temperature when charging 3 CHARACTERISTICS Each nickel cadmium battery pack consists of 5 cells connected in series to provide a nominal 6 0 V dc output Devices internal to the battery pack provide thermal sensing and short circuit protection The voltage of a nickel cadmium battery remains approximately constant under load until the battery approaches the discharged condition At this time a mark
224. er has been completed correctly Personality Transfers are required when a phone is Express Clone will re appear in the donor unit s Exchanged or when the main board is replaced The display different variations OEM looks of the International 8700 personal cellular telephones requires that each main board Step5 When the first data block has been successfully must be configured correctly to ensure that the unit takes on uploaded remove the card from the donor the correct personality required Therefore when a main board is replaced its personality must be transferred into the Step 6 Insert the Transfer card into the slot located on new board so that it functions correctly in the customers the back of the recipient unit Turn the recipient unit There are two possible methods of transfer unit on the display should show Clone Normal Transfer and Step 7 The recipient unit is now in the cloning mode and ready to receive the first block of data Master Transfer Step 8 Enter 03 via the unit s keypad This command If the defective unit powers up then the Normal Transfer will cause the recipient unit to download the first method should be followed If the faulty unit will not power data block from the Transfer card up then a Master transfer will be required to configure the replacement board once installed Step 9 While data transfer is taking place between the card and the unit Please Wait will be 2 NORMAL TRANSF
225. er using the digit keys a When On Divert All Calls takes priority over all other diversion settings English 38 Using the Options Menu Detailed Diverting These options will enable you to divert calls to different numbers depending upon the call type and the current status of your phone Each of the following detailed diverting options operate in the same way Each option has two settings or 0f f If you change the setting to 0n you will be asked to enter a diversion phone number using the digit keys A Detailed diversion settings are ignored while Divert All Calls or Divert When Unavailable are Divert Voice Calls Divert All Voice Calls When selected this option will unconditionally divert all incoming calls You will have no opportunity to answer an incoming call f Busy This option will divert incoming calls if your phone is busy If No Answer This option will divert incoming calls if you do not answer the call If Not Reachable This option will divert incoming calls if your phone cannot be contacted by the network Call Related TR D Features Divert Fax Calls Divert Data Calls When selected these options will divert incoming Fax and Data calls Cancel All Diverting This option will enable you to cancel the diversion of incoming calls This option resets all diversion settings to Of f and removes all diversion numbers Talk and Fax This is a network feature that al
226. ere no numbers stored No Numbers Stored will be displayed To display adjacent Phone Book entries use the and keys When the desired name is displayed press the O key to select it The phone will now enter the Call Number Modify Name Or Number or Erase Name And Number options sub menu m sss Personal s Last Ten 5 Numbers Calls Fixed Dialling My Phone Number s One Touch 2 Dial Setting Call Number Modify Name Or Number or Erase Name And Number Options Once a Phone Book entry has been selected it can be called modified or deleted Call Number This option is used to call the selected Phone Book telephone number Modify Name Or Number This option is used to change the selected Phone Book entry The entry s current telephone number and name will be presented in turn for modification You can accept the current settings or modify as required Erase Name And Number This option is used to erase the selected Phone Book entry Simply press the O key when the phone displays the messageErase Name And Number The option will display the timed message Erased XXX and then return to the Fi nd Entry menu item Add Entry This option is used to add store entries to the Phone Book You can choose to add the new entry to either the phone or SIM card memory locations Add To Phone Memory Add To SIM Card Memory Once you have selected the destination of the new entry you will be
227. ervice Centre Expiry Period Outgoing Message Type Menu Navigation Ln WC Your phone supports the two GSM message features Short Message Services SM S and Cell Broadcast SMS Messages These are text messages that are sent specifically to and from your phone number When an SM S message is received your phone 1 Makes three short alert tones depending on the Ring or Vibrate setting 2 Displaystheo messages icon Stores the message for later viewing if there is space If there is not enough space theo icon will flash One or more messages must be removed before the message can be stored Your Cellular Service Provider will transmit a message for a limited amount of time If a memory location is not made available before the message is removed from the network then you will not be able to receive or read it Using the Options Menu 43 English Cell Broadcast Messages These are general messages broadcast to a group of phones and can only be received when your phone is in standby mode These messages are broadcast in numbered channels and in general each channel will tend to carry one particular type of information Typical cell broadcast channels could have information on local weather conditions traffic reports or stock market prices Please contact your network operator for a list of available channels and the information they supply When the message has scrolled across the d
228. eset option will perform the following Clear the Last Calls M ade and Last Calls received list Clearthe Message Editor operations Reset the Resettable Call Timers Cancel Automatic Answer Audible Call Timers In Call Display Master Clear does not clear the Meter Battery Save DTX Auxiliary Alert Automatic Fixed Dial list em Automatic Lock Cell Broadcast and Talk and Fax My Number s list Charge Meters Return Language Selection to Original Received and Outgoing Messages list Restore Keypad Tones to Normal Ringer Tones to Standard Volume Level to M edium and Network Search frequency to M edium Reset the expiry period for SM S messages to 24 hours and the Message Type to Text Using the Options Menu 51 English Network Selection Network Selection Menu Network Network Selection Selecion In order for the phone to make and receive phone calls it must register with one of the available networks K Your phone automatically searches for the last network used If E for any reason this network is unavailable your phone will attempt to register with a new network Preferences tomatic Search When your phone needs to register with a new network it will sui al Search generate a sorted list of networks The network list is sorted in the Of Search following order L Preferred 52 54 Networks Networks from a preferred list The Home netwo
229. ess should be repeated 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group DISASSEMBLY GSM 8700 6700 Disassembly Introduction Before disassembly is started the antenna connector cap at the top of the phone has to be removed to allow full separation Reasonable care should be taken during the disassembly and reassembly of the unit in order to avoid damaging or stressing the housing and internal components Ensure that a properly grounded high impedance conductive wrist strap is used while performing these procedures on electronic units CAUTION Many of the integrated circuit devices used in this equipment are vulnerable to damage from static charges Ensure that adequate static protection is in place when handling shipping and servicing the internal components of this equip ment 1996 Motorola Inc Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended for use during the disassembly and reassembly of the phone Anti Static Mat Kit 01 80386 82 includes Anti Static Mat 66 80387A95 Ground Cord 66 80334B36 Wrist Band 42 80385A59 Dental Pick Rear Housing Removal Tool 81 09972N01 Plastic Prying Tool SLN7223A Disassembly Procedure The following information describes the procedure for removing and accessing various parts of the 5 8700 g o o 3 lt NOTE Refer to Figure 10 GSM 8700 Mechan i
230. essories Before using your phone in a vehicle powered by liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane ensure that the vehicle complies with the relevant fire and safety regulations of the country in which the vehicle is to be used Safety Standards This Cellular Telephone complies with all applicable RF safety standards This cellular telephone meets the standards and recommendations for the protection of public exposure to RF electromagnetic energy established by governmental bodies and other qualified organisations such as the following Verband Deutscher Elektroingenieure VDE DIN 0848 Directives of the European Community Directorate General V in Matters of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Energy National Radiological Protection Board of the United Kingdom GS 11 1988 American National Standards Institute ANSI IEEE C95 1 1992 National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements NCRP Report 86 Department of Health and Welfare Canada Safety Code 6 Battery Safety To prevent injury or burns do not allow metal objects to contact or short circuit the battery terminals Make sure that the battery terminals do not touch greasy objects Do not immerse the battery in water or dispose of in a fire Ensurethat the battery is disposed of using the proper facilities f you need to replace the battery make sure that you use only the approved battery type Theuse of other types of bat
231. eypad board assembly incorporates the display keypad contacts and mylar switches alert transducer vibrator and earpiece speaker The display is glued to the board by a foam gasket with electrical connections via a short flex strip Also on the keypad board are the 6 pin contacts for the SIM card the mute and volume button contacts and magnetic reed switch The RF Logic board consists of the Audio 1996 Motorola Inc Logic circuitry on both sides of the lower half of the board and the RF circuitry on the top half Electrical connections between the two sides of the board are provided by feed through connectors at various points on the board Also on the main board are the acces sory connector the battery contacts and the microphone plug socket The microphone sits in a small pocket in the keypad membrane itself and connects to the main board via two wires terminated in a plug The accessory connector situated at the base of the phone on the main board allows connections to the audio logic circuitry and antenna for accessory applications such as a mobile adaptor and chargers When the accessory RF connector is used the RF to the top antenna is disconnected Grounding shields with removable covers on the main board provide electrical isolation and protection to the RF circuits Interconnection between the two main boards takes place via a 41 pin female connector situated on the display board and a corresponding male conn
232. flip The top of the closed flip will have a symmetrical escutcheon pocket positioned 3 mm from the top of the flip The general shape will have rounded corners The nameplate will contain Motorola branding centered in gold on a flossy black background to be placed in the escutcheon pocket The printing appears behind a coating of clear plastic The only printing on the nameplate will be the Motorola logo in gold letters PSP GSM GC87 Page 1 of 4 9 August 1996 MOTOROLA CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY Greater China Cellular Subscriber Division Product Service Preview GSM GC87 Keypad The same as GSM 8500 N05 Look II External Keys are the same as the International 8500 including a SIM eject and volume up and down key and dedicated mute key The earpiece will be similar to the 8500 however it will have additional slots in the recessed oval ring A new dynamic speaker design will be used to enhanced audio quality The SIM card is similar to the 8500 Compatibility The GC87 is backward compatible with the existing GSM batteries and accessories Feature enhancements Same as GSM8500 with the minor MMI differences Battery Meter Graphic has been improved Fast Access Menu now includes on screen image feedback Fast Access 0 no longer functions Previously it controlled the ringer volume NOTE Consult user manual for operation and description of the above new features Field Service Plan L 0 Exp Exch Not available in PRC L
233. for calculation Trouble shoot as Batt DAC AGC SIMPLE CAMP This test the radio camp the cell on channel 62 by the computer s command It is not the radio itself to look for the broadcast channel and camp to it Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 407670 The test bay will do 1 Set the radio in test mode 2 Set the HP 8922 to channel 62 60 dBm 3 Send a command to the radio to camp on channel 62 Spec 0 2 seconds Test Procedure 1 Set your HP8922 to Active Cell CH62 Amp 60 dBm 2 Set the radio in Test M ode with the butt plug of 8 V olt 3 Key in 33062 4 Check the camp status by Uniphase EMMI Camping Request Camp Status Y ou should see Radio Camped Trouble Shooting 1 Set the Radio on Test M ode with Battery Input of 7 5 V 2 Key in 330014 check the voltage on CR 250 should be about 2 2 5 V Key in 331244 check the voltage on CR250 should be about 2 8 3 V Check here for 2 to 3 V olt 3 Set the HP8922 Active Cell Ch62 70dB m 4 Key in 110624 08 you should see The amplitude should greater than 0 7 V with HP8922H amp 70 dBm Osc Scop Key in 330628 you ll see gt 0 7 V p p on 70 dBm input Osc Scop Check AFC Table If all set to 125 re phase the radio RA U 705 If you see the above the radio 90 NT re phase the radio If it fail again CD U501 AGC COEFF 00
234. g 1 102 dBm TX CH 124 level 5 The audio downlink is to check the path of the circuitry that was shown above 1 Set up as the test procedure 2 Check the path as below 1Khz Here After 36 U802 ia 1 Khz Here After 475 3 U803 Should be Low After 36 0802 20 59 Low I After 430 3 If no 1 K hz output on U 803 1 after 36 CD U 803 If no 1 K hz output U 802 5 after 475 Check for US on 801 pins 46 47 48 U 802 p1 2 amp 7 or CD 0802 CHANGE RF DN HIGH LOW CH Hi Channel 1 TX CH 124 Low Channel 124 TX 1 This is not a test the test bay do the changing of the RF setting The test bay will Set Hp8922 Cell Cntl 1 ampl 103 dBm DN amp 85 UP 124 level 5 There will be no failure on this test Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 527670 RXLEVEL HI LOW CH Hi Channel BCH 1 TX CH 124 Low Channel 124 TX CH 1 Totestthe Receive Level on High Channel at 5 6 Volt This test is the continuos of the previous test T his test compare with the analog isa SINA D test Test Procedure Setup HP8922 Cell Status 1 ampl 102 dBm TX 124 level 5 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 V olt 2 Wait until it camp 3 Make a phone call by key in 123 OK 4 After connected check the RX level on HP8922 should be 4 or higher 5 Decrease the power supply voltage to 5
235. g n5 i ENA vist N de ofS ES og P Nea m 7 0 0 28 vg unm E 198 im T i p i RW gl es wA D 10 gt 5 amp s 1038 Ps T 782 V 29 ler KP_EN3 Ths nod luo KPEN xl leo KP_ENA Ng Bg Dis ii Ime _ _ 2 a lan TET _ le oA ag 9 jt Ag 31 1500 NCO MT 101 1 pie Ir PI he VM 2 2 109 D ver is lar RHC RH 8 I ag im 10682108 x e Y E ue w mE 3 5 SIZ 125 tus cis e EN TCTWO4FU 5 i Ru Hye E E D i n 5 Mp n3 x ST 3550707 2 amp Aur vssra 2 eT m N EJ vi ALERT gt ds PG verdt um s ag 3 Ne P amp 9 AE a 8 8 ou Na ate y ka 2000 11 10V IN KR BU ct tkaa irBilns Seep es tee se DD le Xm GTR EERE ER RES EEE EB eee BE BB 1 NM Wr 29 E E BACKGROUND MODE CONNECTOR 4544 44 48 4 48 So S 83 ET Sm Es So ST SZ bq 18 4p ST Ts T 3 54 Ta 108 SZ 724 ss 2763 lar ptt y Los ciga ALERT olu E alal EISE 2 gl g a amp J z 1 ia Eum KE z s z 5 og 04 T 1P55 Es g a z z z T
236. g list if you have this feature Fixed Dialling allows you to limit use of your phone to particular numbers or if you wish to country codes area codes or other prefixes of your choosing Each Phone Book entry comprises A telephone number Up to 32 digits can be stored but this is reduced to 20 digits for SIM card locations A name Up to 16 characters for phone locations Up to 50 characters for SIM card locations but typically 10 or less A location label from 1 to 255 in your Personal Numbers list or 1 to 20 in your Fixed Dial list 1 Availability of the Fixed Dialling feature depends on the type of SIM card you have Postscripting This allows you to make use of area codes and other prefixes previously stored in your Phone Book when making a call To use postscripting select the Phone Book entry containing the prefix and then simply enter the rest of the number and press O to make the call You can also use postscripting if you want to call a number similar to one you have stored in your Phone Book Retrieve the number from the Phone Book delete the relevant digits and then enter the new number Postscripting a number does not overwrite the entry in the Phone Book Using The Phone Book Menu 27 English How to Enter Alphabetic Characters Available Characters TheO 1 8 and9 keys are used to enter Press the appropriate keys to get the following characters alphabetic characters for exa
237. ger w Visual Silence Keypad Tones Adjustable earpiece volume Adjustable ringer volume Silence Scratchpad Call in Absence Indicator Display Signal Strength continuous Display Battery Level continuous Audible Low Battery Warning Status Review Microphone Mute Illuminated Display Backlight Display Dedicated Control Keys User Definable Wake Up Test Call Placement Features VibraCall Alert Selectable Ringer Tones Selectable Keypad Tones Short Extended and Personalized Menu List Auto Redial Clear Last Digit Mute Control International Access Key Sequence User Call Rejection Pre origination Dialling Memories Numbered SIM Card Dependent on SIM Last 10 Numbers Dialed Last 10 Numbers Received if using CLI Notepad Last Number Entered Turbo Dialling 9 Numbers 1 Touch Dial Quick Access Alpha Name Storage Recall by Name or Location Memory Linking Pause Memory Auto Load Memory Scroll Alpha Name Scrolling Memory Capacity Signalling Long Tone DTMF from Memory Postscripting Menu Operation Silent Alert Call Diverting Barring Via the Menu Calling Line Identification Present and Restrict Call Waiting Call Hold Master Clear Master Reset DTX Discontinuous Transmission 112 Emergency Call Origination Present 2 x 12 Icons LCD Dot Matrix KN KK X x x X x x x x x x x x Z 5 x M X x x x x gt x gt x gt x e x 24 x x x lt x x x x gt x gt gt x KK KKK
238. ground the RF to the top antenna is disconnected Grounding shields on the main board provide electrical isolation and protection to the RF circuits Interconnection between the two main boards takes place via a 41 pin female connector situated on the display board and a corresponding male connector on the main board Operating power for the personal telephone can be obtained from various methods including the following l The Super Slim Battery Lithium SNN4383 This rechargeable Lithium Ion battery pack is the lightest Motorola battery offered for the International 8700 2 The Super Slim Battery NiCad SNN4467 3 Ultra Slim Battery NiCad SNN4132 4 Ultra Slim Battery NiMH SNN4283 5 The Slim XT Battery NiCad SNN4102 6 The Standard Battery NiCad SNN4027 7 Standard XT Battery NiMH SNN4259 8 The Cigarette Lighter Adaptor SLN9933 The battery charger plugs into the accessory connector socket situated at the base of the telephone and a vehicle s cigar lighter socket As well as providing a battery charging function the adaptor provides power directly to the phone whilst it is in use even with a dead battery 9 Vehicle Adaptor Kits There are various vehicle adaptor kits available They all provide power to the unit from the vehicle s own electrical system via the accessory connector socket located at the base of the phone All the kits offer battery charging as s
239. gs when you first receive your phone Some features are in the Short Menu and are shown in bold type Other features are in the Extended M enu and appear in shaded italics these features do not appear when you first scroll through the menus You can change which features appear in the Short and Extended M enus and therefore personalise the menus to suit your requirements If you want to move a feature from the Short M enu to the Extended Menu or from the Extended M enu to the Short M enu go to the feature and then hold down the O key until a prompt appears offering the following choices Add the current feature to the Short Menu Extended M enu Leave the current feature in the Short Extended M enu Select the option you want by pressing the O key a The settings for some menu features cannot be changed Menu Navigation Using The Phone Dook Menu 0 What is the Phone Book You can store names and telephone numbers as entries in an electronic Phone Book These entries are stored in the Personal Numbers list in your phone or SIM card s memory and in the Fixed Dial list on your SIM card Once stored a number can be quickly retrieved and dialled Your phone can store 100 entries and the SIM card can store up to 155 entries in the Personal Numbers list The number of SIM card entries will vary depending upon the type of SIM card issued by your Cellular Service Provider You can also store up to 20 entries in a Fixed Diallin
240. h with the base of the phone it is inserted correctly To remove the SIM card from the unit push the sliding SIM card release button downwards The card will then be pushed out far enough to allow complete removal The User Guide contains full information about inserting and removing the SIM card 1 17 97 Testing Accessing The Manual Test Mode When the Test SIM card is in place power up the telephone Once the initial automatic wake up sequence has taken place correctly depress the key on the units keypad for three seconds After three seconds TEST should appear in the display indicating that the unit is now in the Manual Test Mode Table 5 GSM Test Commands on page 15 shows the available Manual Test commands and their corresponding results If a customer should forget the secu rity code in their unit it can only be read or changed by using a Test SIM card Table 5 GSM Test Commands Key Sequence Test Function Name hold down for 2 seconds Enter manual test mode 01 Exit manual test mode 02xxyyy Display modify TX power level DAC amp load calibration table 03x 05x Initiate Exec Error Handler Test 07x Mute RX audio path 08 Unmute RX audio path 09 Mute TX audio path 10 Unmute TX audio path 11xxx Program main LO to channel 12xx Set TX power level to fixed value 13x Displa
241. hannels 1 through 8 repeating the usage of those channels used by cell A In this system subscribers in cell A and subscribers in cell D could simulta neously operate on channels 1 through 8 The implementation of frequency re use increases the call handling capability of the system without increasing the number of available channels When re using identical frequencies in small area co channel inter ference can be a problem The GSM system can tolerate higher levels of co channel interference than analogue systems by incorporating digital modulation forward error correction and equalization This means that cells using identical frequencies can be physically closer than similar cells in analogue systems Therefore the advantage of frequency re use can be further enhanced in a GSM system allowing greater traffic handling in high use areas By incorporating Time Division Multiple Access TDMA several calls can share the same carrier The carrier is divided into a continuous stream of TDMA frames each frame is split into eight time slots When a connection is required the system allocates the subscriber a dedicated time slot within each TDMA frame User data speech data for transmission is digitized and sectioned into blocks The user data blocks are sent as information bursts in the allocated time slot of each TDMA frame see Figure 3 TDMA Transmission on page 7 1 17 97 The data blocks are mod
242. he donor unit into the recipient unit using a Transfer card Part No 5104025D01 The instruction steps should be followed in order Insert the Transfer card into the slot located on the back of the donor unit Turn the donor unit on the display should show Clone Step 1 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 The donor unit is now in the cloning mode and ready to transfer the first block of data Enter 021 via the units keypad This command will cause the first block of information to be uploaded into the Transfer card While data transfer is taking place between the unit and the card Please Wait will be displayed After a short period of time if the data transfer has been completed correctly Clone will re appear in the donor units display When the first data block has been successfully uploaded remove the card from the donor Insert the Transfer card into the slot located on the back of the recipient unit Turn the recipient unit on the display should show Clone The recipient unit is now in the cloning mode and ready to receive the first block of data Enter 03 via the units keypad This command will cause the recipient unit to download the first data block from the Transfer card While data transfer is taking place between the card and the unit Please Wait will be displayed After a short perio
243. he battery is almost discharged the phone will automatically turn off HAcc8 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE ACCESSORIES BATTERY PACKS Cellular Subscriber Group ULTRA SLIM STANDARD XT 600 mA Hour 1300 mA Hour Figure 1 Rechargeable Battery Pack Dimensions and Connections RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACKS 1 INTRODUCTION battery packs The dimensions and contact configuration of The International 8700 personal cellular telephones can the rechargeable battery packs are shown in figure 1 operate from 6 0V dc Nickel Metal Hydride rechargeable Each battery pack is housed in a sealed polycarbonate case Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom HAcc8 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 39 40 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE which provides superior impact resistance Removal of the battery pack is accomplished through a quick release latch If required refer to the Disassembly Instructions in this manual for battery pack removal and replacement information 2 CADMIUM FREE In today s global economy there are increasing efforts to protect both the environment and the health and welfare of the population Although there are several suppliers of Nickel Metal Hydride cells while all are lead and mercury free Motorola has chose
244. hone a Microphone connections to Keypad Display board defective Gain access to the Microphone as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Check connections and if OK proceed to b b Microphone defective Gain access to microphone located on keypad membrane Disconnect and substitute a known good Microphone Place a call and verify improvement in portable transmit signal as heard by called party If good re assemble portable with new Microphone If Microphone is not at fault re install original Microphone and proceed to c c Keypad Display board is defective Replace Keypad Display board refer to symptom 1d If Keypad Display board is not at fault re install original Keypad Display board and proceed tod d Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly refer to symptom Ic Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB 6 Portable telephone receive audio is weak and or distorted a Connections to from Keypad Display circuit board defective Gain access to Keypad Display board as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Check connection from earpiece to Keypad Display circuit board If connection is not at fault proceed to b b Earpiece speaker defective Gain access to earpiece speaker as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Substitute a known good earpiece speaker Place
245. hown 5 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 2 dBm T0 ODHS 6 5 dBm See Power Step 0 Procedure PA Control Operation Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 327670 f no TX Power at all Check U 300 for 108 M hz 794 4 M hz and 902 4 Mhzas Shown 108 Mhz 794 4 Mhz 25 dBm ipei 902 4 Mhz 10 dBm If the above looks good but fail for Power Step 0 Power 1 Key in 110622 12012 310 2 Y ou should see this on HP8922H gt Anl Center Frequency 902 4 Mhz Span 1 Mhz Ref Level 42 dBm Check the TX Power on HP8922H gt Active Cell gt Ch 62 gt TX Power 01 It should be within 27 4 dBm The Cable loss about 2 5 dBm 3 If you see this Check negative supply for ripple Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 337679 TUNE POWER BAND X DAC POWER BAND X This test check the radio s frequency variation where x is the band Band1 Channel 1 Band 1 5 Channel 37 Band 2 5 Channel 87 Band3 Channel 124 The Test Bay will do 1 Set TX Power to level 1 2 Set the channel to x 3 Initiate pulse carrier with pseudo random data midamble 0 4 M easure the TX Power 5 Calculate offset value of different channel by using equations 6 Store the 4 frequency Offset values 16 Power level 2 detector offset values power range threshold and final step in EEPROM Test Procedure similation Power up the radio with Battery Input of 7 V olt Key in 11xxx 121
246. hz for F5 4 Key in 37 Clear 11062 1210 264095 40 5 Read the frequency as Fb F5 Fb 67 43104 46 x 2 Example F5 902 383 336 Hz 67 000 Hz 43104 46 x 2 42 Khz It is positive because compare with Fc 902 4 hz itis higher then 902 4 M hz Trouble Shooting Trouble shooting refer to Pull Range amp TX Freq Low Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 357679 AFC COEFF C30 20 10 amp Test Bay useing equations to calculate the coefficients of 00 to C30 and store these four calculated curve coefficients and DAC Offset value in EEPROM Test Procedure There is no similar test for the hand set command Do the AFC Phasing by the Uniphase If the radio pass the AFC test it proprably is NT Trouble Shooting 1 Do the Pull Range test 2 Set the channel to 62 TX level 15 Setthe AFC DAC 0 585 1170 1755 2340 2925 3510 amp 4095 By using 26 Check the frequency amp the TX power respone to the AFC DAC setting Note TheAFC DAC is 585 per step and the frequency step up is about 16 K hz If what you check is close to this reading the radio is NT If the reading is not proportional Check U S W P C247 C203 C201 and C202 BATTERY LOW HIGH MAX CURR MODE Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 367670 This test to phase the Battery Charger and store the DA C value into the EEPROM The test bay will do the folowing 1 Set the extern
247. ialling the Last Number Called 5 Press to turn phone on and off 1 Press O to display the last number dialled Press to see more information on the 2 Press O to call the number operation currently displayed Press to accept call setting option One Touch Dialling Q Press to access the Phone Book menu Press and hold the appropriate digitkey1 109 E Press to access the Quick Access features Storing Numbers in the Phone Book M Pressito NG the Options T 1 Pressand hold Q to access the Phone Book Press to reject call setting option 2 Beso peer oi Making Call to select SIM card memory Enter Phone No O 3 Enter Phone No then Name then Location Receiving a Call Dialling Phone Book Numbers Press O or open the flip Enter Location Ending a Call Quick Access Features Press O or close the flip PressE followed by the appropriate key orpressE scroll to the feature and press to select Making an Emergency Call Enter1 1 2 The call will be directed to a central emergency operator Muting the Phone When in a call press the mute button on the left hand side of the phone iir SS SS Ss a SS SS Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of a cellular telephone from Motorola the world leader in cellular technology All Motorola cellular telephones are manufactured to exacting specifications and world cla
248. ibrator is ON OV when OFF 6 Trace voltage enable back to the B ase of Q1800 verify that the VIB MOT line from J 1101 is going high every few seconds to activate the vibrator circuit Trace this line back to VIB EN to 1801 29 If the VIB EN lineis not toggling ON OFF then there could be a software Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 314679 problem Try reprogramming the EEPROM defaults POWER PHASE INIT To set AFC DAC bu using Load AFC DAC EMMI Command The T est Bay set the AFC DAC to 2340 then test the power in differrnt step spec 0 TUNE POWER STEP 0 1 2 13 14 amp 15 The Test Bay Set the TX Power using Set PA Power Level EM MI Command STPA 0F Step 15 OE Step 14 OD Step 13 02 Step 2 01 Step 1 00 Step 0 Initate pulse carrier with pseudo random data with midamble 0 on Ch 62 The TX Power should be within Specification Step 15 13 4 dBm Step 14 18 4 dBm Step 13 23 4 dBm Step2 23 AdBm Stepl 27 AdBm Step0 32 4 9 Test Procedure Usually the cable loss about 2 dBm 1 Set radio to Test M ode with Battery Input of 7 V 2 Take the RF reading through a Gizmo at the antena pin 3 Key in 11062 1215 set desired power level 0 15 310 4 Read the TX Power on HP 8922H it should be within the Spec Do the same test for other Power L evel Trouble Shooting f The TX Power is off Specification Key in 1106272 1215s 40 and check the path as s
249. ictions you will be requested to enter the Security Code before the change is made English 32 Using The Phone Book Menu Last Ten Calls These options can be used to call the most recently used phone numbers Once an option has been selected usethe lt gt to scroll through the list of phone numbers Press the O key to call the displayed number A You can use postscripting to modify a number once you have retrieved it from either of the Last Ten Calls lists Last Calls Made This option can be used to redial the phone number of any one of the last ten calls made keys Last Calls Received This option can be used to redial the phone number of any one of the last ten calls received A You will only see numbers in the Last Calls Received list if you have Caller Line Identification Erase All Numbers This option erases all the numbers stored in your Last Ten Calls Made and Last Ten Calls Received lists m sss Personal sz Last 5 Numbers Calls My Phone Number s Fixed Dialling One Touch ye Dial Setting My Phone Number s This option allows you to access your cellular phone fax and data numbers so that you can retrieve or modify them when required For example if you have difficulty remembering your cellular phone number store it with the name My Phone and then you will be able to retrieve the number as required The My Phone Number s list is stored on your SIM card Wh
250. idpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke RG21 7PL United Kingdom CLbI3 Motorola Ltd 1996 Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 11 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 68P09304A68 O 12 1 6 96 International 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE MANUAL TEST MODE amp VERIFICATION MANUAL TEST MODE Cellular Subscriber Group MANUAL TEST MODE 3 INTRODUCTION The Motorola International 8700 personal cellular telephones are equipped with a manual test mode capability This capability allows service personnel to take control of the telephone and by entering certain keypad sequences make the telephone perform desired functions To enter the manual test mode a Test SIM card Part No 8102430701 15 required 4 TEST SIM CARD INSERTION REMOVAL The Test SIM card must be inserted into the unit correctly to access manual test mode The whole SIM card should slide completely and securely into the slot at the base of the phone Ensure that the contacts of the card face towards the front of the phone i e towards the flip SIM CARD SLOT TEST SIM CARD FLIP ASSEMBLY INTERFACE CONTACTS Figure 1 Inserting the Test SIM card DTest4 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingd
251. il Once selected this option will leave the M essages menu and automatically make a phone call to the current voicemail number The display will show Cal i ng and standard call operations can be performed The voicemail phone number can be entered by selecting the Voicemail Number option in the M essage Settings sub menu Received Messages This option is used to view and manage any SM S messages that have been sent to your phone number When selected this option will display a message indicating the total number of messages and how many of these are new If there are no messagesNo Messages will be displayed If there are messages the new messages will be displayed first followed by the old Repeated presses ofthe M key will display the whole message when it was sent and the phone number who sent it if available Once you have read a new message it will automatically become old See How to Read SMS M essages for more information on navigating through the messages Press the O key when viewing any message to enter the Go to Next Message Delete Message Return and Edit M essage sub menu Go to Next Message This option will display the next received message If you are currently reading the last message in your list then this option will take you back to the top of the list Delete Message This option will delete the currently viewed message Return Call This option can be used to ca
252. inated Display X Menu Operation X Backlight Display X Silent Alert X Dedicated Control Keys 7 Call Diverting Barring Via the Menu x User Definable Wake Up Test x Calling Line Identification Present and Restrict X Call Waiting X CALL PLACEMENT FEATURES Call Hold x VibraCall Alert X Master Clear X Selectable Ringer Tones X Master Reset X Selectable Keypad Tones X DTX Discontinuous Transmission X Short Extended and Personalised Menu List X 112 Emergency Call Origination X Auto Redial X Clear Last Digit All X COST CONTROL FEATURES Mute Control X International Access Key Sequence x Electronic Lock x User Call Rejection x Automatic Lock x Pre origination Dialling x Programmable Unlock Code x Display Unlock Code x X indicates that the feature is present in the International 8700 BDesc2 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom 68P09304A68 O 1 11 94 7 FEATURE LIST COST CONTROL FEATURES cont Display Call Timers and or Charge Meters Last Call Total Home Roam Programmable Audible Call Timer One Time Repeatable User Defined Automatic Timer Display Charge units currency Minutes Store Charge Rate Home Rate Roam Rate Call Restriction Levels Restrict Keypad Dialing Variable Memory Recall Restriction Restrict Incoming Calls Restrict Phone Number Length Vari Full
253. ination Message Transfer Part MT PP NB NE NET NM NHC O amp M OACSU OCB OMAP OMC OMCR OMCS OSI PAD PCH PDN PIN PLMN POTS 68P09392A89 Mobile Terminated Point to Point messages Normal Burst Network Elements Norme European de Telecommunications Network Management Network Management Center Operations and Maintenance Off Air Call Set Up Outgoing Calls Barred Operations and Maintenance Application Part previously was Operations and Maintenance Center Operations and Maintenance Center Radio Part Operations and Maintenance Center Switch Part Open System Interconnection Packet Assembly Disassembly facility Paging CHannel Public Data Networks Personal Identification Number Public Land Mobile Network Plain Old Telephone Service basic telephone services 1 17 97 Glossary PSPDN PSTN PTO 5 RACH RBDS RBU RCU REC REL RELP LTP REQ RECH REN RLP ROSE RXCDR RXLEV RXQUAL 1 17 97 Public Switched Packet Data Network Public Switched Telephone SABM Public Telecommunications Operator SACCH SAPI Quality of Service SB 5 5 Random Access Burst SCH Random A CH 1 andom Access SCP Remote 55 Diagnostic Subsystem SDCCH Remote Base Station Unit SDL Radio Channel Unit RECommendation SFH RELease SIM Regular Pulse Excitation Long Term
254. inet ASIC Application Specific BSSMAP Base Station Systems Integrated Circuit Management Application Part BSSOMAP BSS Operation and AUC Authentication Center Maintenance Application Part AUT H Authentication BSU Base Site Controller Unit O 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 57 gt 9 o GSM 8700 6700 BTS CA CBCH cc cc CCBS CCH CCCH CFS CFU CLIP CLIR CM COLP COLR CONF CSPDN CUG CW DB DBS DCCH DET DFE 58 Base Transceiver Station Call Allocation Call Broadcast CHannel Call Control Country Code Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers Control CHannel Common Control CHannel Call Forwarding on mobile Subscriber busy Call Forwarding Unconditional Calling Line Identification Presentation Calling Line Identification Restriction Connection Management Connected Line identification Presentation Connected Line identification Restriction Conference Call add on Circuit Switched Public Data Network Closed User Group Call Waiting Dummy Burst Distributed Base Station Dedicated Control CHannel Detach Decision Feedback Equalizer DISC DL Dm Dp DRCU DRX DTAP DTE DTMF DTX Eb No EC Ec No EIR EIRP EMC EMX ETSI 68P09392A89 DISConnect Data Link layer Control Channel ISDN terminology applied to mobile service Signalling channel Dialled Puls
255. ion R Call Voicemail Your phone will make a call to your voicemail number a You must have defined a Voicemail number in order to use this feature See Call Voicemail for more information G Battery Meter A bar graph indicating the approximate battery charge level will be displayed The more bars displayed the greater the charge level See Show Battery Meter for more information English 62 Using the Quick Access Menu H Lock Now Immediately locks your phone you will not be able to use your phone until the unlock code is entered See Phone Lock for more information N Adjust Ring This option is used to display and to set the incoming call ring tone volume L Vibrate On Off VibraCall will be switched either on or off depending on the current setting If VibraCall is switched on the Ring or Vibrate setting changes to Vi brate Only If VibraCall is switched off the Ring or Vibrate setting changes to Ringer Only See Ring or Vibrate for more information P Divert On Off Unconditional call diversion will be switched either on or off depending on the current setting a You must have defined a diversion number using the Divert All Calls option in the Call Diverting menu in order to use this feature a You cannot switch call diverting on or off if you are outside GSM coverage V Switch Memory Switches one touch dialling between the phone and SIM memories depen
256. ir Procedure on page 40 36 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting Is 2 75 present at U701 pins 45 46 58 and 59 Proceed to 5 NPU Repair Procedure on page 41 Does U900 pin 30 reset line go high Proceed to 6 NPU Repair Procedure page 41 Remove any short on the watchdog pull up pads R904 Does U900 pin 31 watchdog line go high Proceed to 7 NPU Repair Procedure on page 41 YES Tie the watchdog line high by shorting the watchdog pull up pads R904 o 55 ge 25 a Is CE signalling present at U702 and 705 at pins 26 and 27 respectively Proceed to 8 NPU Repair Procedure on page 42 1 17 97 68P09392A89 37 GSM 8700 6700 Is CS signalling present at U704 at pins 39 and 40 Proceed to 9 NPU Repair Procedure on page 42 Is OE signalling present at U705 pin 1 Proceed to 10 NPU Repair Procedure on page 42 Radio is resetting Proceed to 11 NPU Repair Procedure on page 43 a 35 09 FS 38 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting 1 Repair Procedure No 6 5V dc battery supply voltage present at pin 40 of U900 Check the PCB battery contact assembly for dry joints to the PCB or broken contacts
257. is answered the first pause will produce a delay of three seconds before the tones for 1066 are sent to select the mailbox There will be a second pause of three seconds before the tones for2001 are sent as the password GSM Emergency Calls The worldwide GSM network provides a standard number 112 to dial in cases of emergency Provided that your phone has found a network you will be able to make an emergency call The call can be made regardless of any security codes and depending on the network with or without a SIM card inserted The emergency call will be directed to a central emergency operator To dial the GSM emergency number press 1 1 2 While the emergency call is being made and connected the display willshow Emergency Calling English 20 Making and Receiving Phone Calls Receiving a Phone Call To receive a phone call Your phone must be switched on and unlocked You must be in an area where there is GSM service Your Call Diversion and Call Barring settings should not be set to divert or bar incoming calls When your phone receives a call it will ring or vibrate and the display will show the Cal message if you have Caller Line Identification the caller s number or name will be displayed instead To answer the call press O or open the flip If the signal strength is weak then extend your antenna If you do not wish to answer a call you can either Press and release the key
258. isplay the beginning of the message will be shown until you either remove it or a new message arrives How to Read SMS Messages You can usethescrollkeys M lt gt to scroll through messages in either the Received M essages or Outgoing M essages lists To display a specific message enter the message number for example press 5 display the 5th message If the message does not exist nvali d Msg Number will be displayed Alternatively to display the next message press O and selectGo To Next Message English 44 Using the Options Menu How to Create and Edit SMS Messages Use the M essage Editor to create or modify text messages When you enter the editor the last message that was edited will be displayed Press and hold to clear the message and start new one or modify the message displayed For an explanation of how to enter text see How to Enter Alphabetic Characters in the Using The Phone Book Menu section Press O once you have completed your message You will then be presented with the following options Send Message If you select this option you will be prompted for a phone number enter the number and then press O to send the message Store Message Select this option to store your edited message in your Outgoing M essages list A If you don t store the message after it has been edited you will lose all your changes as soon as you select another message to be edited 0 Call Voicema
259. ives you both wired and wireless connection options in a single PC card Compatible Accessories If you already have existing accessories for a MicroTAC phone the following accessories are recommended for use with this phone Simple Micro Car Kit no hands free 53060 Rapid Charger Base SLN9347 Transformer UK SPN4111 Transformer Euro SPN4112 Requires a new connector cable SKN4636 Other MicroTAC accessories may work with your phone but with some limitations Please contact your M otorola representative for qetails What to do if You can t switch your phoneon Check the battery Is it charged properly fitted and are the contacts clean and dry See Important Battery Information You can t make calls Check the antenna Is it fully extended Check the signal strength meter in the display If the signal is weak move to an open space or if you are in a building move closer to a window Check the Network Selection settings Try Manual Selection or try another network See Network Search Check your Operator coverage map 15 Restricted displayed Check the Call Barring and Fixed Dialling settings Has the call charge limit been reached Use your PIN2 code to reset the limit or contact your Service Provider See Set Total Charge Limit Has a new SIM card been inserted Check that no new restrictions have been imposed You can t receive calls Check the antenna Is it fully extended Check the signal s
260. l Charger is a mains transformer with a built in rectifier Circuitry inside the box converts the ac mains to a9V dc supply The output lead has a plug termination which fits into the accessory socket on the base of the International 8700 portable phone Any battery fitted to the phone will be charged while the transformer is attached HAcc8 Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom The Travel Charger monitors the battery feedback line pin 10 in the external connector to provide optimal supply voltage The Travel Charger is also used to supply power to the Desktop Rapid Intellicharge 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 43 44 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 2 MODEL COMPLEMENT Due to the variation in countries mains power supply voltage two versions are available Travel Charger Transformer Euro SPN4222A Travel Charger Transformer UK SPN4221A 3 OPERATION A green LED on the transformer indicates that mains power is switched on When the chargeris plugged into the personal phone the phone will switch on if not already to allow for normal operation 68P09304A68 O The battery icon in the display flashes as the battery is being charged As the battery reaches the fully charged condition the icon flashes at a slower rate until it is on continuously The internal charger operati
261. l components J1101 Q1800 and Q1801 34 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Troubleshooting Table 8 Logic Processing Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Logic Processing Probable Cause Verification and Remedy Symptom 6 Vibrator C Logic RF Board Assembly 1 Replace Logic RF Board Assembly dene 2 Place call to portable phone and verify that 9 the fault has been eliminated 3 Logic RF Board Assembly is at fault examine it for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components J2 and U701 1 17 97 68P09392A89 35 55 58 55 55 a GSM 8700 6700 Troubleshooting Supplements Logic Processing Supplement 1 Unit Doesn t Power Up NPU START Apply power to the radio Is 6 5V dc present at U900 pin 40 Proceed to 1 NPU Repair Procedure page 39 Press the power key to initiate PCB power up process You will have to press the power key each time you wish to take a reading unless you tie the watchdog circuitry high adding a 10k resistor to the pads at R772 Are U900 pins 22 and 28 at 2 75V Proceed to 2 NPU Repair Procedure page 39 Is 13MHz clk present at U201 pin 57 Proceed to 3 NPU Repair Procedure on page 40 a 35 09 FS Is 13MHz clk present at U703pin17 Proceed to 4 NPU Repa
262. l do the following Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 727670 1 Set up HP8922 BCH 124 90 dBm TCH 1 TX level 5 2 Power up the radio with the Batterty Input of 6 V olt 3 Verify the radio is camped 4 Originate a call from the H P8922 5 Change the TX level from 5 to 15 6 Increase RF level of the BCH to 85 dBm 7 Change the TCH from 1 to 62 7 V erify the radio stay in the phone call Spec 4 Trouble Shooting U sually there is failure this test because the major thing to test the radio is to switch the channel 1 1 to channel 62 and this is done by item Change RF UP DN IF does fail it may be caused by the bad software END CALL ERROR To test the radio for ending a call W e end the call by either close the flip or press The Test Bay will do the following Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 737670 1 Setup HP8922 BCH 124 85 TCH 62 TX level 15 2 Power up the radio with the Batterty Input of 6 V olt 3 Verify the radio is camped 4 Originate a call from the H P8922 5 After connected the test bay send out a command END to end the call This is similate to to key in END in the key board Spec 1 Trouble Shooting Usually there is no failure on this test because the major thing to test the radio is from the DownL ink J 400 4 from the EMMI to tell the radio to terminate the call IF it does fail it may be caused by the bad software BATTER
263. l need to unblock and change the code using the following key sequence 0 5 2 Unblock Code O New PIN2 Code O New PIN2 Code O A The8 digit unblocking code will have been provided with your SIM card by your Cellular Service Provider the PIN2 unblocking operation is performed incorrectly 10 times in a row your PIN2 code will become permanently blocked Using the Options Menu 49 English 0 New Security Code The security code is used to control access to security and other options within the menus This option is used to change the security code which is set at manufacture to 000000 Once selected you will be asked to enter the current security code before you can proceed You will then be asked to enter a new six digit code to replace the old security code a In order to safeguard your phone you should change your security code from the factory setting as soon as possible 0 Extended Menus L Press and hold M Extended Menus will be temporarily activated until you exit the Options menu This option is used to switch the extended menus on or off If the extended menu option is switched off you will not be able to access any of the extended features The option has two settings or Off English 50 Using the Options Menu 0 Language Selection This option is used to change the language for display messages The option has multiple settings When you select a language all further displa
264. l not recharge replace the battery If battery is not at fault proceed to b b Battery connectors misaligned open or Visually inspect the battery connectors on both the battery assembly and the portable telephone Re align and if necessary replace either the battery orthe battery connector assembly Removing the battery connector assembly has to be done with extreme care to avoid damaging the PCB If battery connectors are not at fault proceed to c Logic RF Board Assembly defective Gain access to Keypad Display main board as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Remove the Logic RF Assembly Substitute a known good assembly Temporarily connect a 6 V dc supply to the battery connectors as shown below Depress the PWR button if unit turns on and stays on disconnect the dc power source and reassemble the telephone with the new Logic RF Board assembly and refer to Section 3 Testing After Repair If Logic RF Board Assembly is not at fault re install original Logic RF Board Assembly and proceed to d 46V GND Accessory Connector Battery Connectors LOGIC RF BOARD d Keypad Display circuit board failure Replace the Keypad Display board Temporarily connect a 6 V dc supply to the battery connectors as shown above Depress the PWR button if unit turns on and stays on disconnect the dc power source and reassemble the telephone with the new Keypad Display board 2 Por
265. l remove the selected network from the preferred list English 54 Using the Options Menu Network Selection Find New Network When selected the phone will try to register with network in the normal manner with one exception When the registration attempt is made your current network will be excluded from the list of those available If the attempt fails your phone will then try to re register with the previous network Call Meters Menu Call Meters II Charges Show Call Charges TY Show Last Call f Total For All Calls H p Credit Remaining Show Call Timers gt Show Last Call Total For All Calls Reset All Timers Set Audible Call Timers ri Single Alert Timer n pee LJ Repetitive SE On 1 Set In Call Display gt 1 gt Show Time Per Call Show Charge Per Show Total Call Charges Lu No In Call Display ings ESS TER Call Charge Settings Reset Call Charges I x ge Units Currency Menu Navigation x KC Items shown in are available only when Extended Menus are switched on Availability depends on the type of SIM card Call Metering Your phone has an internal metering system which can be used to provide you with individual and total call times or costs A Call cost information is only available if you receive the Advice of Charge service If you do not receive this servi
266. lish Call Related TRE Features iiu Bar Incoming Calls After selecting this option there will be a short delay while the phone asks the network for the current setting When Roaming When selected this option will bar incoming calls when you are roaming You may wish to select this option as some Cellular Service Providers charge an additional fee for receiving calls when you are roaming All Calls When selected this option will bar all incoming calls Off When selected this option will disable all call barring for incoming calls Change Bar Password This option can be used to change the call barring password After selecting this option you will be asked to enter the current password You will then be asked to enter and then re enter your new 4 digit barring password When the change has been made by the network the phone will display a confirmation message English 42 Using the Options Menu Messages Menu Messages i q Call Voicemail Received Messages er i Go to Next Message Delete Message L Return Call Edit Message Send Message Lr Store Message SI Outgoing Messages a gt Go to Next Message r ME Send Message Edit Message 225 Send Message 2 Store Message IL Delete Message a 9 Store Message E gt Cell Broadcast rr On x 2 i j Massage settings 2 Voicemail Number gt S
267. ll the person who sent you the message if their number has been included by the network or a number that has been included in quotes in the message Edit Message This option allows you to use the M essage Editor to edit the selected message and then to either send the modified message and or store it in your Outgoing M essages list See How to Create and Edit SM S M essages for more information on using the M essage Editor Outgoing Messages This option is used to view and manage any outgoing messages These messages will be stored on your SIM card When you select this option the total number of messages will be displayed followed by the first message in the list A You cannot send an outgoing message until the M essage Service Centre number has been set See essage Settings Press the O key when viewing any message to enter the Go to Next Message Send Message Edit Message and Delete Message sub menu See How to Read SMS Messages for more information on navigating through the messages Go to Next Message This option will display the next outgoing message Send Message If you select this option you will be prompted for a phone number enter the number and then press O to send the message Using the Options Menu 45 English Edit Message This option allows you to use the M essage Editor to edit the selected message and then to either send the modified message or s
268. lows you to speak and then send or receive a fax during the course of a single call A Your phone supports a data and fax transmission speed of up to 9600 bps Before making a Talk and Fax call ensure that Your phone is fax ready it has been switched off connected to the fax then switched back on Connecting your phone to the fax in the middle of the call will not work The Talk and Fax mode is set to On A Talk and Fax call automatically switches to fax mode when you start sending the fax While the fax is being transmitted the messageFax in progress will be displayed The call automatically ends when the fax transmission is complete You cannot switch back to voice mode in the same call a While a Talk and Fax call is active incoming call services like Call Waiting and Call Holding are suspended If you receive a Talk and Fax call when Your phone is not fax ready you can only talk Your phone is fax ready but Talk and Fax mode is off the call is automatically routed to your fax you cannot talk On Switches Talk and Fax mode on for the next and all subsequent calls Off Switches Talk and Fax mode off for the next and all subsequent calls Using the Options Menu 39 English Call Related Messages Features 0 Call Holding and Call Waiting Your phone supports the GSM network options of Call Holding and Call Waiting Using these options you can place a current phone call on hold a
269. luded that the product is fit for use If you are concerned about exposure to RF energy there are things you can do to minimize exposure Obviously limiting the duration of your calls will reduce your exposure to RF energy In addition you can reduce RF exposure by operating your cellular telephone efficiently by following the below guidelines Safety Efficient Phone Operation For your phone to operate at the lowest power level consistent with satisfactory call quality If your phone has an extendable antenna extend it fully Some models allow you to place a call with the antenna retracted However your phone operates more efficiently with the antenna fully extended Hold the phone as you would any other telephone While speaking directly into the mouthpiece position the antenna up and over your shoulder Do not hold the antenna when the phone is IN USE Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed Antenna Care and Replacement Do not use the phone with a damaged antenna If a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin a minor burn may result Replace a damaged antenna immediately Consult your manual to see if you may change the antenna yourself If so use only a manufacturer approved antenna Otherwise have your antenna repaired by a qualified technician Use only the supplied or approved antenna Unauthorised antennas modifications or attachments could
270. lular Subscriber Division DRAWINGS Rev 1 0 GCAP FIX Author Michael Hansen Technical Support Page 2 of 3 5 BH 2 Jean 01801 These two fixes on 6700 only EJ RTET E a LOSIMS R1505 n C1815 cR1807 3 9 s E mE 21506 di 60 1 3 608193 IDSID EET ae re ES B 01704 1 120915 c Om ps ji oe c 0m 09108 oi 9 9 Nb T 4 b 9 LL Add VR 1501 4813830M25 Only 6700 1 GCAP FIX Ref DB034 No 5713 ECN5835 pinl to LS red wire pin 2 and 3 to GND 8409186C09 v2 3 Pages 02 97 Add VR 1502 4813830M25 Only 6700 _ E pin1 to LS black wire pin 2and3 toGND 2 3 Michael Hansen Technical Support HTC Flensburg SCALE 4 1 DATE 09 OCT 9 High Tech Centre Flensburg March 5th 1997 European Cellular Subscriber Division DRAWINGS Rev 1 0 GCAP FIX
271. mage As previously stated however the battery is subject to self discharge and should be recharged after extended storage 6 MEMORY EFFECT A nickel cadmium battery may exhibit a reduced charge capacity memory effect caused by continuous overcharge for long periods or repetitive shallow cycling If the battery pack is lightly or infrequently used and is allowed to charge over a long period 30 60 days it may develop memory effect That is the voltage may be sufficiently lowered on the first discharging cycle to reduce the effectiveness of radio transmission A more common type of memory effect is induced by uniform shallow cycling For example if the battery is operated so that it repeatedly delivers 50 of its full capacity it can temporarily become inactive and when current demand is increased it may show a sharp decrease in its ability to deliver proper terminal voltage If the battery is exhibiting memory effect memory can be easily eliminated by completely discharging the battery deep discharge and recharging again One or two deep discharge cycles are usually sufficient to restore the battery to full capacity New improved chemical processes used by Motorola s cell suppliers have resulted in the virtual elimination of this problem 7 LOW BATTERY WARNING When the battery level becomes too low for normal operation a warning signal two double beeps will sound Low Battery will appear in the display When t
272. mple when storing names in the 1 Space 2 YR i 1 Phone Book or when creating messages TEs Ta eee EN For example if you pressthe 5 key the first displayed 2 ABC 02 character will be If this is not the required character then you 7 02 press the same key again to show Another press will 3 display L another will display 5 Your phone will continue to def XYm 3 scroll through the characters available on the selected key with 4 GHI 4 each new key press M ghiaAS 4 A long press of any of the keys will switch all the characters to lower case a second long press will switch back to upper case 5 i To enter the next character press the appropriate key If 6 MNO 6 however the next character is on the same key as the previous ER cT 6 character you will first need to pressthe key Pressing the mno 7 keya second time will produce a space 7 7 3 If a mistake has been made you can go back to the incorrect Pets d character by pressing 8 Tyv 13 o Characters can be removed from the display by pressing the C 8 key 9 WX 2 9 The character before the cursor 0 is the character which will be WK ase deleted 0 ase lt Press the O key to store the information or a STR The top line s for each key show the upper case characters the lower line s show the lower case English 28 Using The Phone Book Menu
273. ms Check AC level x 1 4 rms This 1Khz tone is a modulation signal and is send out throught the antena 1 Khz 150 mV from Hp8922 HP8922 Scope 350 2850 mv Trouble Shooting Set up HP8922 Cell Ctnl Audio Freq 1 K hz Amp 0 5 V 1 Putthe radio into T est M ode 2 Key in 430 3 Check the 1 K hz signal on 400 p8 with Scope it should be 0 7 V RMS 4 Check the 1 K hz signal 803 p18 it should be 0 3 V U803 0 3 V 0000000000 000000008 If the signal less than 0 4 V trace the signal as shown Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung oopf 507670 1 Camp the radio and wait for 1 second 2 Initiate a phone call 3 Decrease the supply voltage to 6 4 V 4 Send audio 1 K hz tone with amplitude 150 mV rms 5 Verfify the level of the 1 K hz is within specification Spec 440 840 mV Test Procedure Set the HP8922 audio 1 Khz 1 Volt M ake sure the 1 K hz tone on the J 400 p8 1 Power up the radio with the butt plug of 7 5 V 2 Set the radio into T est M ode 3 Key in 430 Enable the audio tone to U 803 18 475 Audio Volume level 5 36 Audio Loop 4 Verify the I Khz on your scope channel 2 it should be about 0 5 V p p This signal goes out from J 400 p7 Volume Control 471 477 Trouble Shooting Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung oorr 517670 If you can make a phone call By settin
274. n to expose the two slots on the shaft Using a small jeweller s screwdriver or tweezers locate the small holes on the hinge cams 68P09304A68 O 29 30 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE Push each hinge cam in turn towards the centre of the flip whilst easing the flip outwards The keypad membrane is easily removed 68P09304A68 O GDis7 1 6 96 DISASSEMBLY PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK GDis7 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 31 DISASSEMBLY INTERNATIONAL 8700 EXPLODED DIAGRAM amp REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST REF PART No DESCRIPTION No S5820AAB Spare Transceiver 1 S5557A Spare Main PCB 2 SLF1993A Spare Keypad PCB 3 0109189C01 Antenna Assembly 4 3809686N03 Antenna Cap 5 0109429C02 Front Housing Assembly 6 1509431C02 Flip 7 6109441C02 Lens with adhesive 9 3809460C01 Volume Buttons 10 3809916N01 Mute Button 11 4183879P27 Spring Compression 12 4709267101 Cam Shaft Right 13 4709267102 Cam Shaft Left 14 5409849N04 Magnet Cover Label 15 5983583N12 Magnet 16 0109124B06 Assembly Card Reader 17 3209317S01 Speaker Felt 18 3209440C01 Gasket Shielding 19 3209523A05 Gasket Shielding 20 3809917N07 Keypad Actuator no Mic socket 21 3509133B05 Mylar Light Trap 22 4009203D01 Keypad Metal Domes 23 0109222502 Vibrator includes rubber 24 5009536 11 25 5009076E02 Speaker Earpiece includes
275. n to use only those that have been tested to be cadmium free 3 CHARGING Nickel Metal Hydride battery packs should only be charged in Motorola approved chargers Do not leave a Nickel Metal Hydride battery pack in a charger for more than 24 hours Overcharging will prevent the battery pack from achieving its maximum life and capacity Battery pack recharging can be accomplished by a number of charging devices including the original IntelliCharge the new E P IntelliCharge desktop rapid charger Overnight desktop trickle charger internal charger and via various vehicle adaptors The Battery Pack should be near room temperature when charging 4 CHARACTERISTICS Each Nickel Metal Hydride battery pack consists of cells connected in series to provide a nominal 6 0V dc output Devices internal to the battery pack provide thermal sensing and short circuit protection The voltage of a Nickel Metal Hydride battery remains approximately constant under load until the battery approaches the discharged condition At this time a marked decrease in the voltage occurs and the discharged condition is reached abruptly AN CAUTION JAN Do NOT allow the battery terminals to become shorted together e g paper clip placed accidentally across the battery contacts when the battery pack is removed from the portable unit Sustained high rate discharges permanently damages the battery voids the battery warranty and may create a burn or fire
276. nd accept an incoming call or start a second call The Call Waiting menu item has two settings On or Off If you select Off you will be not be notified of waiting calls The person trying to contact you will either receive the busy tone or be diverted by the Detailed Diverting If Busy option If Call Waiting is On you will be notified of a waiting call by an audible alert and by the message Cal Waiting Answer You can press the O key to accept the waiting call or use theM key to scroll to an alternative option and then press a If you have Caller Line Identification the caller s number or name is displayed instead of the Call Waiting message Call Holding and Call Waiting Scenarios The display will automatically change according to the status of your current call or calls and will propose the option that you are most likely to want Press O to accept this option or pres M to scroll through the alternative options By following this procedure you will find that even the triple combination of an active call a held call and a call waiting is easy to manage English 40 Using the Options Menu The following points summarise the more common situations end the active call press If you have a call on hold it is automatically connected To put the active call on hold and make another call press M andselecttheHol d Call option then press M again and select the Make New Call option To put the acti
277. nnect Failed The held call could not be made active again Busy Try Later Your phone is still working on a previous command Wait a short time before repeating the command Anonymous The person who is calling you has blocked their number from appearing on your phone Unavailable The network is unable to provide the caller s number 0 Call Barring sss Call barring is a network feature which can be used to selectively bar outgoing and incoming calls If you change the barring setting you may be asked to enter your barring password There will be a short delay while the phone notifies the network of the new setting When the change has been made by the network the phone will display a confirmation message The initial password will be supplied to you by your Cellular Service Provider when you subscribe to this service A This option may be affected by the Fixed Dialling setting Bar Outgoing Calls After selecting this option there will be a short delay while the phone asks the network for the current setting Int l Calls When selected this option will bar outgoing international calls Int Calls Except Home When selected this option will bar outgoing international calls except those to your home country All Calls When selected this option will bar all outgoing calls except emergency calls Off When selected this option will disable all call barring for outgoing calls Using the Options Menu 41 Eng
278. ntal information successfully remove the Master Transfer card erasure see previous section Remove the card and check the radio functions correctly See from the unit and store until required 68P09304A68 O FPers6 22 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PORTABLE Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 1 INTRODUCTION The International 8700 cellular telephone is assembled using a simple press fit between front and back housings Before disassembly is started the antenna cap at the top of the phone and the antenna has to be removed to allow full separation To disassemble the 8700 a special disassembly tool must be used to prevent damaging the phone Reasonable care should be taken during the disassembly and reassembly of the unit in order to avoid damaging or stressing the housing and internal components Ensure that a properly grounded high impedance conductive wrist strap is used while performing these procedures on electronic units ooo Many ofthe integrated circuit devices used in this equipment are vulnerable to damage from static charges Ensure that adequate static protection is in place when handling shipping and servicing 2 RECOMMENDED TOOLS The following tools are recommended for use during the assembly disassembly of the personal telephone e Anti Static Mat Kit 0180386A82 includes Anti Static Mat 66 80387A95 Ground
279. o portable phone and verify that the fault has been eliminated If not at fault proceed to d d Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace the Logic RF board with known good one Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB 9 Vibrator feature not functioning a Vibrator motor defective Gain access to Keypad Display board as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual Check connections if OK unplug the supply wires to the motor and remove the motor Replace the motor with known good one Reassemble unit Place call to portable phone and verify vibrator feature functions If fault still present replace original vibrator motor and proceed to b b Keypad Display defective board Replace the Keypad Display board with known good one Place call to portable phone and verify that the fault has been eliminated c Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly refer to symptom 1 Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB 20 68P09304A68 0 ETrbl5 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PORTABLE CELLULAR TELEPHONE Cellular Subscriber Group PERSONALITY TRANSFER PERSONALITY TRANSFER Step 4 While data transfer is taking place between the unit and the card Please Wait will be 1 INTRODUCTION displayed After a short period of time if the data transf
280. o be defective Troubleshooting And Repair The troubleshooting information in Table 6 Table 7 and Table 8 shows some typical malfunction symptoms and the corre sponding verification and repair proce dures Additionally the Troubleshooting Supplements are offered to assist in correc tive action of more detailed symptoms Refer to the disassembly instructions located in Disassembly on page 21 for instructions on removing and replacing parts assem blies from the personal telephone 1996 Motorola Inc 68P09392A89 If the Logic RF assembly is replaced a personality transfer will be necessary See Personality Transfer on page 17 NOTE Defective Logic RF assemblies must be replaced with pre tested pre phased assemblies Testing After Repair After any repair work has been carried out the unit should be thoroughly tested to ensure that its operates correctly This is especially important if the Logic RF assembly is replaced For general repairs which do not include replacing the Logic RF assembly simply placing a call and checking signal strength and transmit and receive audio quality is normally sufficient When the Logic RF assembly is replaced the unit must have a comprehensive test on a GSM compatible communications analyzers See Testing on page13 for further details Placing call on air is usually carried out at this stage to complete the testing procedure 27
281. o test the radio for turning on when power is supplied Radio power up sequency L2 75 V clock TUTTA Reset L __ Watch dog EEE State 1 2 3 4 5 State 1 W hen the detects a power on request ON OFF line LOW the GCAP will activate the 4 8 V reg while driving the RESET line low The M icroprocessor clock line will take approximately 100 ms to stabilize after power is applied State 2 T he icroprocessor Speech Coder BIC and MODEM IC are connected to the RESET line The norminal time RESET is held low by the DCC is approximatetely 250 mS set by an RC connected to the REXT and CEXT pins respectively State 3 When the GCAP releases Reset itis pulled high by an internal resistor There is a period of approximately 500 nS when neither the GCA P or the microprocessor is asserting R eset State 4 When the M icroprocessor reset control logic detects that the system R eset line is no longer being driven it drive it low for an additional 40 5 Micro seconds 526 cycles State 5 When the M icroprocessor releases R eset itis pulled high by the internal resistor All the processors in the system include the M icroprocessor then being excution During this state the M icroprocessor must driive the GCAP s W atchdog line high within 50 mS or the GCAP will power down the 44 8 V olt regulator There are 5 regulator sources provided by the GCA P 0900 L275 uProcessor EEprom E
282. odes Call barring codes The SIM card may also be capable of storing phone numbers names and messages 2 SIM CARD INSERTION REMOVAL The SIM card must be inserted into the unit correctly so that the card can be read and the data checked for validity before operation on the system will be enabled The card contains all of the user s personal identification numbers and details of the system the phone operates on SIM CARD SLOT TEST SIM CARD FLIP ASSEMBLY INTERFACE CONTACTS Figure 1 Inserting the Test SIM card The whole SIM card should slide completely and securely into the slot at the base of the phone Ensure that the contacts of the card face towards the front of the phone i e towards the flip The sliding card release button will move upwards as the SIM card is inserted When the button reaches the top of its recess and the card is flush with the base of the phone it is inserted correctly To remove the SIM card from the unit push the sliding SIM card release button downwards The card will then be pushed out far enough to allow complete removal The User Guide contains full information about inserting and removing the SIM card 3 SECURITY INFORMATION To stop unauthorized personnel using your SIM card the option of using a Personal Identity Number PIN is available When enabled the option requires on power up a verification number to be entered via the unit s keypad before the
283. of the LAI 64 Display Location Update Status 64x Modify Location Update Status 65 Display IMSI 66xyyy Display modify TMSI 67 Zero PLMN Selector 68 Zero forbidden PLMN list 69x Display modify Cipher Key Sequence Number 70xxyyy Display modify BCCH allocation table 71 Display internal information 72xx Display Passive Fail codes 73xyyy Display modify Logger Control Block 7536778 Initiate transfer to Flash Memory 68P09392A89 1 17 97 MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group PERSONALITY TRANSFER GSM 8700 6700 Personality Transfer Introduction Due to the different variations OEM looks of the GSM 8700 6700 personal cellular tele phones each main board must be config ured correctly to ensure that the unit takes on the correct personality required There fore when a main board is replaced its personality must be transferred into the new board so that it functions correctly in the customers unit There are two possible methods of transfer e Normal Transfer and Master Transfer If the defective unit powers up then the Normal Transfer method should be followed If the faulty unit will not power up then a Master transfer will be required to configure the replacement board once installed Normal Transfer This method allows the personality selected features and stored phone numbers of a defective radio to be transferred into a repaired radio Data is transferred from t
284. of the menus you can either press and hold the C key or repeatedly press the C key Both of these actions will return your phone to the standby mode Alternatively a quicker way to leave the menus is to press E C Menu Navigation Menus and Sub menus A menu is a simple list of options Some of these options provide access to a further list of options called a sub menu When navigating through the menus you may find it is helpful to think in terms of menu levels the parent menu being on one level and its sub menus being on a lower level Moving to and Selecting a Menu Option To move from one option to another on the same level use the scroll keys the keys scroll forwards and the lt key scrolls backwards When you find the option you want press the O key to select it Depending on the option you select one of three things will happen either a brief message will be displayed confirming an action for example Co mpl et ed ora prompt will be displayed requesting you to enter information for example Enter PIN orEnter Name orthe first option of a sub menu will be displayed You can select this option using the O key or browse through the other options using the scroll keys To leave an option or sub menu press the C you back to the parent menu item Menu Options with Security Codes Some options are protected from misuse by requiring you to enter one of the security codes In order to use thes
285. om The sliding card release button will move upwards as the SIM card is inserted When the button reaches the top of its recess and the card is flush with the base of the phone it is inserted correctly To remove the SIM card from the unit push the sliding SIM card release button downwards The card will then be pushed out far enough to allow complete removal The User Guide contains full information about inserting and removing the SIM card 5 ACCESSING THE MANUAL TEST MODE When the Test SIM card is in place power up the telephone Once the initial automatic wake up sequence has taken place correctly depress the key on the units keypad for three seconds After three seconds TEST should appear in the display indicating that the unit is now in the manual test mode Table 1 below shows the available manual test commands and their corresponding results Table 1 Command Result 01 Exit manual test mode 19 Display call processor s w version 20 Display modem s w version 22 Display speech coder s w version 57 Initialize non volatile memory 58 Display security code 58 Change security code 59 Display lock code 59 Change lock code 60 Display International Mobile station Equipment Identity I M E I Note If a customer should forget the security code in their unit it can only be read or changed by using a Test SIM card 13 68P09304A68 1 12 96 14 8700 CE
286. ompleted Data on Card will appear in the display If either situation arises the process should be repeated 4 MASTER SIM CARD CREATION When required a Master SIM card can be created by Step 1 Select the required Master SIM card Step 1 Insert a Transfer card into a unit which is already configured in the desired way Turn the Step 2 Insert the Master Transfer card into the slot unit on the display should show Clone located on the back of the repaired unit Turn the unit on the display should show Clone Step 2 Enter 024 via the unit s keypad This command copies the personality information in the unit Step 3 Enter 03 via the unit s keypad This command onto the Transfer card to create a Master will cause the configuration data to be Transfer card downloaded from the Master Transfer card Step 3 While data transfer is taking place between the Step 4 While data transfer is taking place between the unit and the card Please Wait will be card and the unit Please Wait will be displayed After a short period of time if the displayed After a short period of time if the data transfer has been completed correctly data transfer has been completed correctly Clone will re appear in the recipient unit s Clone will re appear in the recipient unit s display display Step 4 A Master Transfer card has now been created Step 5 When the data block has been transferred Lock the card to prevent accide
287. omponent to identify it Motorola maintains a parts office staffed to process parts orders identify part numbers and otherwise assist in the maintenance and repair of Motorola Cellular products Orders for all parts should be sent to the Motorola International Logis tics Department at the following address When ordering replacement parts or equipment information the complete identi fication number should be included This applies to all components kits and chassis If the component part number is not known the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part and sufficient description of the 1 17 97 68P09392A89 V GSM 8700 6700 General Safety Information Portable Operation DO NOT hold the radio so that the antenna is very close to or touching exposed parts of the body especially the face or eyes while transmitting The radio will perform best if it is held in the same manner as you would hold a telephone handset with the antenna angled up and over your shoulder Speak directly into the mouthpiece DO NOT operate the telephone in an airplane DO NOT allow children to play with any radio equipment containing a transmitter Mobile Operation Vehicle Adaptor As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment users are advised that for satis factory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel it is recommended that no part of the human body shall be
288. on To test the Radio by the computer 1 Hold down the keys Ctrl amp ESC 2 Choose Program M anager 3 Click the TranEraHT Basic Runtime group icon 4 Click the HT Basic Runtime program icon 5 Choose GSM and run the U niphase The Screen will be Trans Era HT Basic Uniphase 26 all pa Battery AFC Phaasing Q Balance AGC EEprom Default 57 Phi Ch Sree te M The test method refer to Return to Main Menu 8200 ODO E3 E3 Y ou can switch back and forth by holding down the Alt amp Tab keys Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung GSM 8700 RADIO MOTOROLA L1 0000 Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 37670 Test Command Test Hold down for 2 seconds 01 ExitTest M ode 02 Table Example 02102 the DAC of power step 10 074 MuteRX Audio Path 08 UnmuteRX Audio Path 09 MuteTX Audio Path 10 Unmute TX Audio Path lbood Program the specified channel xxx 1 to 124 12 Setthe TX power level to fixed setting 0 15 15xx Generate Tone D etail refer to the Tone Definition 00 64 examples key in 434 Portable 477 V olume 1563 The Vibrator will be then the Tone next example 1590s continues vibrator 15914 off vibrator 16 Tone Generator 194 Call Processor V ersion Number 20 Modem Version Number 22 Speech Code V ersion Number 24x Set Step AGC Sets the 25 dB step AGC attenuat
289. on is discussed in more detail on page 38 of this manual 4 MAINTENANCE The Travel Charger is considered non serviceable If it becomes faulty it should be replaced with a new one HAcc8 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE ACCESSORIES CIGARETTE LIGHTER ADAPTOR CHARGER Figure 1 Cigarette Lighter Adaptor Charger E P CIGARETTE LIGHTER ADAPTOR CHARGER 1 DESCRIPTION The cigarette lighter adaptor charger allows an International 8700 to operate using a vehicle s electrical system It simply plugs into a cigarette lighter socket and has a length of coil cord attached which applies power to the accessory connector on the phone A regulator inside the adaptor reduces the vehicle s 12 V down to the phone s normal battery voltage HAcc8 Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom The adaptor can power the phone for call operation even if the phone s battery is fully discharged It also supplies DC power to fast charge a battery when the phone is not in a call but cannot do both at the same time An LED is located on the main body of the adaptor to indicate that it is correctly inserted into the cigarette lighter socket and that DC is applied The Travel Charger monitors the battery feedback line pin 10 in the external c
290. onnector to provide optimal supply voltage 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 45 46 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 2 MODEL COMPLEMENT Only one version is available for 12V DC negative earth electrical systems Cigarette Lighter Adaptor Charger SLN9933 3 OPERATION A green LED on the body indicates DC power is applied When the charger is plugged into the personal phone the phone will switch on if not already to allow for normal operation 68P09304A68 O The battery icon in the display flashes as the battery is being charged As the battery reaches the fully charged condition the icon flashes at a slower rate until it 1 on continuously The internal charger operation is discussed in more detail on page 36 of this manual 4 MAINTENANCE A 1 5 glass tube fuse 15 located in the tip of the adaptor Unscrew the tip to gain access if suspect Apart from the fuse the adaptor is considered non serviceable If it becomes faulty it should be replaced with a new one HAcc8 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE ACCESSORIES intellicharge BATTERY CHARGER Figure 1 Intellicharge Battery Charger INTELLICHARGE BATTERY CHARGER 1 DESCRIPTION The new Intellicharge Battery Charger offers the same function as the original Intellicharger but has compatibility with a smaller overall size It has two pockets for batteries
291. or 0 or 1 25xxx Set Continue AGC Load the specified by xxx 0 255 into continues AGC D A convertor This command needed to follow the command 11 26 Set Continue AFC Load the value 0 4095 into the continuous AFC D A convertor 31 Initate Pseudo Random Sequence w Midamble 32 Initiate RACH Burst Sequence 33xxx Simple camping xxx is the channel number A fter phased 36 Acoustic Loopback 37 Stop Test 38 Activate SIM 39 Deactivate SIM 40 Initiate Sending all 1 s 41 Initiate Sending all 0 s Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony 45 Serving Cell Power LevelThis test will report the power level in dBm and will report the last Power Level DAC and setp AGC value 0 or 1 Step Value XXX DAC_Lxxx X 43x Change A udio Path 0 Handfree w ext speaker 1 Alering w Ext Spk 2 Alering w Transducer 3 Handset M obile 4 Handset Portable 5 Handset M obile w Ext speaker 6 External M ic w handset mobile speaker 7 Handset portable mic w ext speaker 8 External M ic w handset portable speaker 46 Display AFC DAC 47 SetAudio Volume 0 7 500 Charger xxx 000 255 51 Enable Side tone 52 Disable Side Tone 57 Master Clear 60 Display IM El 65 Display IMSI International M obile Subscriber Identity from the SIM Note Some command may be changed for different versions Oct 1 1996 Written Tony Cheung 14619 FLASHTURN ON T
292. ot go high when the radio power up then there is most likely a software problem try reprogramming the EEPROM defaults Check this Point when Power up with battery of 6 It should be 2 7 V when start up and goes to 0 V when the lite are OFF If itis housing related check for reversed LED If U 701 32 stay low but not Solder short Re tune the radio Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 307670 VIBRATOR CHECK The test bay enables vibrator using keystrokes command 1590 and verify that the increase in B current is within specification Disable vibrator using EM M key strokes command 15904 Spec 30 to 75 mA Test Procedure 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 7 V olt 2 Go to Test Mode 3 Read the current drain of the radio as Al 4 Key in 1558 to enable the vibrator 5 Read the current drain of the radio as A 2 The current drain of the vibrator 2 1 Spec Tune Power Band 1 23 31 DAC Power Band x 100 138 Trouble Shooting 1 Key 1590 2 Check U801 29 should be High 2 75 V 3 If you don t see the 2 75 V Disconnect the housing use the computer to putthe radio to Test M ode then on K ey Stroke command enter 1590 to check the 2 75 Volt on U801 29 again If no 2 75 V Check for 05 55 on 0801 CD U 801 4 f the problem came from the housing Check WP 01800 and 01801 Front Housing 5 Check the voltage on the collector os 01801 1 1 V olt when the v
293. other chargers unless approved will void the battery guarantee and may result in permanent damage to the battery and the radio Follow the charging instructions which accompany each charger 68P09304A68 0 All battery packs are considered to be non serviceable Defective batteries should be replaced A MD Batteries may explode if disposed of in fire 5 STORAGE Fully charged batteries lose their charged capacity even when not in use This is commonly referred to as self discharge Any batteries which have been left for an extended period of time should be recharged before use Rechargeable battery performance and life is affected by storage conditions Battery packs should be stored in cool dry environments to obtain the best operation 6 OPERATING TEMPERATURES For the best possible performance battery packs should be used where the ambient operating temperatures are between 0 and 40 7 LOW BATTERY WARNING When the battery level becomes too low for normal operation warning signal two double beeps will sound Low Battery will appear in the display When the battery is almost discharged the phone will automatically turn off HAcc8 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE ACCESSORIES TRAVEL BATTERY CHARGER Figure 1 Travel Battery Charger E P TRAVEL BATTERY CHARGER 1 DESCRIPTION Trave
294. phone powered off the battery icon will flash as the battery begins to charge As the battery charges the icon will stop flashing and the icon s segments will turn on one by one as the battery voltage builds up The phone uses the extra battery pin on the back of the unitto read information from E P batteries The International 8700 also uses a thermistor detect line between and ground on the battery connectors on the back of the unit to monitor battery temperature during charging If the phone is turned off while the battery charger is operating the battery icon will continue to flash and the display will show Battery Charging Note that battery charging is suspended while the phone is in a call because of the extra current demand The built in charger may delay battery fast charging after an extended call This is done to counter the effect of heat build up during a call and protects the battery from being over charged due to the elevated temperature being detected by the charger HAcc8 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL Cellular Subscriber Group CELLULAR TELEPHONE ACCESSORIES NICAD BATTERY PACKS gt 9 4 mm 11 6 mm SUPER SLIM 400 mA Hour SLIM XT 550 mA Hour STANDARD 700 mA Hour 18 5 mm e 59 Figure 1 Rechargeable Battery Packs Dimensions and Connections RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACKS 1 INTRODUCTION The International 8700 personal cellular tel
295. prom RAM Speech Code and BIC R275 TIC TX VCO VREF GIF SYN L500 SIM Flash Programming and A udio Codec R475 TIC TX Synth GIFSY N IF Section Test of theReset line Setup the Tektronic TDS340 Vertical menu DC 1V Div T 100uS Horizotal enu Trigger Position 75 75 96 pretrigger Trigger M enu Mode auto Test Procedure Plug in the Butt Plug with 7 Volt if the board turns ON Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 87670 properly it should draw about 70 to 80 mA Trouble Shooting Plug in the Butt Plug with 7 5 V olt 1 Check for 6 7 V on pin 48 of the U900 If thereis no then Check the Q999 FET switch pins1 2 amp 3 should be 6 7 V Check VREF for 2 75v on pin 11 U901 Check the voltage of V switch should be 3 3 V Check the voltage on C901 L500 C902 L 2 75v C906 R 4 75v C908 R 2 75v C916 Vswitch 3 3 V R2 75 3 3 V C916 Check U 900 for U nsolder Solder short and parts missing around U 900 f no voltage is measured Check U 900 11 V ref It may be shorted to ground 2 Check clock in at pin 17 of U703 13 M hz as save NWN and clock out at pin 370f U 703 13M hz as el MMA If there is no 13 M hz Clock Check Y 201 CR 201 and 0201 3 Check the W atchdog at R 904 U 900 31 it should goes high during the Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 97679 power up sequence In order to hold the radio on short the
296. pts that guide you to the next action or simple messages confirming that your action is complete Prompts and messages are represented in this manual in LCD style for example Enter Pl NorCompl eted Other Symbols You will find the following symbols used throughout this manual A Note contains additional information which is relevant to the feature item Caution contains important additional information which is relevant to the efficient and or safe usage of your phone 0 This symbol indicates that the feature is a Personality feature that can be customised to meet your requirements L This symbol indicates a short key sequence for the feature Contents Safety Important information for the efficient and safe operation of your phone About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card Introduces your phone explains how to charge and maintain batteries and explains about your SIM Card Making and Receiving Phone Calls Explains how to call a number how to redial and how to accept a call Menu Navigation Explains how to access and use the phone s menus Using The Phone Book Menu Provides an explanation of the Phone Book Menu and how to use it Using The Options Menu Provides an explanation of the Options Menu and how to use it Using the Quick Access Menu Provides an explanation of the Quick Access Menu and how to use it Accessories Details the accessories available for use with your phone What To Do If Helps you to solv
297. r AFC AGC DAC Radio Camped 1 radio is camp AFCDAC 2417 May various DAC 180 May various Step in out 0 Step of the Attenuator Calc RX Pwr 72 dB The reading of the RX power on the radio P1 5 On HP8922 step up the amplitude slowly and watch the AGC DAC on Uniphase TheAGC DAC increase when you step up the amplitude until the AGC DAC reach about 240 may various The step in out change to 1 the AGCDAC decrease into 1xx step up the amplitude continue until the AGC DAC goes back to 180 Read the Cal RX power as P2 Or do the Simple Test as below HP8922 Cell Status CH62 80 dBm Key in 45062 you should see this on the radio s display Cell Power Level 33 AGC DAC 145 Step Value O or 1 Change the amplitude to 50 dB m Key in 45062 you should see this on the radio s display Cell Power Level 54 1xx 1 Step Value 0 or 1 The Attenuator is working Note the radio should be camped to do this test Spec P1 P2 shouldbe 27 5dBm Trouble Shooting If you step up the amplitude to greater than 50 dBm but the Step in out don t change from 0 to 1 Check the RXI RX Q for greater than 0 7 V with 70 dBm input If the RXI and RXQ is greater than 0 7 V CD 0201 If the RXI and is less than 0 7 V trouble shoot as AGC Simple Camp STORE TABLES err A fter all the calculations and
298. r reception Your phone can also be linked to external microphones and speakers for hands free operation Your phone provides several options to complement the use of car kits 0 MuteCar Radio This option can be used to mute your car radio when you make or receive a call when your phone is attached to the car kit It must be enabled by your local dealer This option has two settings On or Off A This option will have no effect if your car radio does not have a mute feature or if the car kit installation does not support this option This option and the Auxiliary Alert option are mutually exclusive Only one of the two can be on at any time Automatic Answer This option allows your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after two rings This option has two settings or Off If this option is we recommend that the Ring or Vibrate option be set to Ring Only This option will not work in conjunction with the Simple Micro Car Kit Automatic Handsfree This option is used in conjunction with the Automatic Answer option and a car kit to transfer call conversation to external microphones and speakers It is available only with selected car kits Contact your M otorola representative for further details This option has two settings On or Off Safety Timer This option can be used to keep the phone on for a set period after the vehicle ignition has been turned off This prevents the vehicle s bat
299. rd known as a SIM Subscriber Identity M odule is supplied by your Cellular Service Provider All call billing is made to the subscriber number on the card whether it is used in this or any other GSM unit Before you use your phone please see the Your Battery section for important information on charging a new battery Understanding this Manual Many of your phone options are accessed by a simple menu system A full description of the menus and how to move around them is covered in the later section Menu Navigation When the manual describes the use of each menu item it will be assumed that you are familiar with the menu system Key Presses Key presses are represented in this manual using symbols so that you may locate and use the required sequence quickly A sequence of key presses may be shown as follows M O C This means that you should press the M key followed by the key and then the C key in sequence not simultaneously Entering Information When you are requested to enter information such as the number of the phone you wish to call this is represented in bold type For example Phone No enter the required telephone number PIN Code enter your Personal Identification Number Unlock Code enter your unlock code Location enter the Phone Book location number Introduction Prompts and Messages Your phone responds to key presses by displaying either easy to understand prom
300. rd If good board works original is faulty for improper solder and or connection Likely fail components J1101 4J1601 1602 and U1701 Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Board Assembly with a Examine the original Logic RF Board known good board If good board works original is faulty Assembly for improper solder and or connection Likely fail components J2 5 Hinged mouth piece does not go on off hook correctly usually indi cated by inability to answer incoming calls by flipping the mouthpiece down or inability to make outgoing calls a Reed switch defective 3 Reassemble unit 4 Place call to portable phone and verify Gain access to Keypad Display board as Unsolder the reed switch and replace with a If fault still present replace original reed described in Disassembly on page 21 known good one ability to answer by opening flip switch and proceed to b 1 17 97 68P09392A89 33 55 85 25 a GSM 8700 6700 Table 8 Logic Processing Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Logic Processing Probable Cause Verification and Remedy Symptom 5 Hinged mouth b Magnet in flip defective 1 Replace flip assembly with known good piece does one not go on off hook correctly 2 Place call to portable phone and verify ability to answer by opening flip 3 If fault still presen
301. rders for spare parts from HUB s Motorola National Support Centres and Hi Tech Centres should be placed with the appropriate Motorola Parts Distribution Centre BOARD REPAIRS centres authorized to carry out module level repairs must return faulty boards to the appropriate or Motorola Hi Tech Centre for repair to component level 68P09304A 68 1 6 96 GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION PORTABLE OPERATION DO NOT hold the radio so that the aerial is very close to or touching exposed parts of the body especially the face or eyes whilst transmitting The radio will perform best if it is held in the same manner as you would hold land telephone handset with the aerial angled up and over your shoulder DO NOT operate the portable phone in an aircraft Switch off your telephone The use of a cellular telephone in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft disrupt the Cellular Network and is illegal Failure to observe this instruction may lead to a suspension or denial of Cellular Telephone Service to the offender or legal action or both MOBILE PORTABLE OPERATION Telephone use in Vehicles All equipment must be properly grounded according to installation instructions for safe operation Users are advised to turn off their equipment when at a refuelling point Safety is every drivers business Cellular telephones should only be used in situations in which the driver considers it safe
302. rized Repair Centre for repair Note that full component level repair is carried out at Motorola Hi Tech Centres only 68P09304A68 0 1 11 94 1 INTERNATIONAL 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 68P09304A68 O BDesc2 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE Cellular Subscriber Group DESCRIPTION GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 G S M SYSTEM OVERVIEW The following description is intended only as a preliminary general introduction to the Global System for Mobile communications G S M cellular network This description is greatly simplified and does not illustrate the full operating capabilities techniques or technology 1 1 GENERAL CELLULAR CONCEPT The cellular systems are used to provide radiotelephone service in the frequency range 890 960 MHz A cellular system provides higher call handling capacity and system availability than would be possible with conventional radiotelephone systems those which require total system area coverage on every operating channel by dividing the system coverage area into several adjoining sub areas or cells Each cell contains a base station cell site which provides transmitting and receiving facilities for an allocated set of duplex frequency pairs channels Since each cell is a relatively small area both the cell site and the radiotelephone that it supports can operate at lower power levels than would be
303. rk Add Network To List Ch Availabl T random list of other networks found above a certain signal Add New Network Code strength Show List Find New rind Ney Of Networks de Naw Lion All remaining networks in descending order of signal strength or Delete Selection Any forbidden networks stored in the SIM card will not be included in the sorted list Available Networks Menu Navigation When selected this option will scan to see which networks are UC operating in your current location When the scan is complete r aoe press the M key to scroll through the list When you see iteris shown are available oniy network you wish to register with or store in your preferred list when Extended Menus are switched on press the O key You will now enter the Register Now and Make Preferred sub menu English 52 Using the Options Menu Register Now Once selected your phone will try to register with the selected network If the registration fails your phone will try to register in the normal way Make Preferred Once selected you will be asked where the selected network isto be located in the preferred list Network Search These options determine how often your phone tries to register with a network and how the attempt is made Registration Preferences This option determines how the phone tries to register with a network The option ha
304. rocedure 1 Setup HP8922 124 90 dBm Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 697670 TCH 1 TX level 5 2 Power up the radio with the Batterty Input of 6 V olt 3 Verify the radio is camped 4 Originate a call from the H P8922 5 Set HP89 advance to 40T 6 Reduce RF level of the B CH to 102 dBm 7 V erify the radio stay in the phone call Note Y ou may have to place a call from the M obile R adio to Base first in order to give the Base the IM SI 4 View setup Request Alerting then open flip or press to answer call Call Status should be CONNECTED Trouble Shooting R un RX test check forloss somewhere in the receive path check transimitter path also 1 If the RX path looks Check as RX Level Set HP8922 on Test M ode 28 dBm CH 1 Power up the radio with the butt plug of 7 5 V Key in 11001 Check RX path as RX Level If the signal looks good 2 Set HP8922 to 70 dBm Check RXI Q level should be over 0 7 V p p IFRXI Q is 0 7 V p p or over CD 0500 IFRXI Q is lower than 0 7 V p p CD U201 SET TIME ADVANCE To test the time advance function of the radio In the field when serveral user are communicate with the base station by the same channel in the same time they use differnet time slot but some are close to the cell while the others are far from the cell So the cell have to send out the command to set thetiming to different user to avoid interference O
305. ropriate country code followed by the phone number Accessories 65 Accessory setup menu 58 Add entry To phone memory 31 62 To SIM card memory 31 62 Adjust ring volume 47 62 Automatic answer 58 Automatic handsfree 59 Automatic lock a 48 Automatic redial 18 Auxiliary 59 Available networks 52 B Bar incoming calls 42 Bar outgoing lt _ 41 Batteries Charging 11 Charging while travelling 14 Desktop charging 12 iere pc 15 Low battery warning 10 Maintaining 11 Removing 15 Battery charge indicator 10 Battery meter 36 63 Battery saving mode 50 Blocked message 17 49 Buttons MULE 9 SIM card release 9 es 9 C 41 Call charge settings 57 Call diverting 37 62 Call holding rrt eret 40 C
306. rt Logic Processing Probable Cause Verification and Remedy Symptom 1 Unit Doesn t a Battery either dischargedor 1 Measure battery voltage across a 50 ohm Turn On or defective gt 1 Watt load Stay On 2 If the battery voltage is 6 V DC recharge the battery using the appropriate battery charger 3 Ifthe battery will not recharge replace the battery 4 f battery is not at fault proceed to b b Battery connector open or 1 Visually inspect the battery connectors on misaligned both the battery pack and the transceiver including the solder connections from the battery connector to the main PC board 2 Realign the contacts or if necessary replace either the battery or battery connector Removing the battery connector assembly has to be done with extreme care to avoid damaging the PCB 3 If battery connectors are not at fault proceed to c 62 35 09 FS 30 68P09392A89 1 17 97 Table 8 Logic Processing Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Troubleshooting Logic Processing Symptom Probable Cause Verification and Remedy 1 Unit Doesn t Turn On or Stay On Defective RF Audio Logic Board assembly Accessory Gain access to Keypad Display board as described in Disassembly on page 21 Remove the Logic RF Assembly Substitute a known good assembly Temporarily connect a 6 V dc supply to the battery connec
307. rt When Unavailable On off Divert All Calls gg L Cancel All Diverting Call diverting is a network feature If your phone is unavailable or you do not wish to receive calls incoming calls can be diverted to other phone numbers This option can be used to Divert all incoming calls unconditionally Divert incoming calls whenever your phone is unavailable Using the Options Menu 37 English Call Related TNR Features Divert calls to different numbers depending on the call type and the current status of your phone Reset all diversion options to off A You cannot change the call divert settings when you are out of GSM coverage After selecting any of the call divert options there will be a short delay while the phone asks the network for the current setting Divert When Unavailable This option will enable you to divert all incoming calls to a single number whenever your phone is unavailable The option has two settings or Off If you change the setting to 0n you will be asked to enter a diversion phone number using the digit keys a When Divert When Unavailable takes priority over detailed diversion settings Divert All Calls This option will enable you to unconditionally divert all incoming calls to a single number The option has two settings orOf f If you change the setting to 0n you will be asked to enter a diversion phone numb
308. ry charging you should double the charge time Desktop Charger Power Supply The E P Desktop Charger uses the travel charger as its wall adapter The travel charger can be plugged into a standard mains socket and the lead then plugged into the socket at the rear of the desktop charger Inserting Your Phone into the Charger Tilt your phone back until it rests at the same angle as the cut away front panel of the charger Next guide your phone into place in the front slot until the lower indicator lights up English 12 About Your Phone Battery and SIM Card Inserting Spare Battery into the Charger If you wish to insert spare battery at the same time as charging your phone slide the battery into the rear slot at the angle shown until the upper indicator lights up Itis normal for batteries to become warm during charging Charger Indicators The Desktop Charger has two sets of indicators at the front p slow flashing of the upper indicators shows that the front v to provide charging status information The lower indicators RS slot has priority Charging will not begin until the front slot represent the front slot while the upper indicators show charge 7 15 fully charged status for the rear slot When both slots are being used the front slot will always charge first Each indicator consists of three coloured LEDs Green Yellow Red As explained on the bottom of your
309. s amplitude by 1 4 we called this Wave form s value RMS The measurement of this test is the Root M ean Square of the averge fluxuation of the burst TheTest Bay will do the following Set up the H P8922 Cell Status 1 ampl 102dBm TCH 124 level 5 high channel Phase error 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 V 2 Verify the radio is camped 3 Initiate a call 4 Decrease the power supply to 5 6 V 5 Step up the HP 8922 BCH from 102 dBm to 85 dBm 6 Verify the measurement of the RM S Phase Error shold be within spec Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 617670 Spec lt 5 degree Compare figures A amp B A has the higher paek the B but the average fluxuation is less than B in a burst So B may fail RM S Phase Error test here is higher This signal has lower peak but within but averge amplitude is peak phase spec bigger Figure A Figure B Trouble Shooting PA O ver gain TX FREQUENCY ERROR HIGH MID LOW This test the radio 5 frequency by 5 6 V at CH124 62 amp 1 at M aximum power The Test Bay will do the following Set up the HP8922 Cell Status BCH 1 ampl 102 dBm TCH 124 level 5 HP8922 Cell Cntl Phase Freq Frequency Error 1 Power up the radio with the Battery Input of 6 V 2 Verify the radio is camped 3 Initiate a call 4 Decrease the power supply to 5 6 V 5 Verify the Frequency error on HP8922 is within specification Spec 92
310. s Slim NiMH battery pack and antenna The main internal electronic circuitry is contained on two multi layer boards The keypad board assembly incorporates the display keypad contacts and mylar switches alert transducer vibrator and earpiece speaker The display is glued to the board by a foam gasket with electrical connections via a short flex strip Also on the keypad board are the contacts for the SIM card the mute and volume button contacts the SIM card presence switch and the magnetic reed switch The RF Logic board is divided into two sections The top half of the board antenna end has the RF circuitry located on both sides of the board Similarly the Audio Logic circuitry is located on both sides of the lower half of the board accessory connector end Electrical connections between the two sides of the board are provided by feed through connectors at various points on the board Also on the main board are the accessory connector the battery contacts and the microphone plug socket The microphone and grommet sits in asmall pocket in the front housing and connects to the main board via two wires terminated in a plug The accessory connector situated at the base of the phone on the main board allows connections to the audio logic circuitry and antenna for accessory applications such as a mobile adaptor and chargers When the accessory RF connector is used ie terminated with a resistance of approximately 10 Kohms or less to
311. s and names SIM Card Insertion Removal The SIM card must be inserted into the unit correctly so that the card can be read and the data checked for validity before opera tion on the system will be enabled The card contains all of the user s personal identifica tion numbers and details of the system the phone operates on Figure 6 Inserting SIM Card SIM Card Slot SIM Card Flip Assembly Interface Contacts The whole SIM card should slide completely and securely into the slot at the base of the phone Ensure that the contacts of the card face towards the front of the phone i e towards the flip The sliding card release button will move upwards as the SIM card is inserted When the button reaches the top of its recess and the card is flush with the base of the phone it is inserted correctly To remove the SIM card from the unit push the sliding SIM card release button downwards The card will then be pushed out far enough to allow complete removal The User Guide contains full information about inserting and removing the SIM card Security Information To stop unauthorized personnel using your SIM card the option of using a Personal Identity Number PIN is available When enabled the option requires on power up a verification number to be entered via the unit s keypad before the card can be used Three attempts to enter the correct PIN may be made If after the three entries the correct
312. s can very easily be overheard by the use of a suitable radio receiver GSM offers vastly improved confidentiality because of the way in which data is digitally encrypted and transmitted Better Call Quality Co channel interference handover breaks and fading will be dealt with more effectively in the digital system The call quality is also enhanced by error correction which reconstructs lost information Efficiency The GSM system will be able to use spectral resources in much more efficient way than previous analogue systems In the figure below the area bounded by bold lines represents the total coverage area of a hypothetical system This area is divided into several cells each containing cell site base station operating on given set of channels which interfaces radiotele phone subscribers to the telephone switching system Figure 2 Hypothetical Cell System 6 68P09392A89 The radiotelephones themselves are capable of operation on any channel in the system allowing them to operate in any cell Due to the low power requirements for communi cations between radiotelephones in a partic ular cell and the cell site operating channels may be repeated in cells which are outside the coverage area of each other For example presume that cell operates on channels arbitrarily numbered 1 through 8 cell B operates on channels 9 through 16 cell C operates on channels 17 through 24 and cell D operates on c
313. s reached the Total Charge Limit will need to be reset or switched off before any chargeable calls can be made Select 0f f to switch off the charge limit Set Charge Type This option defines whether charge information is displayed as either phone units or currency Units Sets the charge type to phone units Currency Sets the charge type to currency You will be prompted to enter theCurrency Name Enter a 3 character notation for example GBP for the UK DEM for Germany or FFR for France You will then be prompted Charge Per Unit Enterthe amount and press O Lifetime Timer This option is used to display the total time of all calls made on your phone This meter can not be reset the Reset All Timers M aster Reset or Master Clear options have no effect Using the Options Menu Accessory Setup Menu Accessory Setup Mute Car Radiot E I on Off Automatic Answert peq On Off Automatic Handsfree pa On Off p Safety Timer t Auxiliary Alert vit on p off Menu Navigation x WC t These options mutually exclusive and can only be enabled by your local dealer Availability depends on the type of car kit installed You will only be able to access this menu when your phone is mounted in a car kit English 58 Using the Options Menu Car kits can provide charging facilities and some provide connection to an external antenna for bette
314. s two settings Aut omati c Search orManual Search Automatic Search Mode In the automatic mode the phone will try to register with the first network in the sorted list If this is successful your phone will display the network name and then enter the standby mode If registration is unsuccessful with one network in the list your phone will try the next listed network If your phone fails to register with any of the listed networks it will start at the beginning of the list after a preset period The preset period is determined by the Frequency Of Search option Network Selection Manual Search Mode In the manual mode the phone will present you with the sorted list of networks Usethe and O keys to select one network from the list Your phone will try to register with the selected network If this is successful the phone will display the network name and then enter the standby mode If registration is unsuccessful your phone will present the list again after a preset period The preset period is determined by the Frequency Of Search option A If the phone is turned off and then on again it will revert to Automatic Search mode and register with a network in the order of the sorted list Frequency Of Search This option is used to determine how long your phone waits before attempting to re register after a registration attempt has failed The option has the following settings Sl ow Search Medi um Search Fas
315. scribed in this instruction manual may include copy righted Motorola computer programs stored in semi conductor memories or other media Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program Accordingly any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Furthermore the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication estoppel or otherwise any license under the copyrights patents or patent applica tions of Motorola except for the normal non exclusive royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product 68P09392A89 1 17 97 PREFACE MOTOHOLA Cellular Subscriber Group GSM 8700 6700 Preface Specifications Table 1 General Function Specification Frequency Range 890 915 MHz TX 935 960 MHz RX Channel Spacing 200 kHz Channels 124 carriers with 8 channels per carrier Modulation GMSK at BT z 0 3 Transmitter Phase Accuracy 5 Degrees RMS 20 Degrees peak Duplex Spacing 45 MHz Frequency Stability 0 10 ppm of the downlink frequency
316. sed modified or deleted as desired Service Centre Before you can send any messages you must use this option to enter your M essage Service Centre number This number is obtained from your Cellular Service Provider Expiry Period You can use this option to specify the maximum time in hours that your unforwarded messages are to remain with the M essage Service Centre before being deleted When you select this option the current expiry period will be displayed the default is 24 hours The maximum value you can enter is 10584 though the real limit will depend on your M essage Service Centre Outgoing Message Type This option is network dependent and can be used to specify the format of your outgoing messages You can select from the following message types Text default Fax X400 Pagi ng E Mail ERMES orVoi ce A You do not need to select Voi ce to send messages to Voicemail boxes Phone Setup Menu Phone Setup Adjust Ring Volume Ring or Vibrate ring Only L Vibrate Only L Vibrate Then Ring NoRing or Vibrate Set Ringer Tone lt gt Standard Tone Music Tone Phone Lock Automatic Lock ae Lock Now B Change Unlock Code off Require SIM Card gt gt n L B Change SIM PIN Code Change SIM PIN2 Code New Security Code TV Las Vode ib et ne SR Menu Navigation 2 Tesuasmenw FO i w L Items shown 5 are avail
317. sktop E P Charger must be used with the Travel Battery Charger Wall Adapter SPN4221 or SPN4222 Travel Battery Charger Wall Adapter SPN4221 UK or SPN4222 Euro The Travel Battery Charger connects to the Desktop Rapid Charger or directly to the phone When connected directly to the phone it charges the battery and also provides dead battery operation Cigarette Lighter Adapter SLN9933 The Cigarette Lighter Adapter connects to your phone and allows you to charge your phone s battery when driving When the phone is in use the adapter overrides the battery therefore preserving battery life The adapter also provides dead battery operation The Cigarette Lighter Adapter is also available with a connection to an external antenna SLN9934 Accessories Passive Hang up Cup SYN4932 The Passive Hang up Cup is a simple holder for mounting your phone in the car Handsfree Car Kit 54386 The Handsfree Car Kit allows you to safely operate your phone while driving The car kit provides a responsive directional microphone and direct antenna connection While connected to the phone the car kit also charges the battery PC Cards CELLect 1 54154 CELLect 2 S5253 UK S5254 Germany Both PC Cards allow you to send and receive data and fax calls using your phone and computer with Type ll slot The CELLect 2 card also contains a landline modem for connection to the conventional telephone network This g
318. splayed Enter PIN arequestto enterthe SIM card PIN code if required Enter Phone Unlock Code request to enter the phone unlock code if required Searching followed by a network name asthe phone searches and then finds a suitable network to connect to Entering Your SIM Card PIN Code To enter the PIN code enter PIN Code O As you type in each digit of the PIN code character will be displayed If you make a mistake press and release the C the last digit Holding the C entry When the PIN code is complete press the O key If the PIN code entered is incorrect the warning message Wr ong PI N will be displayed followed by Enter PIN key to remove key down will remove the entire If the PIN number is entered incorrectly three times in a row your phone will automatically lock up and the Bl ocked message will be displayed See Unblocking Your Phone for details on unblocking your phone The PIN code can be changed see Change SIM PIN Code in the Using the Options Menu section for more details 0 Entering Your Unlock Code If your phone displays the message Enter Phone Unlock Code you must enter your unlocking code by entering Unlock Code O The unlock code isa four digit number which is set at manufacture to 1234 The code can be changed see Change Unlock Code in the Using the Options Menu section for more details If you forget your unlock code pressthe M key This will display the
319. ss lt gt to scroll through the menu and then press O You can change the features and the positions of the features available in the Quick Access menu see Customising the Quick Access Menu Each Quick Access feature is represented by an icon as well as the feature name The currently selected icon is shown with a dark background B Find Name You will be prompted to Enter Name Enter the first three characters of the name and press O The first matching entry in the Phone Book will be displayed Press O to call the number D Find Location You will be prompted to Enter Location Enter the location number and press O The first matching entry in the Phone Book will be displayed Press O to call the number 4 The menu shown above represents the default features supplied with your phone Using the Quick Access Menu 61 English F Addto Phone You will be prompted to enter a phone number and then a name a If you already had a number displayed it will automatically be re displayed when you select this feature The number will be stored in the next available phone memory location See Add Entry for more information T SIM You will be prompted to enter a phone number and then a name a If you already had a number displayed it will automatically be re displayed when you select this feature The number will be stored in the next available SIM card location See Add Entry for more informat
320. ss quality standards and are designed to withstand the harshest environmental conditions Our commitment to Total Customer Satisfaction and over sixty five years of experience in personal communications mean you can depend upon the quality of this M otorola product This cellular telephone incorporates Personality Unique to Motorola Personality removes the complexity of cellular communications by guiding you through the features and presenting you with simple choices every step of the way Personality also allows you to personalise the way you use your phone for example different ringer tones a phone book and network selection preferences all presented with clarity and simplicity In this manual each of the Personality features is identified with an0 symbol to indicate that it is customisable to meet your requirements This cellular telephone has been designed for use with the worldwide GSM Global System for Mobile communications network By using digital communications methods your phone provides a number of advantages over traditional cellular systems Superior speech quality is attained without the usual background noises and interference Your conversation may be encrypted for security Conversations cannot be eavesdropped using scanning equipment when the signal is encrypted You are not restricted to use within one country Your subscriber number is not contained within the phone as with other systems Instead a Smart Ca
321. sted or flexed the contact is broken causing power down Inspect the following components for dry joints 1101 connector to Display board J1201 display connector Battery contact assembly External device connector assembly 400 Y201 e CR201 All chips If the above analysis does not identify the fault return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center Logic Processing Supplement 5 PCB Draws Current When Off Ensure that the 6 5 power supply is being applied to the PCB and that the PCB is switched off Spray the top RF Logic circuitry with freezer spray until the PCB is frosted white If the frost melts on a specific component s before the normal defrost process occurs replace the component s If the above process does not eliminate the fault spray the bottom RF Logic circuitry with freezer spray until the PCB is frosted white Once again if the frost melts on a specific component s before the normal defrost process occurs replace the component s If steps 2 and 3 fail to eliminate the fault or the defective component s are not covered by this level of repair return the PCB to a Motorola Hi Tech Center 55 9g 25 1 17 97 68 09392 89 45 Troubleshooting RF Block Diagram Figure 8 LVEDEN AYVLAalddOud TVILN3GIJ3NOO VTOHOLON Trouble shooting ap 2 290 zHA 7206 lt lt 290
322. t replace original flip assembly and proceed to c c Keypad Display board 1 Replace the Keypad Display board with a defective known good one 2 Place call to portable phone and verify that the fault has been eliminated 3 If original Keypad Display board is at fault examine it for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components J1101 d Logic RF Board Assembly 1 Replace the Logic RF board with a known defective good one 2 Place call to phone and verify that the fault has been eliminated 3 If original Logic RF Board Assembly is at fault examine it for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components C905 and J2 6 Vibrator a Vibrator motor defective 1 Gain access to Keypad Display board as feature not described in Disassembly on page 21 functioning 2 Check connections if OK unsolder the supply wires to the motor and unclip the motor from the board 3 Replace the motor with a known good one Reassemble unit 4 Place call to portable phone and verify vibrator feature functions 1d 52 5 If fault still present replace original vibrator motor and proceed to b b Keypad Display board 1 Replace the Keypad Display board with a defective known good one 2 Place call to portable phone and verify that the fault has been eliminated 3 If original Keypad Display board is at fault examine it for improper solder and or connections Likely fai
323. t Search orConti nuous Search Fast and Continuous Search may use up a significant amount of battery power Using the Options Menu 53 English 0 Preferred Networks Add Network To List This option enables you to add networks to your preferred list When selected the Choose From Available option will scan to see which networks are operating in your current location When the scan is complete press the M key to scroll through the list When you see a network you wish to store in your preferred list press the O key You will be asked where the selected network is to be located in the preferred list The Choose From Known option will when selected present you with a preset list of networks Pressthe M key to scroll through the list When you see a network you wish to store in your preferred list press the O key You will be asked where the selected network is to be located in the preferred list Select the Add New Network Code option to enter network codes directly Once entered you will be asked where the network is to be located in the preferred list Show List Of Networks This option is used to display the networks you have stored in your preferred list In addition pressing the O key will select the currently displayed entry and enter a move delete sub menu When Move to New Location is selected you will be asked to enter a new location for the selected network When selected Delete Selection wil
324. table telephone exhibits poor reception and or erratic operation such as calls frequently dropping weak and or distorted audio etc a Antenna assembly is defective Check to make sure that the antenna pins are properly connected to the Logic RF assembly If OK substitute a known good antenna assembly If the fault is still present proceed to b b Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Assembly refer to symptom 1 Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB 3 Display is erratic or provides partial or no display a Mating connections to from Keypad Display board faulty Gain access to Keypad Display main board as described in the DISASSEMBLY instructions in this manual If connections are faulty then replace the RF Logic assembly and or the Keypad Display board as necessary If connections are not at fault proceed to b b Keypad Display board 18 defective Substitute a known good Keypad Display circuit board if the fault is not cleared re install the original Keypad Display PCB and proceed to c c Logic RF Board Assembly defective Replace Logic RF Assembly refer to symptom 1 Verify that the fault has been cleared and re assemble the unit with the new PCB 68P09304A68 O ETrbl5 1 6 96 Table 1 TROUBLESHOOTING International 8700 Cellular Telephone Troubleshooting and Repair Chart Assembly Replacement Level
325. tandard 10 Travel Battery Charger This is a mains adaptor which plugs directly into the phone It charges the phone s battery whilst attached and also provides dead battery operation NOTE The International 8700 may have various battery options as standard depending on the particular market requirements 68P09304A68 O BDesc2 1 6 96 Cellular Subscriber Group INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERS CELLULAR TELEP ONAL HONE PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FEATURE LIST FEATURE LIST PRESENT FEATURELIST PRESENT VISUAL AUDIO FEATURES Memories Numbered 100 Display 32 X 96 Pixel SIM Card Dependent on SIM X Graphics Display Last 10 Numbers Dialed X Number Capacity per location 20 Last 10 Numbers Received if using CLI X Name Capacity per location 16 Notepad Last Number Entered X Language Selection 14 Turbo Dialling 9 Numbers 1 Touch Dial Automatic Language Selection based on SIM X from Phone and SIM X Silence Ringer w Visual X Alpha Name Storage x Silence Keypad Tones x Recall by Name or Location X Adjustable earpiece volume X Memory Linking Pause X Adjustable ringer volume X Memory Auto Load X Silence Scratchpad X Memory Scroll x Call in Absence Indicator x Alpha Name Scrolling x Display Signal Strength continuous x Memory Capacity x Display Battery Level continuous x DTMF Signalling Audible Low Battery Warning x Long Tone DTMF X Status Review X DTMF from Memory X Microphone Mute X Postscripting X Illum
326. teries might affect your phone and in such cases the manufacturer assumes no liability European Union Directives Conformance Statement This product is in conformance with the requirements of the applicable EU Council Directives Declarations of Conformance with the requirements are located at Motorola Ltd European Cellular Subscriber Division Midpoint Alen on Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom Safety Turns the phone on and off Press to see more information on the operation currently displayed Accept call setting option Accessthe Phone Book menu Access the Quick Access menu Access the Options menu Reject call setting option Move backward and forward through the entries About Your Phone Battery and SIM Special Keys The Mute Button The Mute button is on the left hand side of your phone Press to switch privacy mute on and off during a call SIM Card Release The SIM card release button is on the left hand side of your phone To remove the SIM card slide this button down toward the base of the phone and pull the SIM card out Volume Buttons The buttons on the right hand side of your phone adjust the earpiece keypad tone and The Flip Opening the flip answers a call closing the flip ends a call ringer volume levels Volume is increased with the upper button and decreased with the lower button About Your Phone Battery
327. tery from becoming drained and saves you from having to re enter PIN and Unlock codes after every short stop As standard the Safety Timer is set to 60 minutes Once selected this option can be adjusted to any value between zero and 999 minutes When set to zero this option is effectively switched off Auxiliary Alert This option allows your phone to alert you of an incoming call by flashing your vehicle lights or by sounding the horn It must be enabled by your local dealer a Some local regulations prevent the use of this option and accordingly this option may not be present on your phone This option and the Mute Car Radio option are mutually exclusive Only one of the two can be on at any time Using the Options Menu 59 English English 60 Using the Options Menu Using the Quick Access Menu E e L Find Name Add to SIM N a Call Voicemail Battery Meter eme GP Lock Now EE GD Adjust Ring J Read Messages i Vibrate On Off 2 Divert On Off Menu Navigation ER x Although the features in your phone are available through easy access menus some of the most commonly used features are also available in the Quick Access menu Each feature in the menu is allocated number from 1 to 9 To use a Quick Access feature press the quick access key followed by the number of the feature orpre
328. the DSC bus 2 wire full duplex connection U plink and Downlink Uplink and Downlink are also used to sense the present also a DHFA and the ignition status of the DHFA with DC levels f all the above looks good the radio still not turning on CD U 702 The software 10 If the radio turn on 5 seconds then shut down Go in to the Test M ode immediatly Key in 1701 ittell the fail code usually itis a bad M odem Quick Check pull Watch Dog high Reset line One steady pulse Bad boot code problem between and the software __ Steady One flashing pulse Unsolder on software M icroprocessor Flashing Two staedy pulse some other device is causing the problem lg Steady Two pulse with the 2nd one flashing Bad Ram or bad software IN Flashing Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 114679 CHECK SPEECH CODER SPEECH CODER VERSION To Check the Speech Coder and its version Test Procedure K ey in 22 The Speech Coder V ersion should be shown on the display Spec XX XX example 11 70 Trouble Shooting 1 Check for Unsolder and Solder short on U 801 2 Check for 13 M hz Clock to the frequency doubler U 805 and the 26 M hz clock into U 801 pin 37 26 Mhz out from pin 1 X when p3 4 shorted B b G 4 13 Mhz in 2 xx m j cm Shorted 3 Check all data lines at U 801 4 Check DSC on 400 pin3 4 3V an
329. the phone Slide a charged battery on to the back of the personal telephone so that the telephone can be powered up Finally connect a cable from the test adaptor to the RF in out port of the communications analyser and power both the analyser and personal telephone on The equipment set up shown in Figure 1 should now be in place O Motorola Ltd 1996 Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke 68P09304A68 Rights Reserved Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom 1 12 96 15 Printed in U K 8700 CELLULAR TELEPHONE 3 TESTING PROCEDURE All information required to perform the desired tests and measurements should be obtained from the communication analyser user manual Ensure that the unit being tested is capable of both initiating a call to the analyser and receiving a call from the analyser Confirm that the displayed Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity International Mobile Equipment Identity IMEI and dialled number are correct When a call is in progress the following tests should be carried out on channels 1 62 and 124 The recorded results must be within the acceptable stated limits if the unit being tested passes all the tests it should be taken as functioning correctly If the unit being tested fails to conform with any of the expected measurements it should be taken as faulty and repaired accordingly The following table states the required tests and tolerances
330. therwise any license under the copyrights patents or patent applications of Motorola except for the normal non exclusive royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS INTERNATIONAL 8700 GSM GENERAL Frequency Range 890 915 MHz Tx 935 960 MHz Rx Channel Spacing 200 kHz Number of Channels 124 carriers with 8 channels per carrier Modulation GMSK at BT 0 3 Transmitter Phase Accuracy 5 Degrees RMS 20 Degrees peak Duplex Spacing 45 MHz Frequency Stability 0 10 ppm of the downlink frequency Rx Voltage Operation 45 7 to 8 5V dc Transmit Current 199 mA average 900mA peak Stand by Current Average 10 mA DRX 2 Dimensions 131 mm 1 x 59 mm W x 24 mm D 5 2 x 2 3 x 0 9 Size Volume 173 cubic cm 10 6 cubic in Weight Approximately 210g Includes GP4 MiMH battery pack and antenna Temperature Range 20 C to 55 xC TRANSMITTER RF Power Output 33 dBm Output Impedance 50 ohms nominal Spurious Emissions 36 dBm up to 1 GHz 30 dBm 1 GHz RECEIVER RF Level 102 dBm RX bit error rate 100 kbits 2 Channel Hop Time 500 microseconds Time to Camp Approximately 10 seconds SPEECH CODING Speech Coding Type Regular Pulse Excitation Linear Predictive Coding with Long Term Prediction RPE LPC with LTP Bit Rate 13 0 kbps Frame Duration 20 ms
331. timator Mobility Management Man Machine Interface Mobile Network Code Mobile Originated Mobile Originated Point to Point messages Memorandum of Understanding Mobile Roaming Number Mobile Station Mobile Services Switching Centre Mobile Station Class Mark Mobile Station Identification Number Mobile Station international ISDN number Mobile Station Roaming Number Mobile Termination Message Transfer Part Mobile Terminated Point to Point messages Normal Burst Network Elements Norme European de Telecommunications Network Management Network Management Centre Operations and Maintenance Off Air Call Set Up Outgoing Calls Barred Operations and Maintenance Application Part previously was OAMP Operations and Maintenance Centre Operations and Maintenance Centre Radio Part Operations and Maintenance Centre Switch Part Open System Interconnection Packet Assembly Disassembly facility Paging CHannel Public Data Networks Personal Identification Number Public Land Mobile Network Plain Old Telephone Service basic telephone services Public Switched Packet Data Network Public Switched Telephone Public Telecommunications Operator QOS RAB RACH RBDS RBU RCU REC REL RELP LTP REQ RFCH REN RLP ROSE RXCDR RXLEV RXQUAL SABM SACCH SAPI 68P09304A68 O Quality of Service Random Access Burst Random Access CHannel Remote BSS Diagnostic Subsystem Remote Base Station Unit PCN R
332. tion IC Visited PLMN Transcoder Transcoder Three ParTY service JGlos9 1 6 96 DOCUMENTATION Cellular Subscriber Group FEEDBACK FORM THIS FORM MAY BE USED WITH ANY DOCUMENTATION TO REPORT ANY PROBLEMS OR OMISSIONS TO THIS TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION FIRST PHOTOCOPY THIS PAGE THEN FILL OUT THE BOXES BELOW AND FAX OR MAIL TO THE ADDRESS GIVEN AT THE FOOT OF THE PAGE MANUAL NUMBER REVISION SYSTEM ETACS NMT GSM etc NAME ADDRESS TELEPHONE NUMBER NATURE OF PROBLEM OR OMISSION A hand written report is acceptable Quote Section page No Diag No Fax to 44 256 819561 Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 1PL United Kingdom JGlos9 Motorola Ltd 1994 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K 1 3 94 PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK INTERNATIONAL 8700 PORTABLE CELLULAR TELEPHONE NOTES Cellular Subscriber Group Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom JGlos9 Motorola Ltd 1996 All Rights Reserved Printed in U K 68P09304A68 O 1 6 96 Greater China Cellular Subscriber Division Product Service Preview GSM GC87 Models S5904AAB GC87 for PRC market 55895 GC87 for Hong Kong market 5901AAB GC87 for Taiwan market
333. tore it in your Outgoing M essages list See How to Create and Edit SMS M essages for more information on using the M essage Editor Delete Message This option will delete the currently viewed message Message Editor The M essage Editor is used to edit the currently selected message and then to either send the modified message or store it in your Outgoing M essages list See How to Create and Edit SMS M essages for more information on using the M essage Editor Cell Broadcast This option is used to set the cell broadcast settings The option has two settings or Off you change the setting to you will be asked to enter the channel you wish to receive information from Please contact your Cellular Service Provider for a list of available channels and the information they provide While a broadcast message is scrolling across the display you can stop and start it by pressing Press 4 restart the message from the beginning If you want to remove the message from the display press followed by O If you need to use the and keys for their normal functions while you are receiving a cell broadcast message you must first remove the message English 46 Using the Options Menu Message Settings Voicemail Number This option is used to enter phone number which will be used by the Call Voicemail option If there is already a Voicemail Number this will be shown in the display This can be u
334. tors as shown below Depress the PWR button if unit turns on and stays on disconnect the dc power source and reassemble the telephone with the new Logic RF Board assembly and refer to Testing After Repair on page 27 Logic RF Board Assembly is not at fault re install original Logic RF Board Assembly and proceed to d 46V GND Connector J400 Y Battery Connectors LOGIC RF BOARD PARTIAL VIEW d Keypad Display circuit board failure Replace the Keypad Display board Temporarily connect a 6 V dc supply to the battery connectors as shown above Depress the PWR button if unit turns on and stays on disconnect the dc power source and reassemble the telephone with the new Keypad Display board 2 Display is erratic or provides partial or no display Mating connections to from Keypad Display board faulty Gain access to Keypad Display main board as described in Disassembly on page 21 If connections are faulty then replace the connector s as necessary If connections are not at fault proceed to b Keypad Display board defective Substitute a known good Keypad Display circuit board If known board works the original is faulty and should be examined for improper solder and or connections Likely fail components J1101 1 17 97 68P09392A89 31 ge 25 55 a a 55 50 FS G
335. trength meter in the display If the signal is weak move to an open space or if you are in a building move closer to a window Check the Call Diversion and Call Barring settings Check the Ringer and VibraCall settings If both are off there is no audible alert See Ring or Vibrate Your phone won t unlock Have you inserted a new SIM card Enter the new PIN code See Entering Your SIM Card PIN Code Do you have a replacement phone Enter the default phone unlock code 1234 Have you forgotten the unlock code Press M to change the unlock code you will need your security code Your PIN is blocked Enter the PIN unblocking code supplied with your SIM card see Unblocking Your Phone Your PIN2 is blocked Enter the PIN2 unblocking code supplied with your SIM card see Change SIM PIN2 Code Your SIM card won t work Is the card inserted the right way round See SIM Card Insertion Is the gold chip visibly damaged or scratched Return the card to your Service Provider Check the SIM contacts If they are dirty clean them with an antistatic cloth The battery won t charge Check the charger Is it properly connected Are its contacts clean and dry See Your Battery Check the battery contacts Are they clean and dry Check the battery temperature If it is warm let it cool before recharging S it an old battery Battery performance will decline after several years use Replace the battery The battery drains faster th
336. ulated onto the carrier using Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GMSK a very efficient method of phase modulation Figure 3 TDMA Transmission USER DATA SECTIONED INTO BLOCKS INFORMATION BURSTS SENT IN ALLOCATED TIME 0112 13 4 5 6 7 FRAME 3 zl Each time an information burst is trans mitted it may be transmitted on a different frequency This process is known as frequency hopping Frequency hopping reduces the effects of fading and enhances the security and confidentiality of the link A GSM radiotelephone is only required to transmit for one burst in each frame and not continually thus enabling the unit to be more power efficient Each radiotelephone must be able to move from one cell to another with minimal inconvenience to the user The mobile itself carries out signal strength measurements on adjacent cells and the quality of the traffic channel is measured by both the mobile and the base station The handover criteria can thus be much more accurately determined and the handover made before the channel quality deteriorates to the point that the subscriber notices When radiotelephone is well within cell the signal strength measured will be high As the radiotelephone moves towards the edge of the cell the signal strength and quality measurement decreases
337. und and compare to a good board Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 157670 STAND BY DRAIN To check the Stand By current drain of the radio by using the battery input of 7 V olts After the back lites are OFF the current of the radio should be within the specification Spec Board 30 to 100 mA typical 45 mA Radio 70 to 170 mA Trouble Shooting Test the Radio s functions 1 Power step 0 15 2 Do the pull range 3 Using computer to test the TX Pseudo 4 Check all the voltage supply for unstable voltage and ripple 5 Verify that the receiver is working properly 6 Connect a front hiusing and check backlites display and keypad functions Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 167670 TEST MODE Set Up 7 V Test bench puts radio into Test Mode It is rare to have this failure If it does It may be caused by a software problem or bad connection Trouble Shooting 1 Press for 2 seconds to check if TEST show up on the display 2 Check Unsoder U 701 U703 and U 705 3 Check for U nsolder on External Connector 4 Check for parts missing on the front housing Note Once the radio has passed phasing it will not go into Test M ode without a SimCard Oct 1 1996 Written By Tony Cheung 177670 POWER STEPOLOW CH The Test Bay will Power up the board with 8V on the battery connector 1 Set AFC DAC to 2340 2 Select Channel 1 3 Perform Pseudo T est with power level 15 13
338. used in conventional systems Using this technique radiation on a given channel is virtually contained in the cell operating on that channel and to some extent those cells directly adjacent to that cell Since the coverage area of a cell on a given channel is limited to a small area relative to the total system coverage area a channel may be reused in another cell outside the coverage area of the first By this means several subscribers may operate within the same geographic area without interference with each other on a single channel BDesc2 Motorola Ltd 1996 AII Rights Reserved Printed in U K 1 2 Customer Services Publishing Midpoint Alencon Link Basingstoke Hampshire RG21 7PL United Kingdom G S M DESCRIPTION 68P09304A68 0 1 6 96 3 Refer to Figure 1 In the figure area bounded by bold lines represents the total coverage area of a hypothetical system This area is divided into several cells each containing a cell site base station operating on a given set of channels which interfaces radiotelephone subscribers to the telephone switching system Figure 1 Hypothetical Cell System The radiotelephones themselves are capable of operation on any channel in the system allowing them to operate in any cell Due to the low power requirements for communications between radiotelephones in a particular cell and the cell site operating channels may berepeated in cells which are outside the
339. ve call on hold and reconnect a held call press M andthen select the Switch Calls option accept waiting call press The active call will be placed on hold If you prefer to end the active call before accepting the waiting call press M select the End Active Call option orEnd Held Call option as appropriate To reject a waiting call press M and select the Rej ect Call Waiting option or simply pressthe C key A If you have an active call a call on hold and a call waiting you cannot accept the waiting call until you end either the active call or the held call 1 A quicker method of making another call is to enter the number to be called directly As soon as you press the first digit the display will change to Cal This will disappear three seconds after the last key press but if you press O before then your phone will place the current call on hold and attempt to call the number entered Call Related TREE op 2 Features Call Holding and Call Waiting Messages During Call Holding and or Call W aiting operations your phone may display one or more of the following messages Trying A request to hold the active call or swap the active call with a held call has been made or A request to reconnect the held call has been made Hold Failed The request to hold a call has been unsuccessful Cannot Hold Second Call A call is already on hold you cannot place two calls on hold at the same time Reco
340. w that the rear slot is in stand by mode A rapid flashing yellow LED indicates that the battery in the relevant pocket is out of temperature or voltage range for rapid charging Rapid charging automatically continues when the battery is back in range A fast flashing red LED indicates a faulty or out of temperature range battery Under this condition the battery will not be charged 68P09304A68 O a 10 5096 10 Figure 2 Battery Charge Level Indication Note that when charging a Lithium Ion battery the charger switches immediately to trickle charge mode Consequently the corresponding indicator LED will turn green but this does not indicate that the battery is fully charged The Intellicharger and batteries should be at normal room temperature 20 C for optimum charging and operation performance 4 MAINTENANCE The Intellicharger is considered non serviceable If it becomes faulty it should be replaced with a new one The base and transformer are available separately if required HAcc8 1 6 96 INTERNATIONAL 8700 PERSONAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE GLOSSARY OF GSM TERMS Cellular Subscriber Group Glossary of GSM Terms Note Those marked are Motorola specific abbreviations A Interface Interface between MSC and BSS DB Dummy Burst A3 Authentication algorithm D
341. y memory block usage 14x Initiate Out of Memory condition 15x Generate tone 16 Mute tone generator 19 Display SAW version number of Call Processor 20 Display S W version number of Modem 22 Display S W version number of Speech Coder 24 Set step AGC 25xxx Set continuous AGC 26xxxx Set continuous AFC 31x Initiate Pseudo Random Sequence with Midamble 324 Initiate RACH Burst Sequence 33xxx Synchronize to BCH carrier 34xxxyy Configuration to TCH FS amp Enable TCH loopback w o Frame Ensure Indication 36 Initiate acoustic loopback 37 Stop test 38 Activate SIM 1 17 97 68 09392 89 15 Bunsay GSM 8700 6700 Table 5 GSM Test Commands Key Sequence Test Function Name 39 Deactivate SIM 40 Initiate sending all 1 s 41 Initiate sending all 05 42 Disable echo processing 43x Change audio path 45xxx Serving cell power level 46 Display current value of AFC DAC 47x Set audio volume 51 Enable sidetone 52 Disable sidetone 57 Initialize non volatile memory 58 Display security code 58xxxxxx Modify security code 59 Display lock code 59xxx Modify lock code 60 Display IMEI 61 Display MCC portion of the LAI 61xxx Modify MCC portion of the LAI 62 Display MNC portion of the LAI 62xx Modify MNC portion of the LAI 63 Display LAC portion of the LAI 63xxxxx Modify LAC portion
342. y prompts and help messages will be in the selected language Battery Saving Mode This option can help you to conserve battery power Also known as DTX Discontinuous Transmission this feature will cause your phone to operate at reduced power when you are not talking The option has two settings or Off 0 Select Keypad Tones This option allows you to change or disable tones you hear when you press key The option has three settings Nor mal orNo Tones Tones Single Tone Phone Status Master Clear etatis Review This option should be used with extreme caution for example it will clear all the Phone Book entries from your phone memory This option is used to restore certain phone options to their original settings This option can be used to view the current setting of menu options When selected your phone will display a list of menu items which have been changed from the default setting Press the M key to view the next item When selected you will be asked to enter the security code Once entered the master clear option will perform the same M aster Reset f operations as M aster Reset plus the following operations This option should be used with caution Clear the Phone Book entries from phone memory not from This option is used to restore certain phone options to their SIM memory original settings When selected you will be asked to enter the security code Once entered the master r

international 8700

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents